API Commands: For Resellers of Domain Names and Related Services

API Commands
For resellers of
domain names
and related
services
Version 4.3
March 13, 2009
3/13/09 1
© 2003-2009 Register.com, Inc.
Register.com, Incorporated ("Register.com"), at its sole discretion, may change the terms, conditions and
operation of its application programming interface and related documents (the "API") at any time. Access to
and use of the API is by license only. By using the API and documentation, you agree to the terms of this license
(following).
Register.com hereby grants you a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license, exercisable solely
during the term of this license, to use the API solely for the purpose of accessing and using the services
provided by Register.com and, unless otherwise specified in writing, solely for your personal, non-commercial
use.
Except for the rights expressly granted above, this license does not transfer from Register.com to you any
Register.com® technology, and all rights, titles and interests in and to any Register.com technology and the API
shall remain solely with Register.com.
You shall not prepare any derivatives of the API or otherwise branch the API. It is understood that a derivative
or "branch" of the API would be a new version of the API, with changed or additional functions (an application
you build which includes unmodified API commands is not a derivative or branch of the API).
You shall not create, apply for, or otherwise procure any patent or copyright interest in the API and any
derivative ("IP Interest") thereof which IP Interest would block, impede, or make more expensive Register.com’s
continued use and enjoyment of the API. You agree that if you breach the provisions of this section, that any IP
Interests created thereby shall be assigned to Register.com as a "work for hire" as this expression is defined in
U.S. copyright law and/or that you will provide, at no cost to Register.com, a royalty free license to use such IP
Interests as required for Register.com’s continued use and enjoyment of the API.
You shall not copy or use the API except as specified in this license or as otherwise specified by Register.com in
writing.
You shall not use the API to communicate with or to control a system other than system(s) designated by
Register.com and you may not access or use Register.com’s services using any access mechanism other than the
API.
WE AND OUR ADVERTISERS, SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS PROVIDE OUR PRODUCTS AND SERVICES "AS IS" AND
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OR CONDITION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. WE AND OUR ADVERTISERS, SUPPLIERS AND
LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE FOREGOING DISCLAIMER MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, REGISTER.COM SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR YOUR BUSINESS FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST OR IMPUTED PROFITS OR ROYALTIES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE API AND THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY GOODS OR SERVICES PROVIDED, WHETHER
FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR ANY OBLIGATION ARISING THEREFROM OR OTHERWISE, WHETHER LIABILITY IS
ASSERTED IN CONTRACT OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY) AND IRRESPECTIVE
OF WHETHER YOU HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE. EACH PARTY HEREBY
WAIVES ANY CLAIMS THAT THESE EXCLUSIONS DEPRIVE SUCH PARTY OF AN ADEQUATE REMEDY.
March 13, 2009
3/13/09 2
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc.
Contents
API command categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
API commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AddBulkDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
AddContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AdvancedDomainSearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
AuthorizeTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CertConfigureCert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CertGetApproverEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CertGetCertDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
CertGetCerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CertModifyOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CertParseCSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
CertPurchaseCert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
CheckLogin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
CheckNSStatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
CommissionAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CreateSubAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DeleteContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DeleteCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DeleteHostedDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DeleteNameServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DeletePOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
DeletePOPPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
DeleteRegistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
DeleteSubaccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DisableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
EnableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3/13/09 3
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. :
Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ExtendDomainDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
GetAccountPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
GetAccountValidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
GetAddressBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
GetAllAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
GetAllDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
GetBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
GetCartContent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
GetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
GetCerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
GetConfirmationSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
GetContacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
GetCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
GetCustomerDefinedData. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
GetCustomerPaymentInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GetDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
GetDNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
GetDomainCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
GetDomainExp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
GetDomainNameID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
GetDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
GetDomainServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
GetDomainSLDTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
GetDomainSRVHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
GetDomainStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
GetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
GetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
GetExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
GetExtendInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
GetForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
GetFraudScore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
GetGlobalChangeStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
GetHomeDomainList. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
GetHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
GetMetaTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
GetOrderList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
GetPasswordBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
GetPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
GetPOPExpirations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
GetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
GetRegHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
GetRegistrationStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
GetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
GetResellerInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
3/13/09 4
GetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
GetServiceContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
GetSubAccountPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
GetSubAccounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
GetSubaccountsDetailList. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
GetTLDList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
GetTransHistory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
GetWhoisContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
GetWPPSInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
HE_CancelAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
HE_ChangePassword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
HE_CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
HE_GetAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
HE_GetAccounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
HE_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
HE_UpgradeAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
InsertNewOrder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ModifyNSHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
ModifyPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
NameSpinner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
ParseDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
PE_GetCustomerPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
PE_GetDomainPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
PE_GetTLDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Preconfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
PurchaseHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
PurchasePOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
PurchasePreview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
PushDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
RefillAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
RegisterNameServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
RemoveTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
RenewPOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
RenewServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
RPT_GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
SendAccountEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
SetCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
SetDNSHost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
SetDomainSRVHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
SetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
SetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
SetHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
3/13/09 5
SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
SetPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
SetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
SetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
SetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
SetResellerServicesPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
SetResellerTLDPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
SetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
SetUpPOP3User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
StatusDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
SubAccountDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
SynchAuthInfo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
TP_CancelOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
TP_CreateOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
TP_GetDetailsByDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
TP_GetOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
TP_GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
TP_GetOrderReview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
TP_GetOrdersByDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
TP_GetOrderStatuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
TP_GetTLDInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
TP_ResendEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
TP_ResubmitLocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
TP_SubmitOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
TP_UpdateOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
UpdateAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
UpdateAccountPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
UpdateCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
UpdateCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
UpdateExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
UpdateMetaTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
UpdateNameServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
UpdateNotificationAmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
UpdatePushList. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
UpdateRenewalSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
ValidatePassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
WSC_GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
WSC_GetAllPackages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
WSC_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
WSC_Update_Ops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
3/13/09 6
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API command categories
API command categories

The following pages list the categories of commands in the API, and give you an overview of the commands that
are available to you for each major type of task. Click on any command name to jump to its full description in the
catalog.
Domain registration commands

AddBulkDomains
Check
DeleteRegistration
GetConfirmationSettings
GetExtAttributes
GetTLDList
NameSpinner
Preconfigure
Purchase
Domain management commands—host records
GetDomainSRVHosts
GetHosts
GetMetaTag
GetRegHosts
GetSPFHosts
SetDomainSRVHosts
SetHosts
SetSPFHosts
UpdateMetaTag
3/13/09 7
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API command categories:
Domain management commands—name servers

CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
GetHomeDomainList
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
SetDNSHost
UpdateNameServer
Domain management commands—contact information

Contacts
GetContacts
GetExtAttributes
GetWhoisContact
Domain management commands—general

AdvancedDomainSearch
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomainNameID
GetDomains
GetDomainSLDTLD
GetDomainStatus
GetExpiredDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetHomeDomainList
GetPasswordBit
GetRegistrationStatus
GetRegLock
GetRenew
GetSubAccountPassword
ParseDomain
RPT_GetReport
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
Domain renewal commands

Extend
Extend_RGP
GetDomainExp
GetExtendInfo
GetRenew
InsertNewOrder
SetRenew
UpdateExpiredDomains
UpdateRenewalSettings
3/13/09 8
Domain transfer commands

PE_GetTLDID
PE_SetPricing
PushDomain
RefillAccount
SetResellerServicesPricing
SetResellerTLDPricing
SynchAuthInfo
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetDetailsByDomain
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrdersByDomain
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_GetTLDInfo
TP_ResendEmail
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
TP_UpdateOrderDetail
UpdateAccountPricing
UpdatePushList
DNS hosting commands

DeleteHostedDomain
ExtendDomainDNS
PurchaseHosting
SetDNSHost
Domain services
DisableServices
EnableServices
GetDomainServices
PurchaseServices
RenewServices
ServiceSelect
3/13/09 9
Service management—e-mail services

DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
DisableServices
EnableServices
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetDotNameForwarding
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
GetPOPExpirations
GetPOPForwarding
HE_CancelAccount
HE_ChangePassword
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetAccountDetails
HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetPricing
HE_UpgradeAccount
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
RenewPOPBundle
SetCatchAll
SetDotNameForwarding
SetPakRenew
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
Service management—identity protection

DisableServices
EnableServices
GetWPPSInfo
RenewServices
Service management—SSL certificates

CertConfigureCert
CertGetApproverEmail
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
Service management—Web Site Creator

WSC_GetAccountInfo
WSC_GetAllPackages
WSC_GetPricing
WSC_Update_Ops
3/13/09 10
Account commands
AddContact
AuthorizeTLD
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
DeleteContact
DeleteSubaccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAccountValidation
GetAddressBook
GetAllAccountInfo
GetCusPreferences
GetCustomerPaymentInfo
GetFraudScore
GetGlobalChangeStatus
GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetResellerInfo
GetSubAccountDetails
GetServiceContact
GetSubAccounts
GetSubaccountsDetailList
GetTLDList
GetTransHistory
RemoveTLD
RPT_GetReport
SendAccountEmail
SubAccountDomains
UpdateAccountInfo
UpdateCusPreferences
Accounting commands
CommissionAccount
GetBalance
PE_GetCustomerPricing
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_GetRetailPricing
RefillAccount
UpdateNotificationAmount
3/13/09 11
Shopping cart commands

AddBulkDomains
AddToCart
DeleteFromCart
GetCartContent
InsertNewOrder
PurchasePreview
UpdateCart
Real-time purchase commands

Extend
Extend_RGP
HE_CreateAccount
HE_UpgradeAccount
Purchase
PurchaseHosting
PurchasePOPBundle
PurchaseServices
RenewPOPBundle
RenewServices
TP_CreateOrder
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
Reporting commands
DeleteCustomerDefinedData
GetCustomerDefinedData
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetTLDList
GetTransHistory
RPT_GetReport
SetCustomerDefinedData
Customer support commands

GetServiceContact
3/13/09 12
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands
API commands
This chapter is an alphabetic catalog of the commands in the API. The documentation for each command
includes a description, input and return parameters, and an example query and response.
Our API supports HTTPS protocol. Nearly all API query strings are sensitive in that they include a login and
password, but query strings that include credit card information are particularly so. We recommend that you
consider using HTTPS for greater security when transmitting sensitive information.
The responses for many commands differ slightly depending on whether you request XML, HTML, or text output.
For example, return parameters may be numbered for HTML and text, but not for XML responses. It’s important
to test each command and write your code based on the actual response format.
Our API is not case sensitive (except passwords), but your coding application or language might be. This catalog
is formatted for readability, not for the cases our API returns. If your system is case sensitive, test and write
your code to conform with your individual case sensitivity requirements.
Our API requires that queries be URL encoded. Domain names using non-English character sets—also called
international domain names or IDNs—must be PUNY encoded.
Most of our services are mix-and-match: You can use them in any combination for a single domain name as long
as it’s either either registered with us or uses our DNS hosting. However, there are some exceptions as noted in
the table below:
Service Available for Available for Available for Our other

domains domains that domains not services work
registered use our DNS registered here when this
here hosting or using our DNS service is
hosting enabled
SSL Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificates
ID Protect Yes Yes No Yes
Web Site Yes Yes No Yes
Creator
POP Email Yes Yes No Yes
3/13/09 13
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands:
Service Available for Available for Available for Our other

domains domains that domains not services work
registered use our DNS registered here when this
here hosting or using our DNS service is
hosting enabled
Hosted Yes Yes No Yes
Microsoft
Exchange
Email Yes Yes No Yes
Forwarding
URL Yes Yes No Yes
Forwarding
3/13/09 14
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: AddBulkDomains
AddBulkDomains
Description
Definition
Add a list of items to the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command when you want to add multiple items to the shopping cart.
Availability
All partners have access to this command.
Constraints
The domain names in your list must meet the following requirements:
• The domain names must be valid (see the domain-name constraints under Check).
• The domain names must use a supported top-level domain.
• The number of SLDs must match the number of TLDs.
Input parameters
Build the query string using this syntax:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=addbulkdomains&
uid=YourAccountID&pw=YourAccountPassword&producttype=register&
listcount=NumberDomainsToAdd&sld1=FirstSLD&tld1=FirstTLD&
sld2=SecondSLD&tld2=SecondTLD&sld3=thirdSLD&tld3=ThirdTLD&responsetype=xml
Param name Obligation Definition Max

size
UID Required Account login ID 20
PW Required Account password 20
ProductType Required Type of product to add. Options are register or renew. 16
ListCount Required Number of names to add 4
SLDX (X=1 to Required Second-level domain name, for example, partnerdomain in 63
listcount) partnerdomain.com
TLDX (X=1 to Required Top-level domain name, for example, com in 15
listcount) partnerdomain.com
numyearsX Optional Number of years to renew 1
(X=1 to
listcount)
AutoRenew Optional; Auto-renew setting for all domains in this order. If 1
default is 0 AutoRenew=1, domains automatically update 30 days
before expiration
RegLock Optional; Registrar lock setting for all domains in this order. If 1
default is 1 RegLock=1, domain cannot be transferred to another
registrar without account holder’s permission
3/13/09 15

size
UseCart UseCart=1 Use the shopping cart for this order. Permitted values are 0 1
is Required if and 1. If UseCart=1, this bulk list will go into the shopping
UID is a retail cart and be processed through our queue; our system does
account, not return an order ID until all names have been processed.
otherwise If UseCart=0, our system returns an order ID and locks up
Optional. the entire funds for the order immediately; the funds remain
locked until all names in the list are processed. UseCart=1
is required if UID is a retail account.
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are Text (default), HTML, or 4
XML.
Returned parameters and values
Param name Definition

Command Name of command executed
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err(1 to ErrCount)
values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is back to the
client.
Done True indicates this entire response has reached you successfully.
Notes
• The default response format is plain text. To receive the response in HTML or XML format, send
ResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML in your request.
• Check the return parameter ErrCount. If greater than 0 the transaction failed. The parameter
Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined above.
Example
The following query adds partnerdomain.com, partnerdomain2.net, and partnerdomain3.info to the
shopping cart of account rcompartnerid, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=addbulkdomains&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&producttype=register&listcount=3&
sld1=partnerdomain&tld1=com&sld2=partnerdomain2&tld2=net&
sld3=partnerdomain3&tld3=info&responsetype=xml
The response is as follows:
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<interface-response>
<AddBulkDomains>
<Item>
<ItemName>partnerdomain.com</ItemName>
<ItemId />
<Price>29.95</Price>
<ItemAdded>True</ItemAdded>
</Item>
<Item>
<ItemName>partnerdomain2.net</ItemName>
<ItemId />
3/13/09 16
</Item>
<Item>
<ItemName>partnerdomain3.info</ItemName>
<ItemId />
</Item>
<AllItemsSuccessful>True</AllItemsSuccessful>
</AddBulkDomains>
<Command>ADDBULKDOMAINS</Command>
<ErrCount>0</ErrCount>
<Server>ResellerTest</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
</interface-response>
Related commands
AddToCart
Check
DeleteFromCart
GetCartContent
InsertNewOrder
Purchase
PurchasePreview
UpdateCart
3/13/09 17
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: AddContact
AddContact
Description
Definition
Add a contact to the address book for an account.
Usage
Use this command to add a contact to the address book for an account.
To retrieve the contacts in an address book, use the GetAddressBook command.
Availability
Constraints
The query must meet the following requirements:
• The login ID and password must be valid.
Input parameters
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=nameofcommand&
uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&paramname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

size
RegistrantOrganizationName Optional Registrant organization 60
RegistrantJobTitle Optional Registrant job title 60
RegistrantFirstName Required Registrant first name 60
RegistrantLastName Required Registrant last name 60
RegistrantAddress1 Required Registrant address 60
RegistrantAddress2 Optional Registrant additional address info 60
RegistrantCity Required Registrant city 60
RegistrantPostalCode Required Registrant postal code 16
RegistrantStateProvince Optional Registrant state or province 60
RegistrantStateProvinceChoice Optional Registrant state or province choice: 1
S state
P province
RegistrantCountry Optional Registrant country 60
RegistrantPhone Required Registrant phone number. Required 20
format is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
where CountryCode and PhoneNumber
use only numeric characters.
3/13/09 18

size
RegistrantFax Optional Registrant fax number. Required format 20
is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
CountryCode and PhoneNumber use
only numeric characters.
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for Whois 128
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are Text 4
(default), HTML, or XML.

PartyID Party ID number for this contact, assigned by us
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query adds a party to the address book for account rcompartnerid and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=addcontact&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&RegistrantFirstName=john&RegistrantLastName=doe&
RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20Street&RegistrantAddress2=Suite%20100&
RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantStateProvince=NY&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=state&
RegistrantPostalCode=99999&RegistrantCountry=us&RegistrantPhone=+800.5554444&
RegistrantFax=+800.5554445&[email protected]&
responsetype=xml
In the response, a Party ID and an ErrCount value of 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<Contact>
<RegistrantPartyID>{FFD61956-8D43-45FB-BC38-E0EE23331503}</RegistrantPartyID>
</Contact>
<Command>ADDCONTACT</Command>
<Language>en</Language>
<ResponseCount>0</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod>1</MinPeriod>
<MaxPeriod>10</MaxPeriod>
<Server>RESELLERTEST</Server>
3/13/09 19
<Site>e</Site>
<IsLockable>True</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>True</IsRealTimeTLD>
<TimeDifference>+03.00</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>0.3164063</ExecTime>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Contacts
GetAddressBook
GetContacts
GetExtAttributes
GetResellerInfo
GetServiceContact
GetWhoisContact
Preconfigure
3/13/09 20
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: AddToCart
AddToCart
Description
Definition
Add an item to the shopping cart.
Usage
Add an item to the shopping cart.
To purchase items once they are in the shopping cart, use the InsertNewOrder command.
Availability
Constraints
The items a user attempts to add to the cart must meet the following requirements:
• If the item is a domain name, use the Check command to confirm that the name is available.
• The domain names must be valid (see the domain-name constraints under Check).
• The domain names must use a top-level domain supported by this registrar.
• The number of SLDs must match the number of TLDs.
Input parameters
Click the links below to go directly to specific products:
Product
Input parameters for domains
Input parameters for dot-name
Input parameters for RCOM Shield
Input parameters for POP Email
Input parameters Hosted Microsoft Exchange
Input parameters for Email Forwarding and URL Forwarding
Input parameters for Web Site Creator
Input parameters for SSL certificates
Input parameters for domains

Use the input parameters in the table below to add a domain name to the cart.
3/13/09 21

http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID
&PW=YourPassword&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd&
OptParam1=OptParamValue1&OptParam2=OptParamValue2

size
EndUserIP Required End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud 15
checking, as part of our order processing
service. Use format NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ProductType Required Type of product to add. Permitted values 39
are:
Register
Transfer
Renew (Use Renew for all TLDs including
.name bundles)
RGP (Redemption Grace Period)
Extended RGP
Host (DNS hosting)
Host Renew
SLD Required for Second-level domain name (for example, 63
Register register in register.com)
Transfer
Renew
RGP
Extended RGP
Host
Host Renew
TLD Required for Top-level domain name (extension) 15
Register
Transfer
Renew
RGP
Extended RGP
Host
Host Renew
Quantity Optional for Number of years. Permitted values are 1 2
Register through 10; registration cannot extend
Transfer beyond 10 years from today
Renew
Host
Host Renew;
default is duration you set
in UpdateCusPreferences
AutoRenew Optional for Do you want the name to attempt to renew 10
Register automatically (renewal will succeed if
available account balance is sufficient)?
Permitted values are 0 and 1
RegLock Optional for Do you want protection against 10
Register unauthorized transfer of this domain name?
Permitted values are 0 and 1
3/13/09 22

size
UsePerm Required for For Extended RGP, required value is 10
Extended RGP UsePerm=ok
ClearItems Optional; you must also add Make all items currently in the cart inactive 3
another item to the cart in (but keep them in the cart), and add a new
the same query item. Permitted value is yes.
To reactivate items in the cart that are
inactive, use the UpdateCart command.
Input parameters for dot-name

Use the input parameters in the table below to add a .name domain to the cart.

size
are:
DotNameBundle
DotNameForwarding
(Use when the .name domain was
purchased using the Purchase command
and you want to add the .name Registry’s
email forwarding service. If a .name domain
is purchased using the shopping cart, the
Registry’s email forwarding service is
automatically bundled with the domain.)
DotNameBundle register in register.com)
DotNameForwarding
DotNameBundle
DotNameForwarding
Quantity Optional; default is the Number of years 2
duration you set in
3/13/09 23

Use the input parameters in the table below to add RCOM Shield to the cart.

size
are:
RCOMShield (Whois Privacy Protection)
RCOMShieldRenewal
RCOMShield register in register.com)
RCOMShieldRenewal
RCOMShield
RCOMShieldRenewal
Quantity Optional; default is 1 Number of years 2

Use the input parameters in the table below to add POP Email to the cart.

size
3/13/09 24

size
are:
POP (10-mailbox pak with 1GB storage
per mailbox)
Renew-POP
EmailStorage (512MB extra storage per
mailbox)
POP register in register.com)
Renew-POP
EmailStorage
POP
Renew-POP
EmailStorage
Quantity Optional for For ProductType=POP, the number of 2
POP 10-mailbox paks to purchase for this
Renew-POP domain.
EmailStorage For ProductType=Renew-POP, the
number of years to add to this POP pak
subscription.
For ProductType=EmailStorage, the
number of 512MB units of storage to add to
this pak.
ProductID Required for POP pak ID number. To retrieve this value, 3
Renew-POP use the GetPOP3 command.
EmailStorage
Input parameters Hosted Microsoft Exchange

Use the input parameters in the table below to add Hosted Microsoft Exchange to the cart.

size
ProductType Required For Hosted Microsoft Exchange, 39
permitted values are:
HostedExchange
HostedExchangeUpgrade
3/13/09 25

size
SLD Optional for Second-level domain name (for 63
HostedExchange example, register in register.com) for
email address
TLD Optional for Top-level domain name (extension) 15
HostedExchange for email address
Zone Optional for Domain name, with host if desired, 15
HostedExchange for email address. This is an optional
alternative to SLD and TLD. Use
format host.sld.tld
HostedExchangeLoginID Required for For upgrading an existing Hosted 8
HostedExchangeUpgrade Microsoft Exchange account, the
login ID of the account that you want
to add components to. Permitted
format is HXNNNNN
Quantity Optional for Number of mailboxes to buy for a 3
HostedExchange; default new Hosted Microsoft Exchange
is 1 account. Permitted values are 1 to
255.
MailboxQty Required for Number of mailboxes to add to an 3
HostedExchangeUpgrade existing Hosted Microsoft Exchange
account. Permitted values are 0 to
254 (total, after this purchase,
cannot exceed 255).
StorageMBQty Optional for Number of units of 100MB extra 3
HostedExchange or storage to buy (if you are
HostedExchangeUpgrade establishing a new Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account now) or add (if
you are upgrading storage for an
existing Hosted Microsoft Exchange
account). Storage is pooled: each
unit of storage is shared among all
mailboxes in this Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account. Permitted values
are 0 to 255 and cannot exceed 255
total for one Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account.
BlackBerryQty Optional for Number of BlackBerry users to 3
HostedExchange or support (if new account) or add (if
HostedExchangeUpgrade upgrading). Permitted values are 0
to 255 and cannot exceed 255 total
for one Hosted Microsoft Exchange
account.
ActiveSyncQty Optional for Number of ActiveSync users to 3
HostedExchange or support or add. Permitted values are
HostedExchangeUpgrade 0 to 255 and cannot exceed 255
total for one Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account.
3/13/09 26

size
GoodLinkQty Optional for Number of Good Mobile Messaging 3
HostedExchange or (GoodLink) users to support or add.
HostedExchangeUpgrade Permitted values are 0 to 255 and
cannot exceed 255 total for one
Hosted Microsoft Exchange account.
ClearItems Optional; you must also add Make all items currently in the cart 3
another item to the cart in inactive (but keep them in the cart),
the same query and add a new item. Permitted value
is yes.
To reactivate items in the cart that
are inactive, use the UpdateCart
command.
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are 4
Text (default), HTML, or XML.
Input parameters for Email Forwarding and URL

Forwarding
Use the input parameters in the table below to add Email Forwarding or URL Forwarding to the cart.

size
are:
EmailForwarding
EmailForwardingRenew
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
EmailForwarding register in register.com)
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
EmailForwarding
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
3/13/09 27

size
Quantity Optional for Number of years 2
EmailForwarding
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew;
default is 1

Use the input parameters in the table below to add Web Site Creator to the cart.

size
are:
LWSCBasic
LWSCFull
LWSCEcommerce
LWSCAccountName Optional Account name for this Web Site Creator
account. To retrieve this value, use the
WSC_GetAllPackages API command.
Permitted format is LWSCNNNxNNNN
LWSCWebSiteID Required Web site ID number for this Web Site
Creator account. To retrieve this value, use
the WSCSiteID return value from the
WSC_GetAllPackages API command.
Quantity Optional; default is 1 Number of years 2
3/13/09 28
Input parameters for SSL certificates

Use the input parameters in the table below to add an SSL certificate to the cart.

size
EndUserIP Required End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud checking, as 15
part of our order processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ProductType Required Type of product to add. Permitted values are: 39
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL-Premium
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-Wildcard
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-EV
Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-EV
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro-EV
Quantity Required for all Number of years to purchase this cert. Permitted values 2
certs are 1 to the following maxima:
5 GeoTrust QuickSSL
6 GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
5 GeoTrust True BusinessID
5 GeoTrust True BusinessID Wildcard
2 GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
5 RapidSSL
5 VeriSign Secure Site
5 VeriSign Secure Site Pro
2 VeriSign Secure Site with EV
2 VeriSign Secure Site Pro with EV
ClearItems Optional; you Make all items currently in the cart inactive (but keep 3
must also add them in the cart), and add a new item. Permitted value
another item to is yes.
the cart in the To reactivate items in the cart that are inactive, use the
same query UpdateCart command.
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are Text (default), HTML, 4
or XML.

ItemName Domain name or service
ItemId Item number
Price Price for this product or service
ICANNFees Fees charged by ICANN for this product or service
CartItemID ID number, assigned by us, of this item in your shopping cart
3/13/09 29

ItemAdded True indicates this entire response has reached you successfully.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query adds partnerdomain.com to the shopping cart of account rcompartnerid and sends the
response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=addtocart&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&producttype=register&
responsetype=xml
<ItemName>partnerdomain.com</ItemName>
<ItemId />
<Command>ADDTOCART</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
DeleteFromCart
GetCartContent
GetHomeDomainList
InsertNewOrder
PurchasePreview
UpdateCart
3/13/09 30
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: AdvancedDomainSearch
AdvancedDomainSearch
Description
Definition
Search the domains in your account.
Usage
Use this command to search domains that are in your account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
Param name Obligatio Definition Max

n size
TLDList Optional; Comma-delimited list of TLDs to include in 120
default is * search results. Also permitted is *, which
returns all TLDs that we offer.
SearchCriteria Optional What part of domains to match? For example, 5
SearchCriteria=Start&SLD=A returns all
domains that start with A. Permitted values are
Start
End
In
Exact
SLD Optional String to match in domain name. Use with 8000
SearchCriteria to constrain results. For
example, SearchCriteria=Start&SLD=A
returns all domains that start with A. Permitted
values are letters, numbers, and hyphens.
ExcludeNumbers Optional Return domains with numbers in the domain 1
name? Permitted values are:
0 Exclude domain names containing numbers
1 Include domain names containing numbers
3/13/09 31

n size
ExcludeDashes Optional Return domains with hyphens in the domain 1
name? Permitted values are:
0 Exclude domain names containing hyphens
1 Include domain names containing hyphens
ParkingStatus Optional Return parked domains? Permitted values are: 1
0 Return domains that are not parked
1 Return domains that are parked
RegistrationStatus Optional What registration status to return? Permitted 10
values are Registered, Hosted, or Expired
AutoRenew Optional What auto-renew status to return? Permitted 1
values are:
0 Auto-renew off
1 Auto-renew on
Locked Optional What registrar lock status to return? Permitted 1
values are:
0 Registrar lock off
1 Registrar lock on
CreationDate Optional Date the domain was originally registered. 10
Permitted format is MM/DD/YYYY
DaysTillExpires Optional Return domains that are within this many days 7
of expiration date. Permitted values are integers
0 to 65535
NSStatus Optional Return only domains that use our name 5
servers? Permitted values are:
Yes
No
NameServer Optional Return domains that use this name server. 60
HasRCOMShield Optional Return domains with RCOM Shield? Permitted 1
values are:
0 Domains with no subscription to RCOM
Shield
1 Domains with RCOM Shield
DaysUntilRCOMShieldExpires Optional Return domains that have RCOM Shield that’s 7
due to expire within the number of days
specified here. Permitted values are integers 0
to 65535
HasPOPMail Optional Return domains with subscriptions to POP mail? 1
Permitted values are:
0 No POP mail subscription
1 Subscribed to POP mail
IncludeSubaccounts Optional Include domains that fit the search criteria that 1
are in retail subaccounts? Permitted values are:
0 Exclude domain names in subaccounts
1 Include domain names in subaccounts
SubaccountLogin Optional Login name of subaccounts to include 20
OrderBy Optional Permitted values are: 8
SLD
TLD
NSStatus
ExpDate
Renew
3/13/09 32

n size
StartPosition Optional What number in the list to begin with in this 8
response? For example,
StartPosition=26&RecordsToReturn=25
returns domains 26 through 50 in the list.
RecordsToReturn Optional Number of domains to return in each response. 3
For example,
StartPosition=26&RecordsToReturn=25
returns domains 26 through 50 in the list.
Maximum permitted value is 100.
MultiLang Optional Permitted values are On or Off. 3
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are Text (default), 4
HTML, or XML.

SP-TLDList Domains included in this return match these TLDs
SP-SLD Domains included in this return include this character string in the
SLD
SP-SearchCriteria Domains included in this return include the SP-SLD value in this
part of the SLD
SP-ParkingStatus Returned domains match this parking status
SP-XML XML formatting options for this return
SP-RegistrationStatus Returned domains match this registration status
SP-AutoRenew Returned domains match this auto-renew setting
SP-Locked Returned domains match this registrar lock setting
SP-DaysTillExpires Returned domains are within this many days of expiration
SP-DaysExpired Returned domains have expired in the last X days
SP-NSStatus Returned domains match this name server status
SP-HostRecordType Not used
SP-HostName Not used
SP-HostAddress Not used
SP-NameServer Returned domains use this name server
SP-HasRCOMShield Returned domains match this RCOM Shield status
SP-HasPOPMail Returned domains match this POP mail status
SP-EmailForwarding Not used
SP-ExcludeNumbers If SP-ExcludeNumbers=1, returned domains do not contain
numbers in the SLD
SP-ExcludeDashes If SP-ExcludeDashes=1, returned domains do not contain
hyphens in the SLD
SP-IncludeSubAccounts If SP-IncludeSubAccounts=1, returned domains include
domains in retail subaccounts
SP-SubAccountLogin Returned domains are in this subaccount
SP-XMLResponse XMLResponse setting
SP-RecordsToReturn This response includes this number of domains in a sorted list
SP-StartPosition This response starts at this number in the sorted list
SP-OrderBy Sort criterion for this list
SP-CustomerGroupName Not used
3/13/09 33

TotalResults Total number of domains that match these search criteria
StartPosition The first domain in this response is in this position in the overall
sorted list of domains
NextPosition The next response will start at this position in the overall sorted
list
MultiRRP Multiple RRPs in this response?
TLDOverride TLD override setting
DomainNameID ID number for this domain
SLD SLD of this domain
TLD TLD of this domain
AutoRenew Auto-renew setting of this domain
ExpDate Expiration date of this domain
DomainRegistrationStatus Registration status of this domain
DeleteType Delete status of this domain
NSStatus Is this domain using our name servers?
RRProcessor Registrar credential of this domain name
RRCompanyName Registrar of record for this domain name
HasRCOMShield Does this domain have RCOM Shield, and is it enabled?
AbleToReactivate If expired, can this name be reactivated?
IsPremiumName Is this a premium .tv name?
PremiumPrice Price for this premium .tv name
PremiumAboveThresholdPrice Is the price for this premium .tv name above the premium
threshold price?
PremiumCategory Premium category for a .tv name
ReactivatePrice Price to reactivate this expired .tv name
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the
Err(1 to ErrCount) values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as
is back to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves domains that match the specified search criteria, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=AdvancedDomainSearch&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&SearchCriteria=Start&SLD=r&ExcludeNumbers=1&
ExcludeDashes=1&OrderBy=ExpDate&responsetype=XML
In the response, a domain list and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was successful:
3/13/09 34

<DomainSearch>
<SearchParams>
<SP-TLDList />
<SP-SLD>r</SP-SLD>
<SP-SearchCriteria>Start</SP-SearchCriteria>
<SP-ParkingStatus />
<SP-XML>
<DomainNames>
<DomainName sld="r" location="Start" />
</DomainNames>
</SP-XML>
<SP-RegistrationStatus>Registered</SP-RegistrationStatus>
<SP-AutoRenew />
<SP-Locked />
<SP-DaysTillExpires />
<SP-DaysExpired />
<SP-NsStatus />
<SP-HostRecordType />
<SP-HostName />
<SP-HostAddress />
<SP-NameServer />
<SP-HasRCOMShield />
<SP-HasPOPMail />
<SP-EmailForwarding />
<SP-HasWebHosting />
<SP-ExcludeNumbers>1</SP-ExcludeNumbers>
<SP-ExcludeDashes>1</SP-ExcludeDashes>
<SP-IncludeSubAccounts />
<SP-SubAccountLogin />
<SP-XMLResponse>1</SP-XMLResponse>
<SP-RecordsToReturn />
<SP-StartPosition>1</SP-StartPosition>
<SP-OrderBy>ExpDate</SP-OrderBy>
<SP-CustomerGroupName />
</SearchParams>
<TotalResults>5</TotalResults>
<StartPosition>1</StartPosition>
<NextPosition>1</NextPosition>
<MultiRRP>False</MultiRRP>
<TLDOverride>0</TLDOverride>
<Domains>
<Domain>
<DomainNameID>318265980</DomainNameID>
<SLD>partnerdomain2</SLD>
<TLD>net</TLD>
<AutoRenew>0</AutoRenew>
<ExpDate>1/9/2007</ExpDate>
<DomainRegistrationStatus>Registered</DomainRegistrationStatus>
<DeleteType />
<LoginID>rcompartnerid</LoginID>
<AccountID>217-no-0647</AccountID>
<NSStatus>NA</NSStatus>
<RRProcessor>E</RRProcessor>
<RRCompanyName>Register.com, Inc.</RRCompanyName>
<HasRCOMShield>disabled</HasRCOMShield>
</Domain>
.
.
.
3/13/09 35
<Domain>
<SLD>partnerdomain</SLD>
<TLD>com</TLD>
<ExpDate>6/10/2014</ExpDate>
<DomainRegistrationStatus>Registered</DomainRegistrationStatus>
<DeleteType />
<LoginID>rcompartnerid</LoginID>
<AccountID>217-no-0647</AccountID>
<NSStatus>NA</NSStatus>
<RRProcessor>E</RRProcessor>
<RRCompanyName>Register.com, Inc.</RRCompanyName>
<HasRCOMShield>disabled</HasRCOMShield>
</Domain>
</Domains>
</DomainSearch>
<Command>ADVANCEDDOMAINSEARCH</Command>
<Language>eng</Language>
<MinPeriod />
<Server>RESELLER1-STG</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
none
3/13/09 36
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: AuthorizeTLD
AuthorizeTLD
Description
Definition
Create or add to a list of TLDs that you offer to your resellers and retail customers.
Usage
Use this command to specify the TLDs that you offer to your resellers and retail customers. This command
controls which TLDs your Web site can offer for registrations, renewals, and transfers.
The first time you use this command, the list of TLDs we return to you switches from the list of all TLDs we offer,
which is the default, to your own list that contains only the TLDs you authorize.
You can also use this command to add to your list of authorized TLDs. When you want to add one TLD, run
AuthorizeTLD with that single TLD.
To revert from the authorized TLD mode back to the default mode (all TLDs that we support), or to remove TLDs
from your list, use the RemoveTLD command.
Availability
Constraints
• You can only authorize TLDs that we offer.
Input parameters

size
TLD Either TLD or One top-level domain (TLD) to add to your list of 15
DomainList is authorized TLDs. For example, if you want to add .biz,
Required use TLD=biz
DomainList Either TLD or Comma-separated list of TLDs to add to your list of 100
DomainList is authorized TLDs. For example, if you want to add
Required .com, .net, and .org, use DomainList=com,net,org
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 37

AuthorizeTLDX TLD to add to authorized list. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query authorizes TLDs .com, .net, and .org for account rcompartnerid, and sends the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=authorizetld
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&domainlist=com,net,org,info,biz&responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of TLDs and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<tldlist>
<authorizetld>com</authorizetld>
<authorizetld>net</authorizetld>
<authorizetld>org</authorizetld>
</tldlist>
<Command>AUTHORIZETLD</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site />
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 38
Related commands
GetTLDList
PE_SetPricing
RemoveTLD
3/13/09 39
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertConfigureCert
CertConfigureCert
Description
Definition
Use this command to obtain information from the customer, which is needed to configure a cert.
Usage
The process for purchasing, configuring, and issuing a cert proceeds in the following order:
Command/Procedure Definition
AddToCart and Purchase the cert in our system
InsertNewOrder
CertGetCerts Retrieve the ID number for this cert, to use in configuring it
CertConfigureCert Obtain information from customer to configure the cert
(this command)
CertParseCSR Parse the CSR
CertGetApproverEmail Retrieve registrant email address from Registry, for cert approval
CertPurchaseCert Submit configuration information to certification authority for final
issuance of cert
CertModifyOrder (Optional) Cancel a cert issuance request, so that the cert can be reconfigured
Because the required parameters for this command exceed the length limits for many browser address bars, you
should submit your HTTP request using the “post” instead of “get” method.
Availability
Constraints
• The cert must belong to this account.
3/13/09 40
Input parameters

size
CertID Required ID number for this individual certificate. 8
Retrieve this number using the
CertGetCerts command.
WebServerType Required Type of product to add. Permitted values 4
are:
1 Apache + MOD SSL
2 Apache + Raven
3 Apache + SSLeay
4 C2Net Stronghold
7 IBM HTTP
8 iPlanet Server 4.1
9 Lotus Domino Go 4.6.2.51
10 Lotus Domino Go 4.6.2.6+
11 Lotus Domino 4.6+
12 Microsoft IIS 4.0
14 Netscape Enterprise/FastTrack
17 Zeus v3+
18 Other
20 Apache + OpenSSL
21 Apache 2
22 Apache + ApacheSSL
23 Cobalt Series
24 Cpanel
25 Ensim
26 Hsphere
27 Ipswitch
28 Plesk
29 Jakart-Tomcat
30 WebLogic (all versions)
31 O’Reilly WebSite Professional
32 WebStar
CSR Required Certificate Signing Request. We 4500
recommend saving this value to use again
in the CertParseCSR command. Click on
the links to create a CSR:
GeoTrust certs
RapidSSL certs
VeriSign certs
3/13/09 41

size
ContactTypeFName Optional Given name of this ContactType for this 60
overall—the cert. Permitted ContactTypes are Admin,
default for a Tech, and Billing. For example,
cert Admin is AdminFName=John
the Admin
contact for
this account;
defaults for
the cert Tech
and Billing
contacts are
the cert
Admin
contact.
If you supply
information
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Required
ContactTypeLName If you supply Family name of this ContactType for this 60
information cert. For example, AdminLName=Doe
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Required
ContactTypeOrgName If you supply Organization name of this ContactType for 60
information this cert
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Optional
ContactTypeJobTitle If you supply Job title of this ContactType for this cert 60
information
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Optional
ContactTypeAddress1 If you supply Address, line 1, of this ContactType for 60
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Required
ContactTypeAddress2 If you supply Address, line 2, of this ContactType for 60
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Optional
ContactTypeCity If you supply City for this ContactType for this cert 60
information
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Required
3/13/09 42

size
ContactTypeState Either State State for this ContactType for this cert 2
or Province
is Required
for each
ContactType
ContactTypeProvince Either State Province for this ContactType for this cert 60
or Province
is Required
for each
ContactType
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice If you supply Is this cert ContactType’s location a state 1
information or province? Permitted values are:
for a S state
ContactType, P province
this param is
Optional
ContactTypePostalCode If you supply Postal code for this ContactType for this 16
information cert
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Required
ContactTypeCountry If you supply Country for this ContactType for this cert, 2
information in two-letter country code format
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Required
ContactTypePhone If you supply Phone for this this ContactType for this 17
information cert. Required format is
for a +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
ContactType, CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
this param is numeric characters
Required
ContactTypePhoneExt If you supply Phone extension for this this ContactType 8
information for this cert
for a
ContactType,
this param is
Optional
ContactTypeFax If you supply Fax number for this ContactType for this 17
information cert. Required format is
for a +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
ContactType, CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
this param is numeric characters
Optional
ContactTypeEmailAddress If you supply Email address for this ContactType for this 128
information cert. Use format
for a [email protected]
ContactType,
this param is
Required
3/13/09 43

CertID Identification number of this individual cert
Success Has this cert been configured successfully?
Organization Organization embedded in this CSR
DomainName Domain name embedded in this CSR
Email Email addresss embedded in this CSR
HasBadExtensions Any bad extensions?
IsValidQuickDomainName Valid quick domain name?
IsValidTrueDomainName Valid true domain name?
Locality Locality embedded in this CSR
OrganizationUnit Organization unit embedded in this CSR
State State embedded in this CSR
Country Country embedded in this CSR
ApproverType Type of this approver
ApproverEmail Email address of this approver
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err(1
to ErrCount) values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is
back to the client.
Notes
• Because the required parameters for this command exceed the length limits for many browser address bars,
you should submit your HTTP request using the “post” instead of “get” method.
Example
The following query configures a cert, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/
interface.asp?command=CERTCONFIGURECERT&uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ResponseTy
pe=XML&CertID=289&Action=Configure&WebServerType=2&CSR=MIIDPjCCAqcCAQAwYzEYMBYGA1U
EAxMPa2ltYmVybHlzaGluLnVzMQwwCgYDVQQLEwNLaW0xDDAKBgNVBAoTA0tpbTERMA8GA1UEBxMIQ
mVsbGV2dWUxCzAJBgNVBAgTAldBMQswCQYDVQQGEwJVUzCBnzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgY
kCgYEA0gTzzYfBzisSajyZsb0wXPog%2FpHlmYZp5v7ta5LbgSQ0XbLGGXU7KYwrhFZqZ1pgboflWgYSEM
%2BVwYc%2B0AZHd5yeAZKFN08GhTQxgaV0oiK3Q1Nj4pNVsju%2B7uwiBI9v8S6Gyowa7LF4ZKcUWd
HSX6e4%2Fgcgd1N%2FdWWQmzfpKisCAwEAAaCCAZkwGgYKKwYBBAGCNw0CAzEMFgo1LjAuMjE5NS
4yMHsGCisGAQQBgjcCAQ4xbTBrMA4GA1UdDwEB%2FwQEAwIE8DBEBgkqhkiG9w0BCQ8ENzA1MA4GC
CqGSIb3DQMCAgIAgDAOBggqhkiG9w0DBAICAIAwBwYFKw4DAgcwCgYIKoZIhvcNAwcwEwYDVR0lBAw
wCgYIKwYBBQUHAwEwgf0GCisGAQQBgjcNAgIxge4wgesCAQEeWgBNAGkAYwByAG8AcwBvAGYAdAAgA
FIAUwBBACAAUwBDAGgAYQBuAG4AZQBsACAAQwByAHkAcAB0AG8AZwByAGEAcABoAGkAYwAgAFAAc
gBvAHYAaQBkAGUAcgOBiQAnUv2qmJCagvl02VUuQzY%2FpQVwxgwTVxQyJ08RQcQZ%2FE4HV5MZe7
yuGC4l8NJxSLL2HVI6Qc7wKeMJAWhg%2BFv%2BJGFoJtu7VSw1%2BgkbWKYI%2FTsuvyTyA5bvrO6%
3/13/09 44
2Bf7N9TkBtJCMl%2F9JtfItk71MNt7hjZqSVGjZp5kFWbYZfPd7ONgAAAAAAAAAAMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBB
QUAA4GBAGvhsjZbtidJL48NqJecna5A0eIwGiizlYjJibLcdN6YnR%2BMN4BP8JmX8T2CJPnHOf2PIeXUujLh
zv5bajXvHVTy1oG%2B%2FYLc%2B3LQzSm9rQXjMEk%2F1eJXi3OAShQX%2BS2GbyaUitu%2BlZ%2FK
8QIzxCtoKf0vNlzbB70fOjWWQqfJhVsm&AdminOrgName=Bel+Air&AdminJobTitle=Pres&AdminFName
=F&AdminLName=Bern&AdminAddress1=516+Apple&AdminCity=Bel+Air&AdminState=MD&AdminPo
stalCode=21014&AdminCountry=US&AdminPhone=5555555555&AdminEmailAddress=john@partnerd
omain.com&TechOrgName=Bel+Air&TechJobTitle=Pres&TechFName=F&TechLName=Bern&TechAddres
s1=516+Apple&TechCity=Bel+Air&TechState=MD&TechPostalCode=21014&TechCountry=US&TechPho
ne=5555555555&[email protected]&BillingOrgName=Bel+Air&BillingJobTi
tle=Pres&BillingFName=F&BillingLName=Bern&BillingAddress1=516+Apple&BillingCity=Bel+Air&Billin
gState=MD&BillingPostalCode=21014&BillingCountry=US&BillingPhone=5555555555&BillingEmailAd-
[email protected]
In the response, a success value True confirms that the query was successful:
<CertConfigureCert>
<CertID>289</CertID>
<CSRData>
<Success>True</Success>
<Organization>Acme</Organization>
<DomainName>partnerdomain.com</DomainName>
<Email />
<HasBadExtensions>false</HasBadExtensions>
<IsValidQuickDomainName>true</IsValidQuickDomainName>
<IsValidTrueDomainName>true</IsValidTrueDomainName>
<Locality>Townsville</Locality>
<OrganizationUnit>Sales</OrganizationUnit>
<State>NY</State>
<Country>US</Country>
</CSRData>
<ApproverEmail />
<Approver Type="Domain">
<ApproverEmail>[email protected]</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
</Approver>
<Approver Type="Generic">
</Approver>
.
.
.
</CertConfigureCert>
<Command>CERTCONFIGURECERT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Server>LOCALHOST</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
3/13/09 45
</debug>
Related commands
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
3/13/09 46
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertGetApproverEmail
Description
Definition
Retrieve the email addresses of qualified approvers for the domain name embedded in a CSR.
Usage
InsertNewOrder
(this command)
issuance of cert
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
3/13/09 47

size
Domain Required Domain name that is associated with this cert, in format 79
sld.tld. Use CertParseCSR or CertGetCertDetail to retrieve
this value.
XML.

Success Success status for retrieving the authoritative Whois registrant email
ApproverType Type of approver
ApproverEmail Email address of approver
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query queries the authoritative Whois database for the domain registrant’s email address, generates
other email addresses that are likely to be valid approvers for the cert, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CertGetApproverEmail&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Domain=partnerdomain.com&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a Success status True confirms that the query was successful:
<CertGetApproverEMail>
</Approver>
</Approver>
</Approver>
3/13/09 48
</Approver>
</Approver>
</Approver>
</Approver>
</Approver>
<Approver Type="Manual" />
</CertGetApproverEMail>
<Command>CERTGETAPPROVEREMAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
3/13/09 49
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCertDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve configuration information on one SSL certificate.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve detailed configuration information on one SSL certificate.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
CertID Required ID number of this cert. Use the CertGetCerts command to 8
retrieve the ID number
XML.

CertID ID number of this individual cert
DomainName Domain this cert is associated with
ValidityPeriod Total validity duration of this cert, in months
OrderDate Date on which this cert was ordered
ConfigDate Date on which this cert was installed
RenewalIndicator Renewal indicator setting for this cert
WebServerTypeID ID number of the type of server this cert is configured for
3/13/09 50

WebServerTypeName Text description of the type of server this cert is configured for
OrderID ID number of the order that included this cert
OrderDetailID Item ID number of this cert when it was ordered
ExpirationDate Expiration date of this cert
ServerCount Should always be 1
ApproverEmail Email address of the registrant
Message Message
CertStatusID ID number that identifies this cert’s phase in its processing
CertStatus Text description of this cert’s status in its processing
ProdType Product ID number of this type of cert
ProdDesc Text description of this type of cert
CSR Certificate Signing Request (CSR) code, provided by the
certificate authority
ReferenceID Reference ID number for this cert
SSLCertificate SSL certificate, provided by the certificate authority.
ContactTypeOrgName Organization name of Admin, Tech, or Billing Contact
ContactTypeJobTitle Job title of Contact
ContactTypeFName Given name of Contact
ContactTypeLName Family name of Contact
ContactTypeAddress1 Contact address, first line
ContactTypeAddress2 Contact address, second line
ContactTypeCity Contact city
ContactTypeStateProvince Contact state or province
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice Is this a state or a province?
ContactTypePostalCode Contact postal code
ContactTypeCountry Contact country
ContactTypePhone Contact phone
ContactTypeFax Contact fax
ContactTypeEmailAddress Contact email address
ContactTypePhoneExt Contact phone extension
WebServerTypeID ID number of this type of Web server
WebServerTypeName Text description of this type of Web server
WebServerTypeCode Text abbreviation of this type of Web server
Notes
3/13/09 51
Example
The following query retrieves information on a cert, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CERTGETCERTDETAIL&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&CertID=288&ResponseType=XML
In the response, cert information and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<CertGetCertDetail>
<ValidityPeriod>12</ValidityPeriod>
<OrderDate>2/14/2005 11:23:59 AM</OrderDate>
<ConfigDate />
<RenewalIndicator>False</RenewalIndicator>
<WebServerTypeID>13</WebServerTypeID>
<WebServerTypeName>Microsoft IIS 5.0</WebServerTypeName>
<OrderID>156249495</OrderID>
<OrderDetailID>1372870</OrderDetailID>
<ExpirationDate>2/14/2006 11:23:59 AM</ExpirationDate>
<ServerCount>1</ServerCount>
<Message />
<CertStatusID>2</CertStatusID>
<CertStatus>Processing</CertStatus>
<ProdType>21</ProdType>
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID</ProdDesc>
<CSR>-----BEGIN NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
MIIDPjCCAqcCAQAwYzEYMBYGA1UEAxMPa2ltYmVybHlzaGluLnVzMQwwCgY
DVQQLEwNLaW0xDDAKBgNVBAoTA0tpbTERMA8GA1UEBxMIQmVsbGV2dWUxCzA
JBgNVBAgTAldBMQswCQYDVQQGEwJVUzCBnzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAw
.
.
.
4BP8JmX8T2CJPnHOf2PIeXUujLhzv5bajXv HVTy1oG+/YLc+3LQzSm9rQXjMEk/1e
JXi3OAShQX+S2GbyaUitu+lZ/K8QIzxCto Kf0vNlzbB70fOjWWQqfJhVsm
-----END NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----</CSR>
<ReferenceID>17554</ReferenceID>
<SSLCertificate>>-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIDRTCCAq6gAwIBAgIDBPEKMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAMFoxCzAJBgNVBAYTAlVT
MRwwGgYDVQQKExNFcXVpZmF4IFNlY3VyZSBJbmMuMS0wKwYDVQQDEyRFcXVpZm
F4IFNlY3VyZSBHbG9iYWwgZUJ1c2luZXNzIENBLTEwHhcNMDYxMTEzMjIxNDA4WhcN
.
.
.
uJeFstXuC8vlHNiDbfiuVB3avYCKOChvRBcrZmiS907yPjIUbaJ0GtCXkp+uLyje
Y29RJJlU0XN527CE5P3Vh6Oaok5J6cr2tJMwAJS+t9obF8yDR9NHSU+9wcz5nS6V
zRpH7lZ2TDtq6+NT7EA3m5D3vvMI9ESDpw== -----END CERTIFICATE-----
</SSLCertificate>
<AdminOrgName>Partner Domains Inc.</AdminOrgName>
<AdminJobTitle>Tester</AdminJobTitle>
<AdminFName>John</AdminFName>
<AdminLName>Doe</AdminLName>
<AdminAddress1>100 Main Street</AdminAddress1>
<AdminAddress2 />
<AdminCity>Hometown</AdminCity>
<AdminStateProvince />
<AdminStateProvinceChoice />
<AdminPostalCode>99999</AdminPostalCode>
3/13/09 52
<AdminCountry>US</AdminCountry>
<AdminPhone>5559995555</AdminPhone>
<AdminFax>none</AdminFax>
<AdminEmailAddress>[email protected]</AdminEmailAddress>
<AdminPhoneExt />
<TechOrgName>Partner Domains Inc.</TechOrgName>
.
.
.
<BillingOrgName>Partner Domains Inc.</BillingOrgName>
.
.
.
<WebServerTypes>
<WebServerType>
<WebServerTypeName>Apache + MOD SSL</WebServerTypeName>
<WebServerTypeCode>apachessl</WebServerTypeCode>
</WebServerType>
<WebServerType>
<WebServerTypeName>Apache + OpenSSL</WebServerTypeName>
<WebServerTypeCode>apacheopenssl</WebServerTypeCode>
</WebServerType>
<WebServerType>
<WebServerTypeName>Apache + Raven</WebServerTypeName>
<WebServerTypeCode>apacheraven</WebServerTypeCode>
</WebServerType>
.
.
.
</WebServerTypes>
</CertGetCertDetail>
<Command>CERTGETCERTDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
3/13/09 53
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertGetCerts
CertGetCerts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the SSL certificates currently registered in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the types of SSL certificates that that are currently registered in this account.
InsertNewOrder
(this command)
CertPurchaseCert Submit configuration information to certification authority for final issu-
ance of cert
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.
3/13/09 54

IsExpired Is this cert expired?
CertID ID number for this individual cert, from our database
OrderDate Date on which this cert was purchased
ConfigDate Date on which this cert was configured
DomainName Domain that this cert is associated with
ValidityPeriod Expiration date for this cert
RenewalIndicator Renewal indicator setting
ProdType Product ID number, from our records
ProdDesc Text description of product
ExpirationDate Expiration date of this cert
ServerCount Should always return 1
CertStatus Current status of this cert
CertStatusID ID number corresponding to current cert status
OrderID Identification number of the order that included this cert
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err(1 to
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves all certs in a domain name account, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CertGetcerts&
UID=rcompartnerid&PW=rcompartnerpw&ResponseType=XML
In the response, cert information and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<CertGetCerts>
<Certs>
<Cert>
<IsExpired>False</IsExpired>
<OrderDate>3/21/2007</OrderDate>
<ConfigDate />
<DomainName />
3/13/09 55
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL</ProdDesc>

<ExpirationDate>3/21/2008</ExpirationDate>
<CertStatus>Awaiting Configuration</CertStatus>
</Cert>
<Cert>
<IsExpired>False</IsExpired>
<OrderDate>2/14/2007</OrderDate>
<ConfigDate />
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID</ProdDesc>
<ExpirationDate>2/14/2008</ExpirationDate>
<CertStatus>Processing</CertStatus>
</Cert>
.
.
.
</Certs>
</CertGetCerts>
<Command>CERTGETCERTS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCertDetail
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
3/13/09 56
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertModifyOrder
CertModifyOrder
Description
Definition
Cancel a cert configuration order. Cancellation is permitted while a cert is in status Approval email sent or
Processing. This command does not delete the cert from a customer’s account; it only cancels the configuration
order. This allows a customer to change the configuration, including the domain name with which the cert will be
associated.
Usage
A cert configuration order can only be canceled while the cert is in status Approval email sent or Processing.
InsertNewOrder
issuance of cert
(this command)
Availability
Constraints
• The CertModifyOrder command must reach the Certification Authority before they validate the cert.
3/13/09 57
Input parameters

size
CertID Required ID number for this cert, from our records. Use the 6
CertGetCerts command to retrieve this number.
HTML, or XML.

CertID Identification number of this cert
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query cancels the configuration order for a cert, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CertModifyOrder&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&CertID=294&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a cert ID number and an ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was successful:
<CertModifyOrder>
</CertModifyOrder>
<Command>CERTMODIFYORDER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
3/13/09 58
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
3/13/09 59
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertParseCSR
CertParseCSR
Description
Definition
Parse a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) to determine the domain name and other information associated with
this cert.
Usage
InsertNewOrder
(this command)
issuance of cert
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
3/13/09 60

size
CSR Required Certificate Signing Request (CSR) generated as an input 4500
parameter for the CertConfigureCert command.
CertID Required ID number of this cert. To retrieve this number, use the 8
CertGetCerts command.
XML.

Success Success status of this parsing operation
Organization Organization name embedded in the CSR
DomainName Domain name embedded in the CSR
Email Email address embedded in the CSR
Locality Locality (usually a city) embedded in the CSR
OrganizationUnit Organizational unit embedded in the CSR
State State embedded in the CSR
Country Country embedded in the CSR
back to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query parses a CSR and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CertParseCSR&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ResponseType=XML&CertID=295&
CSR=%2D%2D%2D%2D%2DBEGIN+NEW+CERTIFICATE+REQUEST%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D%0D%0
AMIIDVzCCAsACAQAwfDELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMxCzAJBgNVBAgTAkRFMRMwEQYDVQQH%0D%0AEwp
XaWxtaW5ndG9uMRIwEAYDVQQKEwlBY21lIEluYy4xGDAWBgNVBAsTD1NTTCBD%0D%0AZXJ0aWZpY2
F0ZTEdMBsGA1UEAxMUd3d3LnJlc2VsbGVyZG9jcy5jb20wgZ8wDQYJ%0D%0AKoZIhvcNAQEBBQADgY0
AMIGJAoGBAL0aEkBD2RkKOm82yJGy%2FIhLRH7pYIGZCazh%0D%0ACxp731BjemXjSaVJLu0%2BoE6
sIMRhV04X%2FJjVFgGGbswVvHT5qWZdpODe2EEBG971%0D%0ABJlUmBGEX%2Flgkd%2BjjHbP3MnO
qbkuRRYrdao2CPjB3dcv46IcjFvCl5P%2BSEVx7Y9c%0D%0Awjk3n%2FxLAgMBAAGgggGZMBoGCisGAQ
QBgjcNAgMxDBYKNS4yLjM3OTAuMjB7Bgor%0D%0ABgEEAYI3AgEOMW0wazAOBgNVHQ8BAf8EBAMCB
PAwRAYJKoZIhvcNAQkPBDcwNTAO%0D%0ABggqhkiG9w0DAgICAIAwDgYIKoZIhvcNAwQCAgCAMAcGB
SsOAwIHMAoGCCqGSIb3%0D%0ADQMHMBMGA1UdJQQMMAoGCCsGAQUFBwMBMIH9BgorBgEEAYI3D
QICMYHuMIHrAgEB%0D%0AHloATQBpAGMAcgBvAHMAbwBmAHQAIABSAFMAQQAgAFMAQwBoAGEAb
3/13/09 61
gBuAGUAbAAg%0D%0AAEMAcgB5AHAAdABvAGcAcgBhAHAAaABpAGMAIABQAHIAbwB2AGkAZABlAHI
DgYkA%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
A%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA%0
D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAADANBgkqhkiG%0D%0A
9w0BAQUFAAOBgQCfN86YfjwTGCMj84DFkvQBPX0zQ8815bgqaZSNHQRYl67Gj4A%2B%0D%0Awmg3
O18lX0NwBt%2BT%2F57OaJS4HB6x6JvAo96N%2B1vX%2F%2BiG2thcu1PqTb%2Fu%2BmUbapaa%0
D%0Ackas6Ubbe2MVHKRz7o0ZNfIKUrRBdCRtZBEVxz1ZrPMqRHVo1oq5N17SEA%3D%3D%0D%0A%2
D%2D%2D%2D%2DEND+NEW+CERTIFICATE+REQUEST%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D
In the response, parsed information and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<CertParseCSR>
<Organization>Acme Inc.</Organization>
<DomainName>www.partnerdomain.com</DomainName>
<Email />
<Locality>Wilmington</Locality>
<OrganizationUnit>SSL Certificate</OrganizationUnit>
<State>DE</State>
</CertParseCSR>
<Command>CERTPARSECSR</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertPurchaseCert
GetCerts
3/13/09 62
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CertPurchaseCert
CertPurchaseCert
Description
Definition
Send a cert configuration to its Certification Authority for final approval and issuance of the cert.
Usage
Once you have confirmed that all configuration information is correct, use this command to send the configuration
to the Certification Authority for final approval and issuance of the cert.
InsertNewOrder
(this command) issuance of cert
Availability
Constraints
3/13/09 63
Input parameters

size
ApproverEmail Required Email address of the registrant of record for the 130
domain to be associated with this cert. Use the
CertParseCSR command to retrieve the domain
name, and then use the CertGetApproverEmail
command to retrieve the registrant’s email address
(the “approver”) from the authoritative Whois
database.
CertID Required ID number for this cert, from our records. Use the 6
CertGetCerts command to retrieve this number.
CSROrganization Optional for EV Name of the organization that will use this cert 64
certs
CSROrganizationUnit Optional for EV Unit within the organization that will use this cert 64
certs
CSRAddress1 Optional for EV Address, line 1, of the organization that will use this 128
certs cert
CSRAddress2 Optional for EV Address, line 2 128
certs
CSRAddress3 Optional for EV Address, line 3 128
certs
CSRLocality Optional for EV Location (often a city) of the organization 128
certs
CSRStateProvince Optional for EV State or province in which the organization is 128
certs located
CSRPostalCode Optional for EV Postal code of the organization 40
certs
CSRCountry Optional for EV Country in which the organization is located 40
certs
DUNSNumber Optional for EV D-U-N-S Number. Speeds validation of EV certs 32
certs
HTML, or XML.

CertID Identification number of this cert
values.
client.
3/13/09 64
Notes
Example
The following query sends information to the Certification Authority for final validation of the cert, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CertPurchaseCert&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&[email protected]&CertID=295&
CSRAddress1=111+Main&CSRLocality=Wilmington&CSRStateProvince=DE&
CSRPostalCode=00123&ResponseType=XML
In the response, an ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was successful:
<CertPurchaseCert>
</CertPurchaseCert>
<Command>CERTPURCHASECERT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
GetCerts
3/13/09 65
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Check
Check
Description
Definition
Check the availability of a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to check whether a domain name is already registered.
Availability
The Check command is available to every reseller.
Constraints
Domain names must meet the following requirements:
• Second-level domain (SLD) must be composed of the letters a through z, the numbers 0 through 9, and
the hyphen (-) character.
• Some foreign character sets can display onscreen, but resolve to alphanumeric plus hyphen characters
in the underlying code.
• The SLD must not begin or end with the hyphen character.
• The SLD must not contain spaces.
• The SLD must not contain special characters other than the hyphen character.
• The third and fourth characters of the SLD must not both be hyphens unless it is an encoded
international-character domain name.
• The SLD must contain 2 to 63 characters, inclusive.
• SLDs are not case sensitive.
• The SLD-TLD combination must be unique.
Input parameters
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?Command=Check&UID=YourLogin
&PW=YourPassword&SLD=DesiredSLD&TLD=DesiredTLD&OptParam1=ParamValue1
&OptParam2=ParamValue2

size
SLD Required Second-level domain name (for example, register in 63
unless register.com)
DomainList
is used
3/13/09 66

size
TLD Required Top-level domain name (extension). Permitted values: 15
unless Any single TLD, for example, com
DomainList * returns 11 of the most commonly used TLDs:
or TLDList is com, org, net, biz, ws, info, cc, us, tv, bz, nu
used *1 returns com, net, org, info, biz, us, ws
*2 returns com, net, org, info, biz, us
@ returns com, net, org
DomainList Optional A comma- or newline-delimited list of domains to check, up 2000
to 30 names.
If used, SLD and TLD are ignored.
TLDList Optional A comma- or newline-delimited list of TLDs to check, up to 2000
30 names.
If used, TLD is ignored.
XML.

DomainX If return includes multiple domains, the name of domain X (indexed
X in HTML and Text output, but not in XML output)
RRPCodeX Success code. Only 210 indicates that the name is available at the
Registry. 211 indicates the domain is not available at the Registry.
RRPTextX Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode.
210 Domain available
211 Domain not available
IsPremiumName True indicates this is a premium name.
PremiumPrice Registration price per year for this premium name, in $US.
PremiumAboveThresholdPrice True indicates the registration price for this premium name is
higher than for non-premium names.
AuctionDateX Scheduled closing date for this auction
AuctionIDX Auction ID number for this domain name
DomainCount The number of names checked.
back to the client.
Notes
• When parsing the response, use the RRPCode value rather than the RRPText value or the position in the
response. Of these, only the RRPCode value is guaranteed by the Registry to be stable.
3/13/09 67
Example
The following checks whether the domain name unusualTVname.tv is available and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=check&
sld=unusualTVname&tld=tv&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that unusualTVname.tv is available:
<DomainName>unusualtvname.tv</DomainName>
<PremiumName>
<IsPremiumName>False</IsPremiumName>
<PremiumPrice />
<PremiumAboveThresholdPrice>False</PremiumAboveThresholdPrice>
</PremiumName>
<RRPCode>210</RRPCode>
<RRPText>Domain available</RRPText>
<AuctionDate />
<AuctionID />
<Command>CHECK</Command>
<Server>Reseller4</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
InsertNewOrder
NameSpinner
Purchase
3/13/09 68
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CheckLogin
CheckLogin
Description
Definition
Validate user login for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command when you want to validate a user’s identity.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?Command=CheckLogin&UID=YourLogin
&PW=YourPassword

size
XML.

PartyID PartyID of the account
Reseller Is this a reseller account?
ParentAccount Parent account ID number
RSA Reserved parameter. Should always return False.
SiteType Site
HelpEmailAddress Email address for the Billing contact for this account
Type Agreement type
Description Name of this agreement
Category Category of this agreement
RemoteURL URL of this agreement, if it is not served by us
3/13/09 69

LatestVersion Version number of this agreement
Agreed Has this account agreed to this agreement?
CurrentCompliance Is this account currently complying with this agreement?
AgreementNote Note on this agreement
ParentAccount Account ID of this account’s parent
Enforced Enforcement setting
ViewAgreement View setting for agreement
CartItems Number of items currently in cart
Language Language setting
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is back
to the client.
ResponseCount Number of responses
MinPeriod Minimum registration period (for domain names)
MaxPeriod Maximum registration period (for domain names)
Server Server name
Site Site for which this response is configured
IsLockable Can this domain be Registrar locked? (for domain names)
IsRealTimeTLD Is this a domain that can be purchased in real time? (for domain names)
TimeDifference Time difference between this site and our servers
ExecTime Time elapsed to execute this command
Notes
Example
The following query requests the party ID and reseller status of account rcompartnerid, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=checklogin&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&responsetype=xml
The response provides basic information about the account:
<PartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</PartyID>
<Reseller>True</Reseller>
<ParentAccount>000-00-0000</ParentAccount>
<IsGPN>1</IsGPN>
<RSA>False</RSA>
<SiteType>E</SiteType>
<HelpEmailAddress>[email protected]</HelpEmailAddress>
3/13/09 70
<AgreementStatus>
<Agreement>
<Type>1</Type>
<Description>ResellerAgreement</Description>
<Category>ResellerAgreement</Category>
<RemoteURL />
<LatestVersion>2.4</LatestVersion>
<Agreed>0</Agreed>
<CurrentCompliance>1</CurrentCompliance>
<AgreementNote />
</Agreement>
<Agreement>
<Type>4</Type>
<Description>ResellerNotification</Description>
<Category>ResellerNotification</Category>
<RemoteURL />
<LatestVersion>12</LatestVersion>
<Agreed>1</Agreed>
<CurrentCompliance>1</CurrentCompliance>
<AgreementNote />
</Agreement>
</AgreementStatus>
<AgreementCount />
<ParentAccount>000-00-0000</ParentAccount>
<Enforced>False</Enforced>
<ViewAgreement>True</ViewAgreement>
<CartItems>3</CartItems>
<Command>CHECKLOGIN</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 71
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CheckNSStatus
CheckNSStatus
Description
Definition
Check the status of a name server.
Usage
Use this command when you want to determine whether a name server exists.
Availability
Constraints
• The name server must exist.
• The query must call the name server in a valid format (by its use name, not its IP address).
Input parameters

size
CheckNSName Required Name server use name to check. Use format 63
dnsX.NameServerName.com.
XML.

NSCheckSuccess Was this name server check successful? 1 indicates yes; 0 indicates no.
Other parameters Other parameters will be returned, and will vary from one name server to
another
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 72

Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is back to
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the status of name server dns01.gpn.register.com, and requests the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=checknsstatus&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&checknsname=dns01.gpn.register.com&
responsetype=xml
The NsCheckStatus value of 1 indicates that the name server was found:
<NsCheckSuccess>1</NsCheckSuccess>
<CheckNsStatus>
<version>0</version>
<name>dns01.gpn.register.com</name>
<status>
<status>ok</status>
<status>linked</status>
</status>
<ipaddress>63.251.83.37</ipaddress>
<attrib-id>5232127_HOST_CNE-VRSN</attrib-id>
<attrib-crdate>2002-01-15T20:34:07.0000Z</attrib-crdate>
<attrib-update>2002-04-18T17:35:43.0000Z</attrib-update>
<attrib-upid>y2ktest</attrib-upid>
<attrib-crid>rccbatch</attrib-crid>
<attrib-clid>024</attrib-clid>
</CheckNsStatus>
<RRPCode />
<RRPText />
<Command>CHECKNSSTATUS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
3/13/09 73
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 74
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CommissionAccount
CommissionAccount
Description
Definition
Returns the current commission balance for an account.
Usage
Use this command to return the current commission balances for an account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

values.
client.
3/13/09 75
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CommissionAccount
Notes
Example
The following query requests the total and available commission balances for account rcompartnerid, and
requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=commissionaccount&
The response lists the balances:
<CommissionAccount>
<Action />
<data-errors />
<CommissionBalance>6.69</CommissionBalance>
<AvailComBalance>0</AvailComBalance>
</CommissionAccount>
<Command>COMMISSIONACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetBalance
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 76
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Contacts
Contacts
Description
Definition
Update contact information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to set or change contact information for a domain.
If you want to update one contact type and leave the others as is, use this command with the ContactType
parameter.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must exist in the account that is modifying it.
• Some country code TLDs require extended attributes (parameters that are specific to the country code).
To find out whether a country code TLD requires extended parameters and what they are, run
GetExtAttributes on the country code.
• The BILLING contact type cannot be updated with this command. To update billing information, use
UpdateAccountInfo.
• If you use the ContactType parameter, you can reset only one contact type.
• If you use the ContactType parameter, the contact type of the other parameters must match it (for
example, if you set ContactType=AUXBILLING, you must use parameters
AuxBillingOrganizationName, AuxBillingFirstName, and so on.
• If you don’t use the ContactType parameter and don’t supply new information for all contacts, those
that you don’t supply will be empty in the database and will use our defaults in interfaces.
Input parameters

size
SLD Required Second-level domain name (for 63
example, register in register.com)
TLD Required Top-level domain name 15
(extension)
3/13/09 77

size
ContactType Optional Type of contact to add/update. 16
Options are REGISTRANT,
AUXBILLING, TECH, ADMIN
ContactTypeOrganizationName Required for each Organization of ContactType 60
contact type you add contact
or update
ContactTypeFirstName Required for each First name of ContactType 60
or update
ContactTypeLastName Required for each Last name of ContactType contact 60
contact type you add
or update
ContactTypeJobTitle Optional Job title of ContactType contact 60
ContactTypeAddress1 Required for each Address of ContactType contact 60
or update
ContactTypeAddress2 Optional Additional address info of 60
ContactType contact
ContactTypeCity Required for each City of ContactType contact 60
or update
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice Optional State or province choice of 1
ContactType contact. Permitted
values are:
S State
P Province
ContactTypeStateProvince Optional State or province of ContactType 60
contact
ContactTypePostalCode Optional for most Postal code of ContactType 16
TLDs; Required for contact
.org
ContactTypeCountry Required for each Country of ContactType contact 60
or update
ContactTypeEmailAddress Required for each Email address of ContactType 128
or update
ContactTypePhone Required for each Phone number of ContactType 17
contact type you add contact. Required format is
or update +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
where CountryCode and
PhoneNumber use only numeric
characters.
ContactTypePhoneExt Optional for each Phone extension of ContactType 17
or update
3/13/09 78

size
ContactTypeFax Optional Fax number of ContactType 17
contact. Required format is
+CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
characters.
ExtendedAttributes Required for some Data required by the Registry for varies
country codes some country codes. Use
GetExtAttributes to determine
whether this TLD requires
extended attributes.

RegistrarHold The enabled status of a domain. If RegistrarHold is True, the domain is disabled.
values.
client.
Notes
• The BILLING contact type cannot be updated with this command. To update billing information, use
UpdateAccountInfo.
• You can submit multiple contact data in a single request by omitting the ContactType parameter and
sending additional contact data by replacing Registrant in the above optional parameters with the
ContactTypes AUXBILLING, TECH, or ADMIN.
• If you use the ContactType parameter, you can reset only one contact type.
• If you use the ContactType parameter, the contact type of the other parameters must match it (for example,
if you set ContactType=AUXBILLING, you must use parameters AuxBillingOrganizationName,
AuxBillingFirstName, and so on).
• If you don’t use the ContactType parameter and don’t supply new information for all contacts, those that
you don’t supply will be empty in the database and will use our defaults in interfaces.
• AUXBILLING masks the true billing contact in WhoIs output.
• Some country code TLDs require extended attributes (parameters that are specific to the country code). To
find out whether a country code TLD requires extended parameters and what they are, run GetExtAttributes
on the country code.
3/13/09 79
Example
The following query provides new technical contact information for partnerdomain.com and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=contacts&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&
ContactType=Tech&TechFirstName=John&TechLastName=Smith&
TechPhone=+1.5555555555&TechAddress1=100%20Main%20St.&TechCity=Townsville&
TechCountry=USA&[email protected]&responsetype=xml
The error count of 0 in the response confirms that the query was successful:
<DomainRRP>E</DomainRRP>
<RegistrarHold>False</RegistrarHold>
<Command>CONTACTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddContact
GetAddressBook
GetContacts
GetExtAttributes
GetServiceContact
GetWhoisContact
Preconfigure
3/13/09 80
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CreateAccount
CreateAccount
Description
Definition
Create a new subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to create a new retail subaccount.
CreateAccount differs from CreateSubAccount in that CreateAccount offers credit card processing.
Availability
Constraints
• Parameter values submitted in the query must pass validation tests.
Input parameters

size
NewUID Required Subaccount login ID. Permitted 20
characters are letters, numbers,
hyphen, and underscore
NewPW Required Subaccount password. Permitted 20
characters are letters, numbers,
hyphen, and underscore
ConfirmPW Required Confirm subaccount password. 20
Permitted characters are letters,
numbers, hyphen, and underscore
RegistrantOrganizationName Required Registrant organization 60
RegistrantPostalCode Required Registrant postal code 16
3/13/09 81

size
S state
P province
RegistrantPhone Required Registrant phone number. Required 17
format is
+CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
RegistrantFax Optional Registrant fax number. Required 17
format is
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for Whois 128
RegistrantEmailAddress_Contact Optional Email address for us to contact you 128
about your domain name account
CardType Required Type of credit card 20
CCName Required Cardholder's name 60
CreditCardNumber Required Customer's credit card number 128
CreditCardExpMonth Required Credit card expiration month 2
CreditCardExpYear Required Credit card expiration year 4
CVV2 Required Credit card verification code 4
CCAddress Required Credit card billing address 60
CCZip Required Credit card billing postal code 15
CCCountry Required Credit card billing country 60
AuthQuestionType Required Type of question. Values can be 10
smaiden, sbirth, ssocial, shigh
AuthQuestionAnswer Required The answer to the question type 50
(mother's maiden name, city of birth,
last 4 digits of social security, or high
school)
EmailInfo Optional The value of a send e-mail notification 10
checkbox. If EmailInfo=checked an
email will be sent to the registrant
email parameter posted with this
request containing this account
information

OrganizationName Organization name of the Billing contact
FName First name (given name) of the Billing contact
LName Last name (family name) of the Billing contact
JobTitle Job title for the Billing contact
3/13/09 82

Address1 Address, line 1, for the Billing contact
Address2 Address, line 2, for the Billing contact
City City for the Billing contact
StateProvince State or province for the Billing contact
StateProvinceChoice Tells whether StateProvince value is a state or a province
PostalCode Postal code for the Billing contact
Country County for the Billing contact
Phone Phone number for the Billing contact
PhoneExt Phone extension for the Billing contact
Fax Fax number for the Billing contact
EmailAddress Email address for public WhoIs record
EmailAddress_Contact Email address that we use when contacting account owner about this
account
EmailInfo Tells whether confirmation emails should be sent to these email addresses
CCType Type of credit card
CCName Cardholder’s name
CCNumber Credit card number
CCMonth Expiration month for this credit card
CCYear Expiration year for this credit card
CCAddress Billing address street address for this credit card
CCCity Billing address city for this credit card
CCStateProvince Billing address state or province for this credit card
CCZip Billing address postal code for this credit card
CCCountry Billing address country for this credit card
CCPhone Phone number on record for this credit card
Reseller 1 indicates this subaccount is a reseller account; 0 indicates retail
NewUID Login ID for this subaccount
NewPW Password for this subaccount
ConfirmPW Repeat password, for confirmation purposes
AuthQuestionType Type of authorization question for this subaccount
AuthQuestionAnswer Answer to the authorization question
DefPeriod Default registration period for domain names, in years
StatusCustomerInfo Returns Successful if the subaccount was created
PartyID Party ID of this subaccount, for our records
Account Account ID code of this subaccount, for our records. We recommend that
you store this value.
sLoginPass Code we use to log the user into the new subaccount immediately.
ErrCount) values.
the client.
3/13/09 83
Notes
• If there are errors validating the data passed in, the same parameters and values are returned to rebuild the
form.
Example
The following query creates subaccount giambi, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CreateAccount&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&NewUID=giambi&
NewPW=giambipw&ConfirmPW=giambipw&
RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller%20Documents%20Inc.&RegistrantFirstName=John&
RegistrantLastName=Doe&RegistrantJobTitle=First%20Baseman&
RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20St.&RegistrantCity=Hometown&
RegistrantPostalCode=99999&RegistrantCountry=United+States&
RegistrantEmailAddress=john%2Edoe%40partnerdomain%2Ecom&
RegistrantPhone=+1.5555555555&RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&AuthQuestionType=smaiden&
AuthQuestionAnswer=jones&Reseller=0&CardType=visa&CCName=test1&ResponseType=XML
The response confirms the successful creation of the subaccount and returns subaccount information:
<NewAccount>
<StatusCustomerInfo>Successful</StatusCustomerInfo>
<PartyID>{8D504DD5-C773-41C4-83F6-4495CA479103}</PartyID>
<Account>154-dz-5567</Account>
<sLoginPass>
91DDFEF7E0E7F6A9DDFEF7E0E7F6A9A5BDA0A6BDA0A2A2A0B2A5A8A2A3A8A2AAB2C2DF
</sLoginPass>
</NewAccount>
<Command>CREATEACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 84
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateSubAccount
DeleteSubaccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
SubAccountDomains
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 85
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: CreateSubAccount
CreateSubAccount
Description
Definition
Create a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to create a new retail subaccount.
Resellers can also create subaccounts to help organize their business.
CreateSubAccount differs from CreateAccount in that CreateAccount offers credit card processing;
CreateSubAccount does not.
Availability
Constraints
• The account must have reseller status in Register.com’s database.
Input parameters

size
NewUID Required Subaccount login ID. Permitted 20
characters are letters, numbers, hyphen,
and underscore
NewPW Required Subaccount password. Permitted 20
characters are letters, numbers, hyphen,
and underscore
ConfirmPW Required Confirm subaccount password. 20
Permitted characters are letters,
numbers, hyphen, and underscore
AuthQuestionType Optional Type of question. Values can be 10
smaiden, sbirth, ssocial, shigh
AuthQuestionAnswer Optional The answer to the question type 50
(mother's maiden name, city of birth,
last 4 digits of social security, or high
school)
3/13/09 86

size
RegistrantCountry Required Registrant country 60
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for WhoIs 128
RegistrantEmailAddress_Contact Optional Email address for us to contact you 128
about your domain name account
RegistrantFax Optional Registrant fax number. Required format 17
is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
RegistrantPhone Required Registrant phone. Required format is 17
RegistrantPostalCode Optional Registrant postal code 16
S state
P province

StatusCustomerInfo Returns Successful if account was created
PartyID Party ID for the new subaccount
Account Account ID for the new subaccount
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
3/13/09 87
Example
The following query creates a new subaccount, resellsub4, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=CreateSubAccount&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&newuid=resellsub4&newpw=resellsub4&
confirmpw=resellsub4&RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller%20Documents%20Inc.&
RegistrantFirstName=john&RegistrantLastName=doe&RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20St.&
RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantStateProvince=NY&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=S&
RegistrantEmailAddress=john%2Edoe%40partnerdomain%2Ecom&
RegistrantPhone=+1.5555555555&RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&
AuthQuestionType=smaiden&AuthQuestionAnswer=jones&ResponseType=XML
The response confirms the successful creation of the subaccount:
<NewAccount>
<StatusCustomerInfo>Successful</StatusCustomerInfo>
<PartyID>{B301E3A9-1BFF-4600-9B2D-D214C29325A9}</PartyID>
<Account>661-zw-1374</Account>
</NewAccount>
<Command>CREATESUBACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
SubAccountDomains
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 88
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeleteAllPOPPaks
Description
Definition
Delete all POP3 email paks in a domain.
Usage
Use this command to delete all POP3 paks from a domain. Note that if you delete the POP paks, the only way to
replace them is to buy new paks.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must belong to this account.
• All POP paks in the domain must have no user emails configured. You can use the DeletePOP3
command to remove user email accounts.
Input parameters
interface.asp?command=nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&
pw=yourpassword&paramname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

size
register.com)
TLD Required Top-level domain name (extension) 15
XML.

PaksRemoved Number of POP paks removed from the domain name
3/13/09 89
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteAllPOPPaks

values.
client.
Notes
• Use the DeletePOP3 command to delete any email user accounts before running DeleteAllPOPPaks.
Example
The following query deletes all POP3 10-paks from partnerdomain.com and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DeleteAllPOPPaks&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the error count 0 confirms that the command executed successfully:
<Command>DELETEALLPOPPAKS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 90
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteContact
DeleteContact
Description
Definition
Delete a contact from the address book.
Usage
Use this command to delete a contact from a domain name account’s address book.
Availability
Constraints
• Only contacts added with the AddContact command can be deleted.
Input parameters

size
RegistrantPartyID Required Party ID number of the contact you want to delete. Use 40
the GetAddressBook command to retrieve the Party ID.
Required format is the Party ID enclosed in curly
braces.
or XML.

values.
client.
3/13/09 91
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteContact
Notes
Example
The following query deletes a contact from a domain account’s address book, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DELETECONTACT&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&
registrantpartyid={4545A013-B40A-4D50-A15A-5D4356723794}&responsetype=xml
In the response, the ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was successful:
<Command>DELETECONTACT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddContact
GetAddressBook
GetContacts
GetSubAccounts
3/13/09 92
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteCustomerDefinedData
Description
Definition
Delete customer-defined data records.
Usage
Use this command to delete customer-defined data.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ObjectID Required Object ID number, an integer assigned when this 2
customer-defined field was first established.
Type Required Object type. Permitted values are: 1
1 Data pertaining to an account
2 Data pertaining to a domain
3 Data pertaining to an order
SLD Required if Second-level domain name (for example, register in 63
Type=2 register.com)
TLD Required if Top-level domain name (extension) 15
Type=2
OrderID Required if Order ID, which you can retrieve using the 11
Type=3 GetDomainStatus comand.
Key Required Title of this entry, or label describing this data field 50
XML.
3/13/09 93
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteCustomerDefinedData

values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is back to the cli-
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes the customer-defined data labeled FavoriteCuisine from account rcompartnerid,
and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=deletecustomerdefineddata&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ObjectID=1&Type=1&Key=FavoriteCuisine&
responsetype=xml
<Command>DELETECUSTOMERDEFINEDDATA</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
3/13/09 94
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteFromCart
DeleteFromCart
Description
Definition
Delete an item or all items from the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command when you want to remove one or all items from the shopping cart.
Availability
Constraints
• The shopping cart must contain one or more items.
• One or all items in the shopping cart must be deleted.
Input parameters

size
ItemNumber Either Item ID number of the item to be deleted from the 10
ItemNumber shopping cart. Use the GetCartContent command to
or EmptyCart retrieve the item ID numbers.
is Required
EmptyCart Either Use EmptyCart=On to completely empty the shopping 2
ItemNumber cart.
or EmptyCart
is Required
XML.

ItemDeleted True if deleted.
3/13/09 95
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteFromCart

values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that item 365485 be deleted from the shopping cart, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DeleteFromCart&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ItemNumber=365485&ResponseType=XML
The response confirms the successful deletion from the shopping cart:
<ItemDeleted>True</ItemDeleted>
<Command>DELETEFROMCART</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
AddToCart
GetCartContent
InsertNewOrder
PurchasePreview
UpdateCart
3/13/09 96
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteHostedDomain
DeleteHostedDomain
Description
Definition
Discontinue our DNS hosting of a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to cancel our DNS hosting of a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must be hosted by this account.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

OldRegistrationStatus Registration status before running this query
Status Success status for canceling DNS hosting on this domain
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 97
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteHostedDomain

the client.
Notes
Example
The following query discontinues our DNS hosting of ExternalHostedDomain.com, and sends the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DeleteHostedDomain&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=ExternalHostedDomain&tld=com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the OldRegistrationStatus value Hosted and the ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query
was successful:
<DeleteHostedDomain>
<OldRegistrationStatus>Hosted</OldRegistrationStatus>
<Status>Success</Status>
</DeleteHostedDomain>
<Command>DELETEHOSTEDDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
ExtendDomainDNS
PurchaseHosting
3/13/09 98
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteNameServer
DeleteNameServer
Description
Definition
Delete a name server at the Registry.
Usage
Use this command to delete a name server at the Registry. This command does not affect the name servers listed
for any individual domain.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name server must be registered.
• The domain name this DNS uses must belong to this account.
• The domain name server must have no domains using it.
• All registrar locks and Registry holds must be off, and the domain must be in an active state.
Input parameters

size
NS Required Use name of name server, in format dns1.ServerName.com 60
XML.

RegistrarLock Registrar lock status
NsSuccess Success of the name server reset process
RegistrarLock Registrar lock setting
RRPCode Registry code
3/13/09 99

RRPText Description of Registry code
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes the name server registration for dns3.partnerdomain.com at the Registry, and
sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=deletenameserver&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ns=dns3.partnerdomain.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the NsSuccess value 1, the RRPCode 200, and the RRPText Command completed
successfully confirm that the query was successful:
<RegisterNameserver>
<RegistrarLock>ACTIVE</RegistrarLock>
<NsSuccess>1</NsSuccess>
<RegistrarLock>REGISTRAR-LOCK</RegistrarLock>
</RegisterNameserver>
<RRPText>Command completed successfully</RRPText>
<Command>DELETENAMESERVER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 100
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 101
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeletePOP3
DeletePOP3
Description
Definition
Delete an individual POP3 user name from the database.
Usage
Use this command to delete an individual POP3 email user name. Once you delete it, you can fill that vacancy
with another name. This command has no effect on the POP 10-pak nor on any other user names in the account.
Availability
Constraints
• The user name must be listed in the POP3 list for the account.
• The user name must be in a POP pak for which the subscription is current.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
PopUser Required POP mailbox user name to delete 16
XML.

3/13/09 102
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeletePOP3

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes the POP user james and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DeletePOP3&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&POPUser=james&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count of 0 confirms that the POP user was deleted successfully:
<Command>DELETEPOP3</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetCatchAll
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 103
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeletePOPPak
DeletePOPPak
Description
Definition
Delete a POP Email pak under a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to delete an entire 10-pak of POP accounts. Note that once a pak is deleted, the only way to
replace it is to purchase a new one.
Availability
Constraints
• The pak must have no user email accounts currently configured.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
BundleID Required ID number of the POP pak to delete. Use GetPOP3 to get POP 6
pak IDs.
XML.

3/13/09 104
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeletePOPPak

values.
client.
Notes
• Use the DeletePOP3 command to delete any email user accounts before running DeletePOPPak.
Example
The following query deletes POP bundle 5733 from partnerdomain.com and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DeletePOPPak&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&BundleID=5733&
ResponseType=XML
The ErrCount value 0 confirms that the command was successful:
<Command>DELETEPOPPAK</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
Forwarding
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 105
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteRegistration
DeleteRegistration
Description
Definition
Delete a domain name registration.
Usage
Use this command to delete a domain name registration. Fees will apply.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must have been purchased less than five days ago.
• The most common TLDs, including .com and .net, can be deleted. For other TLDs, check the reseller
pages on our Web site.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
EndUserIP Required End user’s IP address. Permitted format is 15
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN
XML.
3/13/09 106

DomainDeleted If domain deleted successfully, response is True
ErrString Error string
ErrSource Error source
ErrSection Error section
RRPCode Registry success code
RRPText Text that corresponds to and explains the RRPCode value
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes a domain and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=deleteregistration&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain3&tld=info&
responsetype=xml
In the response, an RRPCode value 200 confirms that the query was successful:
<deletedomain>
<domaindeleted>True</domaindeleted>
</deletedomain>
<ErrString/>
<ErrSource/>
<ErrSection>DELETEREGISTRATION</ErrSection>
<Command>DELETEREGISTRATION</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
3/13/09 107
<debug>
[CDATA ]
</debug>
Related commands
AddToCart
Purchase
3/13/09 108
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteSubaccount
DeleteSubaccount
Description
Definition
Delete a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to delete a retail or reseller subaccount.
Availability
Constraints
• The subaccount must belong to this account.
Input parameters

size
Account Required Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-NNNN format. You can 11
retrieve the subaccount ID number using the
GetSubAccounts command.
Action Optional; Action to take. Permitted values are 7
default value is Confirm Confirm which subaccount is to be deleted
Confirm Delete Delete the subaccount specified in this query
XML.

Action Action to be taken with regard to deleting this subaccount
values.
3/13/09 109
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DeleteSubaccount

client.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes the sub-account with account number 332-ep-2379 and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=deletesubaccount&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&account=332-ep-2379&Action=delete&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the Action return parameter and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<DeleteSubAccount>
<Action>DELETE</Action>
</DeleteSubAccount>
<Command>DELETESUBACCOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>e</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CreateAccount
GetSubAccounts
3/13/09 110
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DisableServices
DisableServices
Description
Definition
Switch off a service in an account.
Usage
Use this command to switch off a service in a domain name account.
This command does not shut down the service or cancel it at the end of the current billing period; it merely toggles
it off.
Availability
Constraints
• Other constraints may apply depending on the services being disabled.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
Service Required Name of the service to be disabled. Permitted values are: 15
WPPS (Whois Privacy Protection)
EmailForwarding
URLForwarding
XML.
3/13/09 111
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: DisableServices

Service Name of the service being disabled
ServiceStatus New status of this service
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query disables the RCOM Shield Whois privacy protection service on partnerdomain.com and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=DISABLESERVICES&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&service=wpps&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the ServiceStatus value confirms the new status of the service:
<Service>WPPS</Service>
<ServiceStatus>Disabled</ServiceStatus>
<Command>DISABLESERVICES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable>1</IsLockable>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
EnableServices
GetWPPSInfo
ServiceSelect
3/13/09 112
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: EnableServices
EnableServices
Description
Definition
Switch on a service in a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to switch on a service in a domain name account.
This command does not give this account access to the service or subscribe to the service. Rather, it toggles on a
service that the account has already subscribed to but has toggled off.
Availability
Constraints
• Other constraints may apply depending on the services being enabled.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
Service Required Name of the service to be enabled. Permitted values are: 15
WPPS (RCOM Shield, our Whois privacy protection
service)
EmailForwarding
URLForwarding
XML.
3/13/09 113

Service Name of the service being enabled
ServiceStatus New status of this service
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query enables the RCOM Shield Whois privacy protection service on partnerdomain.com and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=ENABLESERVICES&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&service=wpps&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the ServiceStatus value confirms the new status of the service:
<Service>WPPS</Service>
<ServiceStatus>Enabled</ServiceStatus>
<Command>ENABLESERVICES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 114
Related commands
AddToCart
DisableServices
GetWPPSInfo
PurchaseServices
ServiceSelect
SetRenew
3/13/09 115
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Extend
Extend
Description
Definition
Extend (renew) the registration period for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to renew domain registrations in real time. We recommend that you renew at least a week
before the domain expiration date.
Most commonly, this command is used by resellers who maintain their own databases. Resellers who use a
shopping cart and our order processing queue generally use the AddToCart command with input parameter
ProductType=Renew.
After a domain expires, use UpdateExpiredDomains to reactivate it and renew its registration.
Availability
Constraints
• To use our credit card processing, this must be an ETP reseller account.
• The domain name must be valid and active.
• The new expiration date cannot be more than 10 years in the future.
Input parameters

size
NumYears Optional Number of years to extend 10
OverrideOrder Optional Use OverrideOrder=1 to submit 1
more than one renewal request for this
domain name within 24 hours of the
first transaction
UseCreditCard Optional If UseCreditCard=yes, use 3
Register.com’s credit-card processing
services
3/13/09 116

size
EndUserIP Required if End user’s IP address. This is used in 15
UseCreditCard fraud checking, as part of our order
=yes processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ChargeAmount Required if Amount to charge per year for the 6
UseCreditCard renewal. Use DD.cc format.
=yes
CardType Required if Type of credit card 20
UseCreditCard
=yes
CCName Required if Cardholder's name 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
CreditCardNumber Required if Customer's credit card number 128
UseCreditCard
=yes
CreditCardExpMonth Required if Credit card expiration month 2
UseCreditCard
=yes
CreditCardExpYear Required if Credit card expiration year 4
UseCreditCard
=yes
CVV2 Required if Credit card verification code 4
UseCreditCard
=yes
CCAddress Required if Credit card billing address 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
CCZip Required if Credit card billing postal code 15
UseCreditCard
=yes
CCCountry Required if Credit card billing country 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantFirstName Required if Registrant first name 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantLastName Required if Registrant last name 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantAddress1 Required if Registrant address 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantCity Required if Registrant city 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
S state
P province
RegistrantStateProvince Required if Registrant state or province 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
3/13/09 117

size
RegistrantPostalCode Required if Registrant postal code 16
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantCountry Required if Registrant country 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantEmailAddress Required if Registrant email address 128
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantPhone Required if Registrant phone number. Required 20
UseCreditCard format is
=yes +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
format is

OrderID Order number if successful. We recommend that you store this value for future use.
Extension Returns Successful, otherwise this parameter isn't returned.
RRPCode Success code. Only a 200 indicates success.
RRPText Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode.
values.
client.
Notes
• If using our credit card option ALL credit card information is required.
• We recommend that you store the OrderID value—at least the most recent one for each domain—from the
return. Several other commands use this value as a required input parameter.
3/13/09 118
Example
The following query requests that the registration period for partnerdomain.com be extended for 1 year, and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=Extend&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&NumYears=1&Response-
Type=XML
The response confirms the successful extension of the registration period for the domain:
<Extension>successful</Extension>
<Command>EXTEND</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Extend_RGP
ExtendDomainDNS
GetDomainExp
GetExtendInfo
GetPOPExpirations
GetRenew
InsertNewOrder
RenewPOPBundle
SetRenew
3/13/09 119
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Extend_RGP
Extend_RGP
Description
Definition
Renew domain names that are in RGP status, in near-real time. This command charges not only the usual
renewal fee, but also the higher redemption fee.
Usage
Use this command to extend names that are in RGP status. This command does not yet accommodate names in
Extended RGP status. Use the GetExpiredDomains command to check a name’s status.
RGP redemptions are performed at the Registry and generally take at least 3 hours to complete. When you run
this command, we recommend that you store the Order ID so that you can check progress conveniently using the
GetOrderDetail command.
This command will result in both a redemption and a renewal charge for the domain name. We recommend that
you check the RGP redemption price before running this command, as it can be quite high.
Availability
Constraints
• This command is available only to ETP reseller accounts.
• This command does not support our credit card processing; it deducts from the reseller balance.
• This command applies only to names in RGP status, not Extended RGP or domains in Expired status. To
determine the status of a name, use the GetExpiredDomains command.
Input parameters

size
SLD Required Second-level domain name (for example, 63
register in register.com) of name in RGP status
TLD Required Top-level domain name (extension) of name in 15
RGP status
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 120

Extension Success status of the query
DomainName Name of the domain to be redeemed
OrderID Order ID number. Store this number to simplify progress checks.
values.
client.
Notes
• We recommend that you check the redemption price for RGP names before running this command, as the
price can be quite high. Use the PE_GetResellerPrice command, and look at product types 16 (renew) and
17 (RGP).
Example
The following query redeems and renews a domain name that is in RGP status, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=Extend_RGP&uid=rcompart-
nerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&
sld=VeryExpiredName&tld=com&ResponseType=xml
In the response, the Extension value Successful value confirms that the query was successful:
<Extension>successful</Extension>
<DomainName>VeryExpiredName.com</DomainName>
<Command>EXTEND_RGP</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
3/13/09 121
</debug>
Related commands
AddToCart
Extend
ExtendDomainDNS
GetExpiredDomains
GetOrderDetail
GetRenew
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_SetPricing
Purchase
PurchaseServices
SetRenew
3/13/09 122
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ExtendDomainDNS
ExtendDomainDNS
Description
Definition
In real time, renew DNS hosting services for a domain name that is registered elsewhere.
Usage
Use this command to renew DNS services for a name that is registered elsewhere. This is a real-time command
that is most commonly used by resellers who maintain their own databases. Resellers who use a shopping cart
and our order queue generally use the AddToCart command with input parameter ProductType=HostRenew.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must not be registered with us, but must use our name servers.
Input parameters

size
NumYears Optional Number of years to add to the DNS 2
hosting subscription. Default value is
1. Maximum total is 10.
RegistrantFirstName Required if using Registrant first name 60
our credit card
processing
RegistrantLastName Required if using Registrant last name 60
our credit card
processing
RegistrantAddress1 Required if using Registrant address 60
our credit card
processing
3/13/09 123

size
RegistrantCity Required if using Registrant city 60
our credit card
processing
RegistrantEmailAddress Required if using Registrant email address 128
our credit card
processing
RegistrantPhone Optional Registrant phone. Required format is 20
only numeric characters
format is
RegistrantPostalCode Required if using Registrant postal code 16
our credit card
processing
S state
P province
ChargeAmount Optional Amount to charge to the credit card 6
UseCreditCard Optional If UseCreditCard=yes, use our 3
credit-card processing services
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
CardType Required if Type of credit card. Permitted values 20
UseCreditCard are Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, and
=yes Discover
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
CreditCardExpMonth Required if Credit card expiration month, in MM 2
UseCreditCard format
=yes
CreditCardExpYear Required if Credit card expiration year, in YYYY 4
UseCreditCard format
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
3/13/09 124

size
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes

RegistrarHold Registrar hold setting for this domain name
CCTransResult Success status for the credit card transaction
OrderID Order ID, assigned by us
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query renews DNS hosting for domain resellerdnshost.com, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=EXTENDDOMAINDNS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=resellerdnshost&tld=com&numyears=1&
RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Doe&RegistrantAddress1=17462&
RegistrantCity=Redmond&RegistrantPostalCode=98052&RegistrantCountry=USA&
RegistrantPhone=+1.4255559999&[email protected]&
UseCreditCard=yes&CardType=mastercard&CCName=John+Doe&
CreditCardNumber=5555555555555555&CreditCardExpMonth=05&CreditCardExpYear=2005&
cVV2=555&ccAddress=17462&ChargeAmount=12&responsetype=xml
In the response, the order ID and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
3/13/09 125
<CCTRANSRESULT>APPROVED</CCTRANSRESULT>
<Command>EXTENDDOMAINDNS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddToCart
DeleteHostedDomain
Extend
InsertNewOrder
Purchase
PurchaseHosting
PurchasePOPBundle
PurchaseServices
3/13/09 126
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Forwarding
Forwarding
Description
Definition
Set email forwarding addresses.
Usage
Use this command to specify forwarding addresses for email sent to the domain.
A similar command, SetPOPForwarding, allows you to create, change, or delete mailboxes for either email
forwarding or POP mail.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must be using Register.com’s domain name server.
• The domain must exist in the account cited in the query.
• The query must include all addresses that you want to keep. Forwarding addresses not included in the
query are deleted from the account.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
AddressX Required Address (mailbox user name) to be forwarded from this 30
domain
ForwardToX Required Where this address will be forwarded to, in format 130
[email protected]
XML.
3/13/09 127

values.
client.
Notes
• Example: [email protected] to be forwarded to [email protected]. Pass as
Address1=thisAddress and [email protected]
Example
The following query gives instructions that email addressed to [email protected] and
[email protected] be forwarded to [email protected] and
[email protected], and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=Forwarding&
Address1=jane.doe&[email protected]&
Address2=john.doe&[email protected]&ResponseType=XML
The error count 0 confirms that the email forwarding instructions are successful:
<MailCount>2</MailCount>
<Command>FORWARDING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 128
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetCatchAll
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 129
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAccountInfo
GetAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Get account ID, password, authorization question and answer, reseller flag, and credit card agreement settings.
Usage
Use this command to return a short list of account identification information and reseller status.
GetAllAccountInfo, a similar command, returns a complete list of account information.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

UserID Current login ID
Password Current account password
AuthQuestionType Current authorization question
AuthQuestionAnswer Current answer to the authorization question
Account Account number
Reseller Is this a reseller account or not
AcceptTerms Returns True if the credit card agreement has been signed, False otherwise
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 130

the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a limited list of account information for account rcompartnerid, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetAccountInfo&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ResponseType=XML
<GetAccountInfo>
<UserID>rcompartnerid</UserID>
<Password>rcompartnerpw</Password>
<AuthQuestionType>smaiden</AuthQuestionType>
<AuthQuestionAnswer>Jones</AuthQuestionAnswer>
<Account>217-no-0647</Account>
<AcceptTerms>True</AcceptTerms>
</GetAccountInfo>
<Command>GETACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 131
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 132
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAccountPassword
GetAccountPassword
Description
Definition
Get the password for an account.
Usage
Use this command to have the password for an account e-mailed to the contact for that account.
Availability
Constraints
• The AuthQuestionAnswer value must be correct.
Input parameters

size
LoginID Required Login ID for the account for which you want the 20
password.
AuthQuestionAnswer Required Answer to the authorization question 50
HTML, or XML.

GotAccountInfo Account information has been located in the registrar’s database.
ErrCount) values.
client.
3/13/09 133
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAccountPassword
Notes
Example
The following query requests the password for subaccount giambi, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetAccountPassword&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&LoginID=giambi&AuthQuestionAnswer=Jones&response-
type=xml
In the response, the true value for GotAccountInfo and the 0 value for ErrCount indicate that the query was
successful. The password is sent to the registrant e-mail address almost instantly.
<GetSubAcctLogin>
<GotAccountInfo>true</GotAccountInfo>
</GetSubAcctLogin>
<Command>GETACCOUNTPASSWORD</Command>
<Server>Dev Workstation</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
SendAccountEmail
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 134
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAccountValidation
Description
Definition
Retrieve the authorization question and answer for a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the authorization question and answer for a subaccount. Typically, you would use
this command to validate the identity of a user before using the GetAccountPassword command to email their
password to them.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
UID Required Login ID of the parent account 20
PW Required Password of the parent account 20
LoginID Required Login ID of the subaccount 20
XML.

AuthQuestionType The authorization question for the subaccount
AuthQuestionAnswer The answer to the authorization question for the subaccount
LoginID The login ID of the subaccount
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 135
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAccountValidation

the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the authorization question and answer for subaccount giambi and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getaccountvalidation&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&loginid=giambi&responsetype=xml
In the response, values for AuthQuestionType and AuthQuestionAnswer indicate that the query was
successful:
<GetAcctValidation>
<AuthQuestionType>Mother's Maiden Name</AuthQuestionType>
<AuthQuestionAnswer>Smith</AuthQuestionAnswer>
<LoginID>giambi</LoginID>
</GetAcctValidation>
<Command>GETACCOUNTVALIDATION</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetAccountPassword
GetSubAccounts
SendAccountEmail
3/13/09 136
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAddressBook
GetAddressBook
Description
Definition
Retrieve all contact information that has been entered for all domains in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve all contact information that has been entered for domains in this account.
This command retrieves only information associated with names in this account. It does not retrieve information
from subaccounts.
A typical use for this command is for accounts that offer real-time purchases, where the account contains domain
names registered by many customers.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
PageSize Optional; Number of contacts to return in this response 4
default is 100
Page Optional; Which page of responses to return. For example, if 3
default is 1 PageSize=100&Page=2 generates the second “page” of
100 contacts: contacts 101 through 200.
XML.

Address Rec Record number for this contact, assigned dynamically when this query runs
PartyID Party ID for this contact, a permanent value
3/13/09 137

OrganizationName Organization name
JobTitle Job title
FirstName First name
LastName Last name
Address1 Street address, first line
Address2 Street address, second line
City City
StateProvince State or province
StateProvinceChoice S indicates the StateProvince value is a state; P indicates province
PostalCode Postal code
Country Country
Phone Phone number
PhoneExt Phone extension
Fax Fax number
Email Email address
Count Number of contacts returned in this response (may be fewer than the
PageSize value)
TotalPages Total number of “pages” of contacts that exist for this account, given the
PageSize value submitted in this query.
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
• The first contact in the response will always be the Billing contact for the account. This is true regardless of
the Page and PageSize values submitted in the query.
• Other than the first contact in the response, contacts are listed in the order they are retrieved from our
database. No sort parameters are offered for this command.
Example
The following query retrieves the first 100 contacts recorded for account rcompartnerid and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GETADDRESSBOOK&
In the response, address records, a Count value, and a TotalPages value confirm that the query was
successful:
<AddressBook>
3/13/09 138
<Address rec="0">
<PartyId>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</PartyId>
<OrganizationName>Partner Domains Inc.</OrganizationName>
<JobTitle>President</JobTitle>
<FirstName>John</FirstName>
<LastName>Doe</LastName>
<Address1>111 Main St.</Address1>
<Address2 />
<City>Hometown</City>
<StateProvince>NY</StateProvince>
<StateProvinceChoice>S</StateProvinceChoice>
<PostalCode>99999</PostalCode>
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<PhoneExt />
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
<Email>[email protected]</Email>
</Address>
<Address rec="2">
<PartyId>{AD45BE6C-B3FA-4F7D-ADC1-A1D5B97EAB4B}</PartyId>
<OrganizationName>eMachines, Inc.</OrganizationName>
<JobTitle />
<FirstName>Administration,</FirstName>
<LastName>Domains</LastName>
<Address1>14350 Myford Rd. Bldg. #100</Address1>
<Address2 />
<City>Irvine</City>
<StateProvince>CA</StateProvince>
<Phone>(714) 481-2828</Phone>
<PhoneExt />
<Fax />
<Email>[email protected]</Email>
</Address>
.
.
.
<Count>100</Count>
<TotalPages>3</TotalPages>
</AddressBook>
<Command>GETADDRESSBOOK</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 139
Related commands
AddContact
Contacts
DeleteContact
GetContacts
GetExtAttributes
GetResellerInfo
GetServiceContact
GetWhoisContact
Preconfigure
3/13/09 140
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAllAccountInfo
GetAllAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Combines GetAccountInfo, GetCustomerPaymentInfo, and GetCustomerPreferences.
Usage
Use this command to access all information for an account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

OrganizationName Name of organization
JobTitle Job title
FName First Name
LName Last Name
Address1 Address line 1
Address2 Address line 2
City City
StateProvince State or province
StateProvinceChoice State or province choice
3/13/09 141

Country Country
Phone Telephone number
Fax Fax number
EmailAddress Email address for Whois
EmailAddress_Contact Email address for us to contact you about your domain name account
UserID Current account ID
Password Current account password
AuthQuestionType Current type of question setting
AuthQuestionAnswer Current question answer
Account Account number
Reseller Is this a reseller account or not
CardType Type of credit card
CCName Cardholder's name
CreditCardNumber Customer's credit card number
CreditCardExpMonth Credit card expiration month
CreditCardExpYear Credit card expiration year
CCAddress Credit card billing address
CCZip Credit card billing postal code
CCCountry Credit card billing country
DefPeriod Default number of years to register a name
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests all account information for account rcompartnerid, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetAllAccountInfo&
<Fname>John</Fname>
<Lname>Doe</Lname>
3/13/09 142
<Address2 />
<Phone>5555555555</Phone>
<Fax>5555555556</Fax>
<EmailAddress>[email protected] </EmailAddress>
<URL />
<GetAccountInfo>
</GetAccountInfo>
<GetCustomerPaymentInfo>
<CCName />
<CCNumber />
<CCType />
<CCMonth />
<CCYear />
</GetCustomerPaymentInfo>
<GetCustomerPreferences>
<DefPeriod />
</GetCustomerPreferences>
<Command>GETALLACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetResellerInfo
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
RPT_GetReport
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 143
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetAllDomains
GetAllDomains
Description
Definition
Get all domain names in an account.
Usage
Use this command to list all the domain names in an account, with their domain name IDs and expiration dates.
We recommend that you use this command only for accounts with fewer than 200 names, because longer lists
can time out. For large accounts, use GetDomains.
Availability
Constraints
• We recommend that you use this command only for accounts with fewer than 200 names, because
longer lists can time out. For large accounts, use GetDomains.
Input parameters

size
UseDNS Optional Returns a list of domains that use custom (user-specified) 10
name servers. Permitted value is custom.
GetDefaultOnly Optional Returns default name servers. Value is 1. 1
Letter Optional Returns domains with the specified first character. 1
Permitted values are 0 through 9 and A through Z.
RegistrarLock Optional Returns domains with the specified Registrar Lock status. 10
Permitted values are Locked and Not Locked.
AutoRenew Optional Returns domains with the specified Auto Renew status. 3
Permitted values are Yes and No.
Name Optional Returns domains with the specified name, on record for the 40
contact type specified in ContactType. Permitted values
are space-separated first and last names, for example,
Name=John Doe.
3/13/09 144

size
ContactType Optional Returns domains with the specified name, on record for the 14
contact type specified in ContactType. Permitted values
are Registrant, Aux Billing, Technical, or
Administrative.
NameServer Optional Returns domains that use the specified name server. Use 135
format dns1.nameserver.com.
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are XML (recommended), 4
HTML, or Text (default).

DomainName Name of the domain described in this node
DomainNameID Database ID of this domain
Expiration-Date Expiration date of this domain
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests all domains in account rcompartnerid, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetAllDomains
&uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ResponseType=XML
The response lists all domain names in the account, with the ID number and expiration date for each domain:
<GetAllDomains>
<DomainDetail>
<expiration-date>6/23/2005 6:44:19 PM</expiration-date>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>partnerdomain2.net</DomainName>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
3/13/09 145
<DomainName>partnerdomain3.info</DomainName>
</DomainDetail>
.
.
.
<UserRequestStatus>DomainBox</UserRequestStatus>
</GetAllDomains>
<Command>GETALLDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetHomeDomainList
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 146
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetBalance
GetBalance
Description
Definition
Get account balances.
Usage
Use this command to return the current balance on an account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

Reseller Returns 1 if this is a reseller account, 0 otherwise
Balance Current account balance
AvailableBalance Current available balance
Price Default price for names
COMPrice Price for .com
NETPrice Price for .net
ORGPrice Price for .org
CCPrice Price for .cc
TVPrice Price for .tv
3/13/09 147
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetBalance

DomainCount Current count of domains in the account
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
• This command only returns the price for original purchase of domains, not tranfers or renewals. For a
complete list of prices, use PE_GETPRICING.
Example
The following query requests the account balance for account rcompartnerid, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetBalance&
The response lists the balance and the available balance:
<Reseller>1</Reseller>
<Balance>3,709.20</Balance>
<AvailableBalance>3,669.40</AvailableBalance>
<DomainCount>74</DomainCount>
<Command>GETBALANCE</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CommissionAccount
3/13/09 148
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCartContent
GetCartContent
Description
Definition
Get the contents of the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command to display the contents of the shopping cart.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

ItemID Item number
Description Nature of the transaction. Options are Register, Renew
Years Number of years to register
NameID Name ID
Name Domain name
StatusID Current status of the name. Value A indicates item is active and will be affected by
future transactions, or I for inactive
ItemPrice Item price
Renew Auto-renew setting. Value 1 indicates this item is set to auto-renew, 0 indicates
this item is not set to auto-renew
3/13/09 149

NeedsConfig A NeedsConfig value of 1 indicates that the Preconfigure icon should be displayed
for this cart item. This happens when the cart item is a domain name that requires
preconfiguration, and the preconfiguration has not yet been done.
IsMailPak An IsMailPak value of 1 indicates that the POP Email icon should be displayed for
this cart item. This happens when the cart item is a domain name for which POP
mail is available, and the user has not added the POP Email to the shopping cart.
ShowWPPSLink A ShowWPPSLink value of 1 indicates that the Whois Privacy Protection Service
(WPPS, RCOM Shield) icon should be displayed for this cart item. This happens
when the cart item is a domain name for which WPPS is available, and the user has
not added WPPS to the shopping cart.
QtyDesc Unit by which this item is sold
SubItem A SubItem value of 0 indicates that this item is a single line item in the shopping
cart
FreeTrial A FreeTrial value of 0 indicates that the user begins paying for this item as soon
as it is purchased
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
• The parameter StatusID returns A for active and will be affected by future transactions, or I for inactive.
Example
The following query requests the contents of the shopping cart for account rcompartnerid, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetCartContent&
The response indicates that the shopping cart currently contains a domain to register (partnerdomain.us):
<GetCartContent>
<item>
<ItemID>393955</ItemID>
<Description>Register</Description>
<Years>1</Years>
<NameID>152556457</NameID>
<Name>partnerdomain.us</Name>
<StatusID>I</StatusID>
<ItemPrice>10.00</ItemPrice>
<Renew>0</Renew>
<cd>
3/13/09 150
<NeedsConfig>1</NeedsConfig>
<IsMailPak>0</IsMailPak>
<ShowWPPSLink>1</ShowWPPSLink>
<p>
<QtyDesc>Year(s)</QtyDesc>
<SubItem>0</SubItem>
<FreeTrial>0</FreeTrial>
</p>
</cd>
</item>
</GetCartContent>
<Command>GETCARTCONTENT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug><![CDATA [ ] ]></debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
AddToCart
DeleteFromCart
InsertNewOrder
PurchasePreview
UpdateCart
3/13/09 151
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCatchAll
GetCatchAll
Description
Definition
Get the forwarding address for emails addressed to nonexistent mailboxes.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the forwarding address for nonexistent email addresses under a domain name. The
domain name must be in our system, but the forwarding address does not need to be.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

CatchAll Email address that mail will be sent to if the addressee mailbox does not exist
values.
3/13/09 152
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCatchAll

client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the Catch-All email address for this domain name, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetCatchAll&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of the Catch-All email address confirms that the query was successful:
<CatchAll>[email protected]</CatchAll>
<Command>GETCATCHALL</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeletePOP3
Forwarding
GetForwarding
GetPOP3
GetPOPForwarding
SetCatchAll
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 153
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCerts
GetCerts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the SSL certificates that we offer.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the types of SSL certificates that we offer.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

Reseller Is this a reseller account?
ProdCode Product text ID
ProdType Product number ID
ProdDesc Product description
QtyDesc Units in which this product is sold
RetailPrice Retail selling price charged to customers
ResellerPrice Wholesale price this account pays
Enabled Is this product enabled for selling?
Years Quantities available. For example, Years=3 indicates that a customer can buy a 3-
year registration of this product.
3/13/09 154

CertCount Number of SSL certificate products listed in this return
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of the SSL certificate products we offer, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetCerts&
In the response, a list of certificates and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<GetCerts>
<Certs>
<Cert1>
<ProdCode>certificate-rapidssl-rapidssl</ProdCode>
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - RapidSSL</ProdDesc>
<RetailPrice>$78.00</RetailPrice>
<ResellerPrice>$9.95</ResellerPrice>
<Enabled>True</Enabled>
<Years>1</Years>
<Years>2</Years>
<Years>3</Years>
<Years>4</Years>
<Years>5</Years>
</Cert1>
<Cert2>
<ProdCode>certificate-geotrust-quickssl</ProdCode>
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL</ProdDesc>
<RetailPrice>$500.00</RetailPrice>
<ResellerPrice>$69.00</ResellerPrice>
<Enabled>True</Enabled>
<Years>1</Years>
<Years>2</Years>
<Years>3</Years>
<Years>4</Years>
3/13/09 155
<Years>5</Years>
</Cert2>
.
.
.
</Certs>
<CertCount>10</CertCount>
</GetCerts>
<Command>GETCERTS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CertConfigureCert
CertGetCertDetail
CertGetCerts
CertModifyOrder
CertParseCSR
CertPurchaseCert
3/13/09 156
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetConfirmationSettings
Description
Definition
Retrieve the settings for email confirmations of orders.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the current settings for email confirmations of orders (confirmations sent to you
when a customer places an order).
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

OrderConfirmation The setting for sending copies of order confirmation emails to
you, when orders are placed on this account
TransferOrderConfirmation The setting for sending copies of transfer request emails to you,
when orders are placed on this account
OrderConfirmationBCC The setting for sending copies of order confirmation emails to
you, when orders are placed on a subaccount of this account
TransferOrderConfirmationBCC The setting for sending copies of transfer request emails to you,
when orders are placed on a subaccount of this account
EmailHead If set for custom email text, the header string that will be used
EmailTail If set for custom email text, the tail string that will be used
3/13/09 157

Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the settings for order confirmation emails, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetConfirmationSettings&
In the response, return values in the ConfirmationSettings node confirms that the query was successful:
<ConfirmationSettings>
<OrderConfirmation>True</OrderConfirmation>
<TransferOrderConfirmation>True</TransferOrderConfirmation>
<OrderConfirmationBCC>True</OrderConfirmationBCC>
<TransferOrderConfirmationBCC>True</TransferOrderConfirmationBCC>
<EmailHead>Thank you for your recent order.</EmailHead>
<EmailTail>Thanks again for using our online services.</EmailTail>
</ConfirmationSettings>
<Command>GETCONFIRMATIONSETTINGS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<ExecTime>8.203125E-02</ExecTime>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 158
Related commands
GetAccountInfo
GetCusPreferences
GetTLDList
PE_GetRetailPricing
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 159
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetContacts
GetContacts
Description
Definition
Get all contact data for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to display contact information for this account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

DomainName Domain name
SLD Second-level domain name (for example, register in register.com)
TLD Top-level domain name (extension)
DomainNameID Identification number for this domain name, in our system
3/13/09 160

Registrant None indicates no separate Registrant information has been
entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Registrant information
is returned
AuxBilling None indicates no separate Auxiliary Billing information has been
entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Auxiliary Billing contact
information is returned
Tech None indicates no separate Technical contact information has
been entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Technical contact
Admin None indicates no separate Admin contact information has been
entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Admin contact
Billing Billing information is returned for most TLDs, with some
exceptions like .eu
ContactTypePartyID Party ID
ContactTypeAddress1 Address 1
ContactTypeAddress2 Address 2
ContactTypeCity City
ContactTypeCountry Country
ContactTypeEmailAddress Email Address
ContactTypeFax Fax
ContactTypeFirstName First Name
ContactTypeLastName Last Name
ContactTypeJobTitle Job Title
ContactTypeOrganizationName Organization Name
ContactTypePhone Phone number
ContactTypePhoneExt Phone extension
ContactTypePostalCode Postal Code
ContactTypeStateProvince State or Province
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice State or Province? S indicates State; P indicates Province
UseBelowAuxInfo True indicates that AuxBilling appears on the Contacts page as an
optional alternative for this ContactType
AuxID PartyID for Auxiliary Billing contact
RegID PartyID for Registrant contact
ExtendedAttributes Registry-specific data for some country-code TLDs. For each TLD,
you can retrieve the expected extended attributes by running this
command or the GetExtAttributes command.
WPPSAllowed Is RCOM Shield permitted for this TLD?
WPPSExists Is there a current RCOM Shield subscription for this domain
name?
WPPSEnabled Is the RCOM Shield subscription currently being used to protect
this domain name?
WPPSExpDate Expiration date for RCOM Shield subscription
WPPSAutoRenew Auto renew setting for RCOM Shield subscription
EscrowLiftDate If this domain name is currently in escrow, the lift date
EscrowHold Is this domain name currently in escrow?
ContactRestrictedTLD Does this TLD have restrictions on the freedom to update contact
information without a trade (transfer)?
3/13/09 161

Notes
• If there are additional contact entries, Billing in the above return parameter names is replaced with
REGISTRANT, AUXBILLING, TECH, or ADMIN.
Example
The following query requests the contact information for partnerdomain.com, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getcontacts&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&responsetype=xml
The response gives contact information for the registrant party and billing party, and states that no different
information was provided for the auxiliary billing, technical, and administrative contacts. Where no different
information is provided, these contacts default to the billing party information:
<GetContacts>
<domainname
sld="partnerdomain" tld="com" domainnameid="152533676">partnerdomain.com
</domainname>
<Registrant>
<RegistrantPartyID>{F6A676E4-5BB7-453C-87A6-9BBB164318F5}
</RegistrantPartyID>
<RegistrantAddress1>100 Main St.</RegistrantAddress1>
<RegistrantAddress2 />
<RegistrantCity>Townsville</RegistrantCity>
<RegistrantCountry>US</RegistrantCountry>
<RegistrantEmailAddress>[email protected]</RegistrantEmailAddress>
<RegistrantFax />
<RegistrantFirstName>John</RegistrantFirstName>
<RegistrantJobTitle />
<RegistrantLastName>Smith</RegistrantLastName>
<RegistrantOrganizationName />
<RegistrantPhone>5555555555</RegistrantPhone>
<RegistrantPostalCode />
<RegistrantStateProvince />
<RegistrantStateProvinceChoice />
</Registrant>
<AuxBilling>None</AuxBilling>
<Tech>None</Tech>
<Admin>None</Admin>
<Billing>
3/13/09 162
<BillingPartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</BillingPartyID>
<BillingAddress1>111 Main Street</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingCity>Hometown</BillingCity>
<BillingCountry>US</BillingCountry>
<BillingEmailAddress>[email protected]</BillingEmailAddress>
<BillingFax>555-555-5556</BillingFax>
<BillingFirstName>John</BillingFirstName>
<BillingJobTitle>President</BillingJobTitle>
<BillingLastName>Doe</BillingLastName>
<BillingOrganizationName>Partner Domains Inc.</BillingOrganizationName>
<BillingPhone>555-555-5555</BillingPhone>
<BillingPostalCode>99999</BillingPostalCode>
<BillingStateProvince>NY</BillingStateProvince>
<BillingStateProvinceChoice>S</BillingStateProvinceChoice>
<BillingFullCountry>United States</BillingFullCountry>
<UseBelowAuxInfo>True</UseBelowAuxInfo>
<auxID />
<regID>{F6A676E4-5BB7-453C-87A6-9BBB164318F5}</regID>
</Billing>
</GetContacts>
<Command>GETCONTACTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddContact
Contacts
DeleteContact
GetAddressBook
GetExtAttributes
GetResellerInfo
GetServiceContact
GetWhoisContact
Preconfigure
3/13/09 163
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCusPreferences
GetCusPreferences
Description
Definition
Retrieve global preferences for an account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve global preferences for an account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ResellerKey Optional Reseller EC key for this site, if different from this UID 40
ResellerStatus Optional ResellerStatus=1 retrieves information about reseller 1
balances
XML.

DefPeriod Default period for registrations, renewals, and transfers, in years
AllowDNS True allows name servers other than Register.com’s
ShowPopUps True shows pop-up menus
AutoRenew True automatically renews the domain 30 days before it expires
RegLock True requires the account holder’s permission to transfer the domain to
another registrar
AutoPakRenew True automatically renews POP paks 30 days before they expire.
3/13/09 164

UseDNS True uses Register.com’s name servers
ResellerStatus Is this a reseller account?
RenewalSetting 0 indicates no email; 1 indicates send notice; 2 indicates contact and
charge customer
RenewalBCC 1 indicates send copy of email to reseller; 0 indicates no copy to reseller
RenewalURLForward True automatically renews URL forwarding 30 days before the URL
forwarding subscription expires.
RenewalEMailForward True automatically renews email forwarding 30 days before the email
forwarding subscription expires.
HostName Name of this default host record
Address Address of this default host record
RecordType Record type of this default host record
DefaultHostRecordOwn Is this account using its own set of default host records?
UseOurDNS Does this account use Register.com’s DNS servers by default?
DNSX Default DNS server X for this domain name account
AcceptTerms True indicates this account has signed a credit-card processing agreement
with us
URL URL for reseller site listed in email notices
ParentAccount This account’s parent
NoService Service status
BulkRegLimit Maximum number of names this account can register in a single query
Balance Current balance for this reseller account
BalanceThreshold Balance threshold for this reseller account
Price Wholesale price this account pays for .com
CCPrice Wholesale price this account pays for .cc
AvailableBalance Avaliable balance for this account
ResCustomerPrice
CommissionBalance Current commission balance for this account
NotifyAmount Send a notification email to the Billing contact for this account when
available balance drops below this amount
ErrCount) values.
to the client.
Notes
3/13/09 165
Example
The following query retrieves the account settings for rcompartnerid and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetCusPreferences&
<CustomerPrefs>
<DefPeriod>4</DefPeriod>
<AllowDNS>False</AllowDNS>
<ShowPopups>False</ShowPopups>
<AutoRenew>False</AutoRenew>
<RegLock>False</RegLock>
<AutoPakRenew>False</AutoPakRenew>
<UseDNS>True</UseDNS>
<ResellerStatus />
<RenewalSetting>0</RenewalSetting>
<RenewalBCC>0</RenewalBCC>
<RenewalURLForward>False</RenewalURLForward>
<RenewalEmailForward>False</RenewalEmailForward>
</CustomerPrefs>
<CustomerInformation>
<URL />
</CustomerInformation>
<Command>GETCUSPREFERENCES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsRealTimeTLD>0</IsRealTimeTLD>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
3/13/09 166
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCustomerDefinedData
Description
Definition
Retrieve customer-defined data.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve custom data.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ObjectID Required Object ID number, an integer assigned when this 2
customer-defined field was first established.
Type Required Object type. Options are: 1
Type=2
OrderID Required if Order ID, which you can retrieve using GetDomainStatus 11
Type=3
XML.
3/13/09 167

Value Content of this entry
DisplayFlag Visibility to subaccount. Options are:
0 This entry not visible when logged on using subaccount ID
1 This entry is visible when logged on using subaccount ID
EnteredBy Name of the person adding this entry
LastUpdatedDate Last date on which this entry was changed
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the value for the customer-defined data titled FavoriteCuisine for account
rcompartnerid, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getcustomerdefineddata&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ObjectID=1&Type=1&Key=FavoriteCuisine&
responsetype=xml
<CustomerData>
<Value>Italian</Value>
<DisplayFlag>True</DisplayFlag>
<EnteredBy>John</EnteredBy>
<LastUpdatedDate>7/7/2003 5:46:10 PM</LastUpdatedDate>
</CustomerData>
<Command>GETCUSTOMERDEFINEDDATA</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 168
Related commands
3/13/09 169
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetCustomerPaymentInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve customer payment information.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve customer payment information.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

CCName Credit card holder’s name
CCNumber Credit card number
CCType Credit card type
CCMonth Credit card expiration month
CCYear Credit card expiration year
CCAddress Credit card billing address street address
CCZip Credit card billing address postal code
CCCity Credit card billing address city
CCStateProvince Credit card billing address province
CCCountry Credit card billing address country
3/13/09 170

CCPhoneDial Telephone country code
CCPhone Telephone number with area code
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the payment information on record for an account, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetCustomerPaymentInfo&
<CCName>John Doe</CCName>
<CCNumber>************5215</CCNumber>
<CCType>MASTERCARD</CCType>
<CCMonth>11</CCMonth>
<CCYear>2005</CCYear>
<CCAddress>17462</CCAddress>
<CCZip>98052</CCZip>
<CCCity>Hometown</CCCity>
<CCStateProvince>NY</CCStateProvince>
<CCCountry>US</CCCountry>
<CCPhoneDial>1</CCPhoneDial>
<CCPhone>5555559999</CCPhone>
<Command>GETCUSTOMERPAYMENTINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
3/13/09 171
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAllAccountInfo
GetSubAccounts
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 172
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDNS
GetDNS
Description
Definition
Get the nameserver settings for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to display name servers.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

NSCount Number of DNS entries
DNSX Name server X. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
UseDNS Which name servers a domain is using. Default indicates our name servers
NSStatus Returns yes if using registrar's name servers.
3/13/09 173
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDNS

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the domain name servers for partnerdomain.com, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDNS&
<dns>dns01.gpn.register.com</dns>
<UseDNS>ours</UseDNS>
<NSStatus>Yes</NSStatus>
<RRPCode />
<RRPText />
<Command>GETDNS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 174
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDNSStatus
GetDNSStatus
Description
Definition
Get the nameserver status for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine what DNS this domain uses. The query returns values only if the domain uses
Register.com servers.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

UseDNS Which name servers a domain is using. Default indicates our name servers.
HostsNumLimit Maximum number of host records permitted for this domain, of types A, CNAME,
URL, and FRAME
3/13/09 175
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDNSStatus

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the DNS status of partnerdomain.com -- that is, whether the domain uses its
registrar’s servers. The query also requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDNSStatus&
The NS status Yes indicates that the domain uses the registrar’s name servers:
<UseDNS>ours</UseDNS>
<HostsNumLimit>15</HostsNumLimit>
<Command>GETDNSSTATUS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 176
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainCount
GetDomainCount
Description
Definition
Get the count for registered, hosted, processing, watch list, cart item and expired domains.
Usage
Use this command to return the number of domains in each category.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

RegisteredCount Number of registered domain names.
HostCount Number of hosted domain names.
ExpiredDomainsCount Number of expired domain names.
ProcessCount Number of domain names that are still processing.
KeywordCount Number of keywords (obsolete feature).
WatchlistCount Number of domain names in the watchlist.
CartItemCount Number of items in the shopping cart.
ExpiringCount Number of expiring domain names.
3/13/09 177

ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a tally of domains in account rcompartnerid, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomainCount&
The response indicates that the account has 72 registered and 2 hosted domains:
<RegisteredCount>72</RegisteredCount>
<HostCount>2</HostCount>
<ExpiredDomainsCount>0</ExpiredDomainsCount>
<ProcessCount>0</ProcessCount>
<KeywordCount>0</KeywordCount>
<WatchlistCount>0</WatchlistCount>
<CartItemCount>2</CartItemCount>
<ExpiringCount>0</ExpiringCount>
<Command>GETDOMAINCOUNT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 178
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 179
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainExp
GetDomainExp
Description
Definition
Get domain expiration date.
Usage
Use this command to display the expiration date for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

ExpirationDate Expiration date for the domain registration.
values.
3/13/09 180
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainExp

ent.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the expiration date for partnerdomain.com, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomainExp&
The response indicates that the expiration date for the domain is 6/25/2012:
<ExpirationDate>6/25/2012 4:20:24 PM</ExpirationDate>
<Command>GETDOMAINEXP</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Extend
Extend_RGP
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
InsertNewOrder
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 181
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainInfo
GetDomainInfo
Description
Definition
Get information about a single domain name.
Usage
Use this command to display current information about a single domain name. This command also retrieves the
DomainNameID value, which is required by some other commands in our API.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

RegistrarHold The enabled status of a domain. If RegistrarHold is True, the domain is
disabled.
DomainNameID ID number of this individual domain
3/13/09 182

Multy-LangSLD Is this a multi-language SLD?
Expiration Expiration date of this domain registration
Registrar Registrar of this domain
RegistrationStatus Registration status of this domain
Purchase-Status Purchase status of this domain
Party-ID Party ID of the account in which this domain is registered
Belongs-To Login ID of the account in which this domain is registered
Entry Name Name of the product or service described in this node
Changable Can this service be changed?
Service Setting for the service. Permitted values are:
DNSServer (which domain name servers):
1006 use our name servers
1012 use user-specified domain servers, including none
DNSSettings (host records):
1021 host records
EmailSet (Email services):
1048 no email
1051 email forwarding (to a POP or WebMail address)
1054 user (mail server name required)
1105 user simplified (mail server’s IP address required)
1114 POP3/WebMail plus email forwarding
WPPS (RCOM Shield Whois Privacy Protection):
1120 WhoIs information is masked
1123 WhoIs information is viewable
Service Changable Can this service be toggled on or off, or switched?
ConfigurationChangable Is this a configurable product or service?
Name Name of this host record
Type Type of product, service, or host record
Address Host record address
MXPref Priority value of this host record
ErrCount) values.
to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests domain information—status and services— for partnerdomain.com, and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomainInfo&
3/13/09 183

<GetDomainInfo>
<domainname
sld="partnerdomain" tld="com" domainnameid="152533676">partnerdomain.com
</domainname>
<multy-langSLD />
<status>
<expiration>6/10/2013 3:56:56 PM</expiration>
<registrar>Register.com, Inc.</registrar>
<registrationstatus>Registered</registrationstatus>
<purchase-status>Paid</purchase-status>
<belongs-to
party-id="{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}">rcompartnerid
</belongs-to>
</status>
<services>
<entry name="dnsserver">
<ourDNS value="YES" isDotName="NO" />
<service changable="1">1006</service>
<configuration changable="0" type="dns">
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="dnssettings">
<configuration changable="1" type="host">
<host>
'
<name>
<![CDATA[ @ ] ]>
</name>
<type>A</type>
<address>
<![CDATA[ 66.151.151.164 ] ]>
</address>
<mxpref>10</mxpref>
</host>
<host>
'
<name>
<![CDATA[ www ] ]>
</name>
<type>CNAME</type>
<address>
<![CDATA[ @ ] ]>
</address>
<mxpref>10</mxpref>
</host>
<host>
'
<name>
<![CDATA[ Hello ] ]>
</name>
3/13/09 184
<type>FRAME</type>
<address>
<![CDATA[ 127.0.0.1 ] ]>
</address>
<mxpref>10</mxpref>
</host>
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="wsb">
<configuration changable="1" type="wsb">
<wsb>rcomwebid</wsb>
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="emailset">
<configuration changable="1" type="pop">
<pop>
<username>
<![CDATA[ john.doe ] ]>
</username>
</pop>
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="wpps">
<configuration changable="1" type="wpps">
<wpps>
<cloakedemail>[email protected]</cloakedemail>
<forward-to>[email protected]</forward-to>
<expiredate>Nov 26, 2006</expiredate>
<autorenew>No</autorenew>
</wpps>
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="messaging">
</entry>
</services>
</GetDomainInfo>
<RRPCode />
<RRPText />
<Command>GETDOMAININFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 185
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomains
GetExpiredDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 186
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainNameID
GetDomainNameID
Description
Definition
Retrieves the ID number for a domain.
Usage
In some API commands, you can use the domain name ID instead of the SLD and TLD.
Our database associates a unique ID with each domain name, and all activity in the database is tracked by ID
rather than by domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

DomainRRP Processor identifier of the registrar which manages the domain
3/13/09 187
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainNameID

DomainNameID Identification number of this domain name
ErrCount) values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the domain name ID for partnerdomain.com, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getdomainnameid&
The successful response returns the domain name ID:
<TLD>com</TLD>
<Command>GETDOMAINNAMEID</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetDomainSLDTLD
3/13/09 188
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomains
GetDomains
Description
Definition
Get a single page of domain names with the ability to load the next or previous page of names.
Usage
Use this command to list a single page of domains in an account. GetDomains is our older command for large
accounts. GetAllDomains, a similar command, returns the complete list of domain names in an account but can
time out for accounts with more than 200 domain names. AdvancedDomainSearch is the most up-to-date
command for accounts of all sizes.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
Tab Optional; default is The type of domains to return. Permitted 10
IOwn values are:
IOwn current names in this account
Sub_IOwn names in retail subaccounts
WatchList names in this account’s watchlist
IHost DNS hosting names, this account
ExpiringNames names nearing expiration
ExpiredDomains expired but able to renew
RGP RGP and Extended RGP names
Promotion names on promotional basis
DaysToExpired Optional with Return names that expire within this number of 4
Tab=ExpiringNames days, whether they are set to auto-renew or
not
RegStatus Optional with The type of domains to return for a 10
Tab=Sub_IOwn; subaccount. Permitted values are Registered
default is Registered and Expired.
3/13/09 189

size
Display Optional; default is 25 Number of domains to return in one response. 4
Permitted values are 0 to 100.
Start Optional; default is 1 Return names that start with this number in 4
the sorted list. For example,
Display=25&Start=26 returns the 26th
through 50th names from a numero-
alphabetically sorted list.
OrderBy Optional The order to return the results. Permitted 15
values are SLD, TLD, DNS, and
ExpirationDate.
StartLetter Optional Return names that start with this letter 1
MultiLang Optional If MultiLang=On, display SLD in native 1
character set in UI.
Domain Optional Return names that match this name. Use 60
format SLD.TLD
ExtFormat Optional Returns XML tags without hyphens, to more 1
rigorously adhere to XML standards and allow
more trouble-free performance with automated
parsers. Use ExtFormat=1 to return tags
without hyphens.

DomainNameIDX Domain name ID. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
SLDX Second-level domain name (for example, register in register.com). Indexed X
when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
TLDX Top-level domain name (extension). Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
NS-StatusX Name server status. YES indicates this domain uses our name servers. Indexed
X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
Expiration-DateX Expiration date of the domain registration. Indexed X when Response-
Type=Text or HTML.
Auto-RenewX Auto-renew setting. Return values are Yes or No. Indexed X when Response-
Type=Text or HTML.
WPPSStatusX WhoIs privacy protection setting. Return values are Enabled or Disabled.
Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
RRProcessor RR processor. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
ErrCount) values.
client.
3/13/09 190
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of domains and basic information about them for account rcompartnerid,
and requests the response in XML format. This command returns 25 domains at a time. Because it does not
specify which domain to start with, the response by default starts with the first domain (sorting by domain name:
numbers first, then letters):
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomains&
The response lists the first 25 domains in account rcompartnerid, starting with partnerdomain.com and
partnerdomain3.info. It also provides some summary information about the total contents of the account:
<GetDomains>
<tab>iown</tab>
<domain-list type="Registered">
<domain>
<sld>partnerdomain</sld>
<tld>com</tld>
<Renew>Yes</Renew>
<expiration-date>6/25/2012</expiration-date>
</domain>
<domain>
<sld>partnerdomain3</sld>
<tld>info</tld>
<Renew>Yes</Renew>
</domain>
.
.
.
</domain-list>
<EndPosition>25</EndPosition>
<PreviousRecords>0</PreviousRecords>
<NextRecords>26</NextRecords>
<OrderBy />
<Result>True</Result>
<TotalDomainCount>72</TotalDomainCount>
<StartLetter />
</GetDomains>
<Command>GETDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
3/13/09 191
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetExpiredDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetHomeDomainList
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 192
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainServices
GetDomainServices
Description
Definition
Retrieve the settings for domain services and value-added services for a domain.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information about email forwarding, URL forwarding, and other domain and value-
add services for a domain.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

WebSite Web site setting
IPResolver Setting for resolving dynamic IP addresses
DomainNameID ID number for this domain, from our internal records
EMailForwarding Email forwarding setting for this domain
EmailForwardExpDate Expiration date for email forwarding
3/13/09 193

EMailAutoRenew Auto-renew setting for email forwarding
URLForwarding URL forwarding setting for this domain
URLForwardExpDate Expiration date for URL forwarding
URLAutoRenew Auto-renew setting for URL forwarding
EMailForwardingPrice Price for email forwarding
URLForwardingPrice Price for URL forwarding
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the domain and value-add service settings for partnerdomain.com and sends
the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomainServices&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&responsetype=xml&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com
<domainservices>
<website>0</website>
<phone>False</phone>
<ipresolver>0</ipresolver>
<map>False</map>
<domainnameid>152551776</domainnameid>
<valueadd>
<EmailForwarding>0</EmailForwarding>
<EmailForwardExpDate />
<EmailAutoRenew />
<URLForwarding>0</URLForwarding>
<URLForwardExpDate />
<URLAutoRenew />
<emailForwardingPrice>0.00</emailForwardingPrice>
<urlForwardingPrice>0.00</urlForwardingPrice>
</valueadd>
</domainservices>
<Command>GETDOMAINSERVICES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
3/13/09 194
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DisableServices
EnableServices
ServiceSelect
SetDomainSubServices
3/13/09 195
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainSLDTLD
GetDomainSLDTLD
Description
Definition
Retrieve the domain name (SLD and TLD).
Usage
Use this command when you have the domain name ID and want the domain name (SLD and TLD).
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
DomainNameID Required Domain name ID 11
or XML.

DomainRRP Registrar identifier
DomainNameID Domain name ID
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 196
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainSLDTLD

ent.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the SLD and TLD for domain name ID 152533676 and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getdomainsldtld&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&domainnameid=152533676&responsetype=xml
<TLD>com</TLD>
<Command>GETDOMAINSLDTLD</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetDomainInfo
GetDomainNameID
3/13/09 197
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainSRVHosts
GetDomainSRVHosts
Description
Definition
Retrieve SRV host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of all SRV records for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must use our DNS servers.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

HostID Identification number for this SRV record, assigned by us
HostName Use name you have assigned to this SRV record
Protocol Internet protocol you have assigned for this SRV record
Address Fully qualified domain name you have assigned for this SRV record
RecordType Host record type for this record—should always be SRV
3/13/09 198

MXPref MXPref value. Not used for SRV records
Weight Weight you have assigned to this SRV record (for load balancing)
Priority Priority you have assigned to this SRV record (for backup servers)
Port Port you have assigned to this SRV record
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves SRV records and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GETDOMAINSRVHOSTS&
<srv-records>
<srv>
<HostID>17217418</HostID>
<HostName>_imap</HostName>
<Protocol>_TCP</Protocol>
<Address>imap.partnerdomain.com.</Address>
<RecordType>SRV</RecordType>
<mxPref>0</mxPref>
<Weight>50</Weight>
<priority>10</priority>
<Port>1</Port>
</srv>
<srv>
<HostID>17217420</HostID>
<HostName>_xmpp</HostName>
<Protocol>_UDP</Protocol>
<Address>xmpp.partnerdomain.com.</Address>
<RecordType>SRV</RecordType>
<mxPref>0</mxPref>
<Weight>50</Weight>
<priority>10</priority>
<Port>98</Port>
</srv>
</srv-records>
<Command>GETDOMAINSRVHOSTS</Command>
3/13/09 199
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetDomainInfo
GetHosts
SetDomainSRVHosts
SetHosts
3/13/09 200
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainStatus
GetDomainStatus
Description
Definition
Check the registration status of TLDs that do not register in real time.
Usage
Use this command to check the status of domains that do not register in real time (including .ca, .co.uk, .org.uk,
and others). Because of the delay inherent in the non-real-time registrations, wait at least five minutes after your
transaction to run this command, and run it at intervals of five minutes or longer. This command runs more quickly
than a similar command, StatusDomain.
Use this command to retrieve the most recent order ID for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
OrderID Recommended Order ID of the most recent transaction for this domain 15
OrderType Optional; Type of order. Permitted values are Purchase (default), 10
default is Transfer, or Extend
Purchase
XML.
3/13/09 201

InAccount Status of the domain in our database:
0 not in our database
1 in our database and in the account cited in this query
2 in our database but in a different account than the one cited in this query
StatusDesc More detailed explanation of the InAccount value
ExpDate Expiration date of the domain registration
OrderID Order identification number of the most recent transaction for this domain
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the status of domain partnerdomain.co.uk and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GETDOMAINSTATUS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=co.uk&
orderID=156162742&ordertype=purchase&responsetype=xml
In the response, the InAccount value 0 and the StatusDesc value Awaiting Registry Response confirm
that the order is currently being processed at the co.uk Registry:
<DomainStatus>
<DomainName>partnerdomain.co.uk</DomainName>
<InAccount>0</InAccount>
<StatusDesc>Awaiting Registry Response</StatusDesc>
</DomainStatus>
<Command>GETDOMAINSTATUS</Command>
<Server>Test1</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable>False</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>False</IsRealTimeTLD>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 202
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 203
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainSubServices
GetDomainSubServices
Description
Definition
Get current settings for domain services (active or inactive).
Usage
Use this command to get which services are enabled to control whether to present the user the ability to get or
update information related to the service. (eg. Host or email forwarding records). For some services, you can get
more detailed information using the GetDomainServices command.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomainSubServices&
uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&sld=domain&tld=com

size
register.com)
XML.

disabled.
EmailForwarding True, False or empty
HostRecords True, False or empty
SetDomainServices Successful or Failed
3/13/09 204
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDomainSubServices

ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query sets the subservices of a domain and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetDomainSubServices&
The error count value of 0 confirms that hosts have been set successfully:
<DomainServices>
<EmailForwarding>True</EmailForwarding>
<HostRecords>True</HostRecords>
</DomainServices>
<Command>GETDOMAINSUBSERVICES</Command>
<Server>Dev</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
ServiceSelect
3/13/09 205
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDotNameForwarding
Description
Definition
Retrieve the current address for email forwarding by the .name Registry.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the email forwarding address used by the .name Registry for forwarding email
addressed to this domain.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must be a .name domain.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
TLD Required Top-level domain. For this command, value must be name. 15
XML.

DomainNameID Domain name ID, Register.com’s internal accounting number
TLD Top-level domain. For this command, value is name.
Status Status
3/13/09 206
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetDotNameForwarding

Address Email address to which email addressed to this domain is forwarded.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the email forwarding address for john.doe.name and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getdotnameforwarding&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=john.doe&tld=name&responsetype=xml
<dotnameforwarding>
<domainname domainnameid="157171163" sld="john.doe" tld="name" />
<status>1</status>
<address>[email protected]</address>
</dotnameforwarding>
<Command>GETDOTNAMEFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
GetPOP3
SetCatchAll
3/13/09 207
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetExpiredDomains
GetExpiredDomains
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of an account’s domains that are in expired, RGP, and Extended RGP status.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of expired, RGP, and Extended RGP names in the account specified in the
query string. Typically, a reseller will use this information to determine which command to use to reactivate a
domain, and what price they will charge.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

DomainNameID Domain name ID number, from our database
Status Expiration status of this domain
Expiration-Date Expiration date of this domain
LockStatus Registrar lock status of this domain
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 208

client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the expired domains in account rcompartnerid; identifies them as Expired, RGP,
or Extended RGP status; and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getexpireddomains&
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>northwestcrafts.com</DomainName>
<status>Extended RGP</status>
<lockstatus>Locked</lockstatus>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>fabrics-wallpaper.com</DomainName>
<status>RGP</status>
<expiration-date>3/1/2003 6:54:40 AM</expiration-date>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>onlinebrochure.com</DomainName>
<status>RGP</status>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>eweathervane.com</DomainName>
<status>Expired</status>
<expiration-date>3/8/2002 2:14:45 AM</expiration-date>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>signonworldwide.com</DomainName>
3/13/09 209
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>Youcanhelp.net</DomainName>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>ccpays.com</DomainName>
<status>Extended RGP</status>
</DomainDetail>
.
.
.
<domaincount>120</domaincount>
<Command>GETEXPIREDDOMAINS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddToCart
Extend_RGP
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
PE_SetPricing
Purchase
3/13/09 210
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetExtAttributes
GetExtAttributes
Description
Definition
This command retrieves the extended attributes for a country code TLD (required parameters specific to the
country code).
Usage
Use this command to determine whether a country code TLD requires extended attributes, and what they are.
Extended attributes supplied by this command are used in the Preconfigure command to configure some TLDs.
Input parameter names for the Preconfigure command are tagged <Name> in the return of this command, and
permitted values for the Preconfigure command are tagged <Value> in the return for this command.
Availability
Constraints
• The country code must be valid.
Input parameters

size
XML.

ID ID number for our internal use
Name Parameter name. Use this as the input parameter name in the Preconfigure
command.
3/13/09 211

Value Parameter value for the query string. Use this as the input parameter value in the
Preconfigure command.
Title Short definition of the parameter value
Application Application. 2 indicates Registrant contact.
UserDefined User must supply the value for this parameter from outside sources
Required Obligation of this parameter. 0 indicates optional, 1 indicates required, 2 indicates a
child attribute/parameter that is required for some values of the parent. Values that
require the child are indicated in the <Required> node of the parent.
Description Extended definition of the parameter value
IsChild If IsChild=1, this parameter is the child of another extended attribute.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the extended attributes for the .us TLD and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getextattributes&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&tld=us&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that the entended attributes for .us are us_nexus, global_cc_us, and us_purpose.
In the Preconfigure command, these parameters would be input, for example, as
us_nexus=C11&us_purpose=P2:
<Attributes>
<Attribute>
<ID>1</ID>
<Name>us_nexus</Name>
<Application>2</Application>
<UserDefined>False</UserDefined>
<Required>1</Required>
<Description>Nexus Category</Description>
<IsChild>0</IsChild>
<Options>
<Option>
<ID>12</ID>
<Value>C11</Value>
<Title>US Citizen</Title>
<Description>A natural person who is a US Citizen</Description>
</Option>
<Option>
3/13/09 212
<ID>13</ID>
<Value>C12</Value>
<Title>Permanent Resident</Title>
<Description>A natural person who is a Permanent Resident</Description>
</Option>
.
.
.
</Options>
</Attribute>
<Attribute>
<ID>4</ID>
<Name>global_cc_us</Name>
<Description>Country</Description>
<Options />
</Attribute>
<Attribute>
<ID>2</ID>
<Name>us_purpose</Name>
<Description>Application Purpose</Description>
<Options>
<Option>
<ID>17</ID>
<Value>P1</Value>
<Title>For Profit</Title>
<Description>Business use for profit</Description>
</Option>
<Option>
<ID>18</ID>
<Value>P2</Value>
<Title>Non-profit</Title>
<Description>Non-profit business, club, association, religious organization, etc.
</Description>
</Option>
.
.
.
</Options>
</Attribute>
</Attributes>
<Command>GETEXTATTRIBUTES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 213
Related commands
AddContact
Contacts
GetAddressBook
GetContacts
GetWhoisContact
Preconfigure
3/13/09 214
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetExtendInfo
GetExtendInfo
Description
Definition
Get extension (renewal) information.
Usage
Use this command to display information about the expiration date of a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

disabled.
Expiration Current expiration date.
MaxExtension Maximum # of years that can be added.
CCAuthorized Credit card transaction successfully authorized.
Price Price for one-year extension for this type of TLD.
3/13/09 215

Balance Current balance in this account.
AvailableBalance Available balance in this account.
DefPeriod Account-level setting for default renewal period for domain name
registrations
AllowDNS Account-level setting—True allows domain name servers other than
Register.com’s
ShowPopups Account-level setting—True shows popup menus
AutoRenew Account-level setting—True automatically renews the domain registration
30 days before it expires
RegLock Account-level setting—True requires the account holder’s permissiont to
transfer the domain to another registrar
AutoPakRenew Account-level setting—True automatically renews POP paks 30 days
before they expire
UseDNS Account-level setting—True uses Register.com’s name servers
ResellerStatus Account-level setting—Reseller status of this account
RenewalSetting Account-level setting
0 Send no renewal reminder when domain expiration approaches
1 Send renewal reminder by email
2 Contact customer, renew registration, and charge account
RenewalBCC Account-level setting—
1 Send blind carbon copy of renewal email to reseller
0 Do not send blind carbon copy to reseller
RenewalURLForward Account-level setting—True automatically renews URL forwarding 30 days
before the subscription expires
RenewalEmailForward Account-level setting—True automatically renews email forwarding 30
days before the subscription expires
MailNumLimit Account-level setting—True automatically renews email forwarding 30
days before the subscription expires
RCOMShield Account-level setting—True automatically renews RCOM Shield 30 days
DefRCOMShieldRenew Account-level setting—True automatically renews RCOM Shield 30 days
HostNameX Account-level setting—Name of default host record
AddressX Account-level setting—Default host record address
RecordTypeX Account-level setting—Default host record type
DefaultHostRecordOwn Account-level setting—By default, does this account assign user-defined
host records?
UseOurDNS Account-level setting—By default, does this account assign our DNS to
domain names?
DNSX Account-level setting—Default name servers
AcceptTerms True has signed a credit card processing agreement with Register.com
URL URL for reseller site, used in email notices
ErrCount) values.
to the client.
3/13/09 216
Notes
Example
The following query requests renewal information for partnerdomain.com and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getextendinfo&
<Expiration>06/25/2004</Expiration>
<MaxExtension>8</MaxExtension>
<CCAuthorized>True</CCAuthorized>
<Balance>39.80</Balance>
<AvailableBalance>39.80</AvailableBalance>
<Command>GETEXTENDINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Extend
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
InsertNewOrder
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 217
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetForwarding
GetForwarding
Description
Definition
Get email forwarding records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to display email forwarding records for a domain name.
A similar command, GetPOPForwarding, displays both email forwarding and POP records for a single email
address.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must use Register.com’s domain name servers.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
GetDefaultOnly Optional If this is set to 1, extra blank input records are returned 1
for user input on the email forwarding form. Primarily
used in XML output.
or XML.
3/13/09 218

disabled.
UserNameX Alias name to forward. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
Alias Alias name to forward. Present when ResponseType=XML
ForwardToX Email address to forward the alias to. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
Forward-To Email address to forward the alias to. Present when ResponseType=XML
StatusX Enabled status of email forwarding:
0 Email forwarding enabled
1 Email forwarding disabled
EmailCount Number of email forwarding records currently configured
MaxEmail Total number of email forwarding records permitted for this domain name
EmailForwarding True
HostRecords True
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests e-mail forwarding information for partnerdomain.com and requests the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getforwarding&
<eforward>
<alias>jane.doe</alias>
</eforward>
<eforward>
<alias>john.doe</alias>
</eforward>
<EmailCount>2</EmailCount>
3/13/09 219
<Command>GETFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 220
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetFraudScore
GetFraudScore
Description
Definition
Retrieve a fraud score.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a fraud score.
Fraud scores range from 0 to 100; 100 represents the highest risk of fraud (though note that it represents a
probability, not a certainty, of fraud). As a rule of thumb, a fraud score of 50 or higher warrants review; a score of
75 or higher warrants a high level of scrutiny. You may want to adjust these guidelines based on your company’s
tolerance for risk.
Availability
This command is available to resellers who do not use our credit card processing services, and who subscribe to
our fraud scoring service.
Constraints
• This account must subscribe to our fraud scoring service.
Input parameters

size
SLD Optional Second-level domain name (for example, register in 63
register.com) for which you want fraud score
information
EmailAddress Required Email address about which you want fraud information, 130
in format [email protected]
CardNumber Required Credit card number, in 16-digit format 16
EndUserIP Required IP address of the end user, in format 19
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN
Country Required Country, in 2-letter country-code format 2
3/13/09 221

size
ProductType Optional; if this Product type, usually the product type this customer is 7
parameter is not trying to purchase. Permitted values are:
included, the domain a domain name
fraud score No value all products except domains
returned reflects
all products
except domains
ChargeAmount Required Amount this customer is trying to charge, in format 1000.00
DD.cc
Quantity Required Quantity of this product that customer is trying to 2
purchase
or XML.

Score Fraud score, composited from the parameter values you supplied in the query string.
Fraud scores range from 0 to 100; 100 represents the highest risk of fraud (though
note that it represents a probability, not a certainty, of fraud).
As a rule of thumb, a fraud score of 50 or higher warrants review; a score of 75 or
higher warrants a high level of scrutiny. You may want to adjust these guidelines
based on your company’s tolerance for risk.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a fraud score for the values provided, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getfraudscore&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&CardNumber=4111111111111111&sld=thisdomain&
EndUserIP=127.0.0.1&[email protected]&Country=US&
ProductType=hosting&ChargeAmount=25&Quantity=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Score return value confirms that the query was successful:
<Score>80</Score>
<Command>GETFRAUDSCORE</Command>
3/13/09 222
<MinPeriod />
<Site />
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
None
3/13/09 223
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetGlobalChangeStatus
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of IDs for instances in which a global edit command was run on this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve ResponseIDs for global edits performed on domains in this account. Commonly, you
will run this command to get a ResponseID in order to run the GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail command.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

RequestID ID number of the request for the change described in this node
ReqDate Time-stamp for this request
ReqTypeDesc Description of the requested change
ReqStatusDesc Status of the requested change
values.
client.
3/13/09 224
Notes
Example
The following query Retrieves the global changes that have been requested in account rcompartnerid and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetGlobalChangeStatus&
<GetGlobalChangeStatus>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<RequestID>8332</RequestID>
<ReqDate>9/2/2003 3:51:47 PM</ReqDate>
<ReqTypeDesc>Registrar-lock on</ReqTypeDesc>
<ReqStatusDesc>Open</ReqStatusDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Auto renew on</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Auto renew on</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Use Our DNS</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Contact changes</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
</GetGlobalChangeStatus>
<Command>GETGLOBALCHANGESTATUS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
3/13/09 225
</debug>
Related commands
3/13/09 226
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the domains affected by the specified global update, and the success status for each.
Usage
Use this command to check the success of global changes.
Availability
Constraints
• The ResponseID must match a global update that was performed in this account.
Input parameters

size
RequestID Required ID number for the global change to one parameter. Use the 6
GetGlobalChangeStatus command to retrieve this value.
XML.

StatusDesc Status of this change to this domain
ErrorDesc Description of any error encountered during this change
values.
3/13/09 227

client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the status for each domain affected by global change RequestID=8331 and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail&
UID=rcompartnerid&PW=rcompartnerpw&RequestID=8331&ResponseType=XML
<GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail>
<GlobalStatusDetail>
<DomainName>TestSLD1.biz</DomainName>
<StatusDesc>Processed successfully</StatusDesc>
<ErrorDesc>none</ErrorDesc>
</GlobalStatusDetail>
<DomainName>TestSLD2.com</DomainName>
<DomainName>TestSLD3.biz</DomainName>
<DomainName>TestSLD6.us</DomainName>
</GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail>
<Command>GETGLOBALCHANGESTATUSDETAIL</Command>
3/13/09 228
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
3/13/09 229
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetHomeDomainList
GetHomeDomainList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of registered and hosted domains in this account that use our domain name servers.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of registered and hosted domains in this account that use our domain name
servers.
A typical use of this command is to retrieve domains that are eligible to use our DNS-dependent services.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
StartPosition Optional; Return domain names beginning with this number. For 5
default is 1 example, if StartPosition=26&Display=25, display
names 26 through 50 in the ordered list.
Display Optional; How many domain names to include in response. Permitted 100
default is 25 values are 1 to 100.
OrderBy Optional; Sort the response by this criterion. Permitted values are 9
default is SLD SLD, TLD, or RegStatus.
XML.

ID Our numeric ID number for this domain
Name Domain name
3/13/09 230

RegStatus Registration status
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of domains in this account that use our DNS servers, sorted by TLD, and sends
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GETHOMEDOMAINLIST&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&display=25&orderby=tld&responsetype=xml
<GetHomeDomains>
<Display>25</Display>
<OrderBy>TLD, SLD</OrderBy>
<NewStartPosition>1</NewStartPosition>
<TotalDomains>16</TotalDomains>
<Domains>
<Domain>
<ID>152542653</ID>
<Name>bajadazoo.biz</Name>
<RegStatus>Registered</RegStatus>
</Domain>
<Domain>
<ID>152542655</ID>
<Name>tomalotamous.biz</Name>
</Domain>
<Domain>
<ID>152544200</ID>
<Name>apophyleti.com</Name>
<RegStatus>Hosted</RegStatus>
</Domain>
<Domain>
<ID>152542612</ID>
<Name>pangolineament.com</Name>
</Domain>
.
3/13/09 231
.
.
<Domain>
<ID>152542654</ID>
<Name>terraforaminifer.net</Name>
</Domain>
</Domains>
</GetHomeDomains>
<Command>GETHOMEDOMAINLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
AddToCart
GetAllDomains
GetDomains
GetReport
PurchaseServices
3/13/09 232
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetHosts
GetHosts
Description
Definition
Get host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to return all host records. GetRegHosts, a similar command, does not return mail host records.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

Name Host name of record.
Type Record Type. Returns A, URL, MX, MXE, CNAME or FRAME.
MXPref Preference level: the lower this value, the higher priority this service. Default value
is 10.
3/13/09 233

Address Address.
Can be an IP for record types A, MXE and FRAME only.
Record types URL and FRAME can be a full URL.
Record types MX, URL, FRAME and CNAME can be a fully qualified domain name.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests all host records, including mail hosts, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=gethosts&
The response lists the hosts:
<Website>0</Website>
<host>
<name>www</name>
<type>A</type>
<address>127.0.0.1</address>
</host>
<host>
<name>@</name>
<type>A</type>
</host>
<host>
<name>mail</name>
<type>MXE</type>
<mxpref>10</mxpref>
</host>
<Command>GETHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 234
Related commands
GetMetaTag
GetRegHosts
GetSPFHosts
SetDNSHost
SetHosts
SetSPFHosts
UpdateMetaTag
3/13/09 235
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetMailHosts
GetMailHosts
Description
Definition
Get mail hosts (DNS information) only.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the mail records associated with a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

HostNameX Host name. For the GetMailHosts command, this is mail.DomainName.tld
RecordTypeX Record type. Permitted values are MXE (email forwarding) or MX (POP3 mail).
AddressX IP address of Register.com’s mail forwarding service.
3/13/09 236

MXPrefX Preference level: the lower this value, the higher priority this service. Default value
is 10.
ServiceSelect The identification number of the email service for this domain.
1048 no email
1051 email forwarding ("easy" mail)
1054 user configured
1105 user simplified
1114 enable POP Mail
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the mail host information for the domain partnerdomain.com, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getmailhosts&
<EmailForwarding>True</EmailForwarding>
<HostName11>mail</HostName11>
<RecordType11>MXE</RecordType11>
<Address11>209.19.56.20</Address11>
<MXPref11>10</MXPref11>
<ServiceSelect>1051</ServiceSelect>
<Command>GETMAILHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 237
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetForwarding
GetPOP3
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 238
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetMetaTag
GetMetaTag
Description
Definition
Retrieve the metatags for one of a domain’s host records.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the current metatags for one host record for a domain.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
MetaTagHostID Required Host record ID for this host record for this domain; our 8
internal tracking number. You can retrieve all host IDs for
a domain using the GetRegHosts command.
or XML.

TitleBar Metatag content for browser title bar
SiteDescription Metatag content for search engine results
Keywords Metatag content for search engine keywords
DomainNameID ID number for this domain, our internal tracking number
3/13/09 239
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetMetaTag

ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the HTML metatag contents for the specified host record, and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getmetatag&
MetaTagHostID=11415002&ResponseType=XML
<metatags>
<titlebar>MY COOL TITLE</titlebar>
<sitedescription>MY SITE DESCRIPTION</sitedescription>
<keywords>MY SITE KEYWORDS</keywords>
</metatags>
<Command>GETMETATAG</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetHosts
GetRegHosts
SetHosts
UpdateMetaTag
3/13/09 240
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetOrderDetail
GetOrderDetail
Description
Definition
Get detailed information about an order.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve contents and details of an order when you know the order number.
Use this command to monitor status when an order includes non-real-time domain names (names that, at the time
you submit the order, have an RRPCode value of 1300 and an IsRealTimeTLD value of false).
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
OrderID Required The identification number of the order for which you want 10
details. You can retrieve this number using the GetOrderList
command.
XML.

OrderID 9-digit order identification number.
Result True/False -- True indicates that this order exists, and exists under this
account.
BillDate Time at which customer’s account was billed for the transaction amount.
3/13/09 241

CCRefNum Credit card reference number for this transaction, generated by us.
ProductType Description of this item.
Description Description of the item. Return value is usually a domain name.
Status Status for fulfilling the order for this item. Only a status Successful indicates
that the Registry has registered this name to you.
Quantity Number of years.
AmountPaid Amount paid for this item. If the Registry has processed this name and has not
registered it to you, the AmountPaid value is Not billed. If the value is Not
billed, check the Status parameter for the reason for failure.
DomainPassword Domain password, if one was assigned
OrderStatus Order status. If OrderStatus is Open, check back later: the order is still being
processed. If OrderStatus is Closed, check the Status parameter. If we
registered the domain the Status value is Successful. Any other value indicates
a failure.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the details of order 156062775, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetOrderDetail&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&orderid=156062775&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that in this order, the account successfully purchased 2 products:
<Order>
<BillDate>7/19/2002 3:42:29 PM</BillDate>
<CCRefNum />
<OrderBillAmount>$35.80</OrderBillAmount>
<AdjustToAccount />
<OrderDetail>
<ProductType>Register</ProductType>
<Description>partnerdomain2.net</Description>
<Status>Successful</Status>
<Quantity>2</Quantity>
<AmountPaid>$17.90</AmountPaid>
</OrderDetail>
<OrderDetail>
3/13/09 242
<ProductType>Register</ProductType>
<Description>partnerdomain3.info</Description>
<Quantity>2</Quantity>
<AmountPaid>$17.90</AmountPaid>
</OrderDetail>
</Order>
<Command>GETORDERDETAIL</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetDomainStatus
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
RPT_GetReport
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 243
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetOrderList
GetOrderList
Description
Definition
Get a list of the orders placed through this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of orders, identified by order number.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
Start Optional Return sets of 25 records in reverse chronological 4
order. For example, Start=26 returns the 26th
through 50th most recent orders. Defaults to 1.
BeginDate Optional; if omitted, six Beginning date of orders to return. Must be no 10
months of orders are more than six months before EndDate. Permitted
returned format is MM/DD/YYYY
EndDate Optional; if omitted, End date of orders to return. Must be no more 10
EndDate is today than six months after BeginDate. Permitted
format is MM/DD/YYYY
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 244

OrderID Order identification number, in nine-digit format.
OrderDate Date on which the order was placed. Time stamp indicates the time at
which our database received the order.
StatusDesc Overall status of the order. Options are:
0 New
1 Authorization Succeeded
2 Authorization Failed
3 Processing
5 Ready for billing
6 Order complete
7 Order canceled
OrderProcessFlag True/False -- True indicates the order has been processed.
ShowPreviousAndNext Yes/No -- Yes gives user access to previous and next transactions.
ShowPreviousLink Yes/No -- Yes displays a link that calls the previous block of transactions.
PreviousStartPosition First transaction to include in the response, counting back from the most
recent, if user clicks the Previous link.
ShowStart First transaction to include in the response, counting back from the most
recent.
ShowEnd Last transaction to include in the response, counting back from the most
recent.
ShowNextLink Yes/No -- Yes displays a link that calls the next block of transactions.
RecordCount Total number of orders stored for this account.
ErrCount) values.
to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of orders successfully submitted through account rcompartnerid. The
optional Start=26 parameter specifies that the list should start with the 26th most recent order. The query
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetOrderList&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Start=26&responsetype=xml
The response gives an overview of orders starting with the 26th most recent. Normally, the response would
include the 26th through 50th most recent orders; this response ends with the 37th because only 37 orders have
been placed in the lifetime of the account:
3/13/09 245
<OrderList>
<OrderDetail>
<OrderDate>7/19/2002 12:28:37 PM</OrderDate>
<StatusDesc>Order complete</StatusDesc>
<OrderProcessFlag>True</OrderProcessFlag>
</OrderDetail>
<OrderDetail>
</OrderDetail>
<OrderDetail>
</OrderDetail>
.
.
.
<ShowPreviousAndNext>Yes</ShowPreviousAndNext>
<ShowPreviousLink>Yes</ShowPreviousLink>
<PreviousStartPosition>1</PreviousStartPosition>
<ShowStart>26</ShowStart>
<ShowEnd>37</ShowEnd>
<ShowNextLink>No</ShowNextLink>
<RecordCount>37</RecordCount>
</OrderList>
<Command>GETORDERLIST</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
RPT_GetReport
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 246
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetPasswordBit
GetPasswordBit
Description
Definition
Check to see if a password is set for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether a password is set for a domain name, and what the password is.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

disabled.
PasswordSet Returns 1 if a password is set, 0 otherwise.
DomainPassword If PasswordSet=1, then a password is returned in this parameter.
3/13/09 247
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetPasswordBit

ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the domain name password for partnerdomain.com, and requests the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getpasswordbit&
In the response, the password-set value of 1 indicates that a password is set. The DomainPassword value
indicates that the domain password is userpw.
<DomainPassword>userpw</DomainPassword>
<password-set>1</password-set>
<Command>GETPASSWORDBIT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 248
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetPOP3
GetPOP3
Description
Definition
Gets all POP3 accounts for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to generate a list of the POP mail accounts belonging to a domain name. Return information
includes mailbox names and BundleID numbers for the domain’s POP paks.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
GetDefaultOnly Optional If this is set to 1, extra blank input records are returned for 1
user input on the POP3 form. Primarily used in XML output.
XML.
3/13/09 249

disabled.
EmailCount Number of email accounts on the domain name.
UsernameX POP user name for this email account (this mailbox). Indexed X = 1 to
EmailCount if ResponseType=text or HTML.
PasswordX POP password name for the email account. Indexed X = 1 to EmailCount if
ResponseType=text or HTML.
QuotaX Maximum storage capacity for each mailbox, in megabytes. Indexed X = 1 to
EmailCount if ResponseType=text or HTML.
ExpDateX Expiration date of the POP3 account. Indexed X = 1 to EmailCount if
BundleIDX ID number of this POP pak. Indexed X = 1 to EmailCount if
AutoRenewX Auto-renewal setting for this POP3 account and its POP pak. 1 signifies that
auto-renew is on, 0 off. Indexed X = 1 to EmailCount if ResponseType=text
or HTML.
QuotaUsedX Number of MB of storage space currently in use for this account. Indexed X =
1 to EmailCount if ResponseType=text or HTML.
[Pak]BundleIDX ID number of this POP pak. Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if
[Pak]QtyPurchasedX Total number of POP accounts that have been purchased for this domain
name. Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if ResponseType=text or
HTML.
[Pak]QtyAvailableX Total number of POP accounts currently configured for this domain name.
Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if ResponseType=text or HTML.
[Pak]ExpDateX Expiration date of this POP pak. Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if
[Pak]AutoRenewX Auto-renewal setting for this POP pak. 1 signifies that auto-renew is on, 0 off.
Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if ResponseType=text or HTML.
[Pak]QuotaX Maximum storage capacity for each mailbox, in megabytes. Prefixed Pak and
indexed X = 1 to Count if ResponseType=text or HTML.
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
3/13/09 250
Example
The following query requests a list of all POP mail accounts in partnerdomain.com, and requests the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getpop3&
The response lists the five POP mail accounts that belong to partnerdomain.com. Four are part of bundle
5105 and one is from bundle 5134:
<pop>
<username>jane</username>
<password>janepw</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
<expdate>7/26/2003 3:48:15 PM</expdate>
<BundleId>5105</BundleId>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>john</username>
<password>johnpw</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>john.doe</username>
<password>johndoe</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>test8</username>
<password>test8</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>james</username>
<password>rcompartnerpw</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
<expdate>8/15/2003 11:01:30 AM</expdate>
</pop>
<EmailCount>5</EmailCount>
<Paks>
<Pak>
<QtyPurchased>10</QtyPurchased>
<QtyAvailable>6</QtyAvailable>
<ExpDate>7/26/2003 3:48:15 PM</ExpDate>
</Pak>
3/13/09 251
<Pak>
<QtyPurchased>10</QtyPurchased>
<QtyAvailable>9</QtyAvailable>
<ExpDate>8/15/2003 11:01:30 AM</ExpDate>
</Pak>
<Count>2</Count>
</Paks>
<Command>GETPOP3</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOPExpirations
GetPOPForwarding
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
RenewPOPBundle
SetPakRenew
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 252
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetPOPExpirations
GetPOPExpirations
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of POP paks and their expiration dates, and the domains they are associated with.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of POP paks and their expiration dates, and the domains they are associated
with.
This command allows you to synchronize your database with ours. In particular, you can use it to identify POP
paks that are about to expire or have recently expired, update the expiration dates of POP paks that were
renewed in a site other than yours, or retrieve the expiration date of POP paks associated with domains that were
transferred or pushed into your account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

DomainX Domain name with which this POP pak is associated. The response is indexed X if
BundleIDX ID number of this POP pak, from our internal records. Use this ID number to renew
the POP pak using the RenewPOPBundle command. The response is indexed X if
ExpDateX Expiration date of this POP pak. The response is indexed X if ResponseType=text
or HTML.
3/13/09 253

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves POP pak expiration dates, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetPOPExpirations&
In the response, the list of POP paks and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<popexpirations>
<pop>
<domain>partnerdomain.com</domain>
<bundleid>5105</bundleid>
</pop>
<pop>
<expdate>8/15/2003 11:01:30 AM</expdate>
</pop>
<pop>
</pop>
<count>3</count>
</popexpirations>
<Command>GETPOPEXPIRATIONS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
3/13/09 254
</debug>
Related commands
Extend
GetPOP3
GetRenew
Purchase
PurchasePOPBundle
RenewPOPBundle
3/13/09 255
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetPOPForwarding
GetPOPForwarding
Description
Definition
Retrieve the email forwarding record—either POP or our email forwarding—for a specified mailbox name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the email forwarding record for a specified mailbox user name.
Availability
Constraints
• The user name must be an existing email address for this domain name.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
UserName Required Mailbox name (for example, john in [email protected]) 50
XML.

DomainName Domain SLD and TLD
DomainNameID Numeric domain name ID, from our database
UserName Mailbox name
ForwardTo Email forwarding address
3/13/09 256

Active Is this forwarding address active? 1 indicates yes.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the email forwarding record for [email protected] and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GETPOPFORWARDING&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&username=Jane.Doe&
ResponseType=xml
In the response, the presence of the popforwarding node and the absence of an ErrString parameter confirm
that the query was successful:
<popforwarding>
<domainname>partnerdomain.com</domainname>
<domainnameid>152533676</domainnameid>
<username>Y</username>
<forwardto>[email protected]</forwardto>
<active>1</active>
</popforwarding>
<Command>GETPOPFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 257
Related commands
DeletePOP3
GetCatchAll
GetPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 258
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetRegHosts
GetRegHosts
Description
Definition
Get hosts (DNS information) for a domain without mail host records.
Usage
Use this command to display DNS information for a domain. The response does not include mail host entries.
GetHosts, a similar command, returns all host records including mail host records.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
ExtFormat Optional ExtFormat=1 encloses the repeating host information in a 1
separate tag so it is easier to parse.
XML.

HostIDX Identification number of this individual host record
3/13/09 259

HostNameX Name of this individual host record
AddressX Address of this individual host record
RecordTypeX Record type of this individual host record
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the DNS host records for a domain name, specifies ExtFormat=1 to enclose the
host records in a separate tag, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getreghosts&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&ExtFormat=1&
responsetype=xml
<hostrecords>
<host>
<hostID />
<HostName>www</HostName>
<Address />
<RecordType>CNAME</RecordType>
</host>
<host>
<hostID>16139887</hostID>
<HostName>@ (none)</HostName>
<Address>66.150.5.189</Address>
<RecordType>A</RecordType>
</host>
<host>
<hostID>16139888</hostID>
<HostName>photos</HostName>
<Address>photos.msn.com.</Address>
</host>
.
.
.
<host>
<hostID />
<HostName>* (other)</HostName>
<Address />
3/13/09 260
</host>
</hostrecords>
<ParkingEnabled>False</ParkingEnabled>
<ServiceSelect>1114</ServiceSelect>
<Command>GETREGHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetHosts
GetMetaTag
SetDNSHost
SetHosts
UpdateMetaTag
3/13/09 261
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetRegistrationStatus
Description
Definition
Get the registration and paid status of a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to get the registration status and paid status of domains in your account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

disabled.
RegistrationStatus Registration Status of the Domain name. Options are Processing,
Registered, Hosted, Null.
PurchaseStatus Purchase status of the Domain name. Options are Processing, Paid, Null.
3/13/09 262
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetRegistrationStatus

ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves information on whether the domain name partnerdomain.com is registered and
paid for, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getregistrationstatus&
<RegistrationStatus>Registered</RegistrationStatus>
<Command>GETREGISTRATIONSTATUS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 263
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetRegLock
GetRegLock
Description
Definition
Get the registrar lock setting for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether one of your domain names is locked, that is, whether it is protected from
being transferred to another registrar.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

RegLock Returns 1 if locked, 0 otherwise if the responsetype is Text.
RRPCode Response code from Registry.
RRPText Response text from Registry.
3/13/09 264

values.
client.
IsLockable Indicates whether this TLD can use the Registrar Lock feature. Return values are
True or False.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the lock status of a domain name, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getreglock&
In the response, the reg-lock value of 1 indicates that the domain name is locked:
<reg-lock>1</reg-lock>
<Command>GETREGLOCK</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 265
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 266
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetRenew
GetRenew
Description
Definition
Get the auto-renew setting for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether a domain in your account is set to renew automatically. If so, the renewal
is charged to your account a month before the expiration date for the domain name. Fifteen days before that, you
receive an email notifying you of the auto-renew charges.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

disabled.
RenewName Returns 1 if this domain is set to auto-renew, 0 otherwise.
PakExist Returns 1 if there are POP paks associated with this domain, 0 otherwise.
3/13/09 267

AutoPakRenew Returns 1 if the POP paks for this domain are set to auto-renew, 0 otherwise.
EMailFwdExists Returns 1 if this domain subscribes to email forwarding, 0 otherwise.
EMailForwardRenew Returns 1 if the email forwarding for this domain is set to auto-renew, 0
otherwise.
URLFwdExists Returns 1 if this domain subscribes to URL forwarding, 0 otherwise.
URLForwardRenew Returns 1 if the URL forwarding for this domain is set to auto-renew, 0
otherwise.
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the auto-renew status of partnerdomain.com and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getrenew&
In the response, the auto-renew value of 1 indicates that the domain is set to automatically renew:
<auto-renew>1</auto-renew>
<Command>GETRENEW</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 268
Related commands
Extend
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetPasswordBit
GetPOPExpirations
GetRegLock
InsertNewOrder
RenewPOPBundle
SetPakRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 269
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetReport
GetReport
Description
Definition
Get a report on a user’s account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve an overview of the domains in an account: domain names, name server status,
registration status, and expiration date.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

FName First (use) name of the account registrant.
LName Last (family) name of the account registrant.
Party Party identification number. Format is 32 hexadecimal digits, hyphenated.
DN Domain name parameter.
DomName Domain name attribute.
NSStatus Name server status. Value yes indicates our name servers. Value no indicates
not our name servers.
3/13/09 270

RegistrationStatus Registration status in this account. Return values are:
Deleted Domain has been deleted from registrar’s database.
Expired Domain registration has expired but has not been deleted from
registrar’s database (domain is within “grace period” for reactivaton).
Expired Transfers Domain that is being transferred to another registrar in
expired state.
Hosted Domain that is hosted by us but registered with another registrar.
Hosted Deleted Domain that was hosted by us but registered elsewhere, its
registration has expired, and it has been deleted from our database.
Hosted Expired Domain that is hosted by us but registered elsewhere, its
registration has expired, but it is still present in our database.
Hosted Transfers Domain that is hosted by us but registered elsewhere, and
the registration is transferring to another registrar.
Keyword Keyword, an obsolete feature.
Registered Domain that is registered by us.
Transferred away Hosted and Registered Domain that was registered and
hosted by us, and both the registration and hosting services are transferring
away from us.
ExpirationDate Date on which this domain registration expires.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a report on account rcompartnerid, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getreport&
In the response, the ReportDetail section lists the domains in account rcompartnerid:
<GetReport>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<Party>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</Party>
<ReportDetail>
<dn DomName="partnerdomain.com" nsstatus="No" registrationstatus="Hosted"
ExpirationDate="07/15/03" />
<dn DomName="partnerdomain2.net" nsstatus="Yes" registrationstatus="Registered"
<dn DomName="partnerdomain3.info" nsstatus="Yes" registrationstatus="Registered"
</ReportDetail>
3/13/09 271
</GetReport>
<Command>GETREPORT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAllAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetHomeDomainList
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
RPT_GetReport
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 272
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetResellerInfo
GetResellerInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve the contact information for the account holder.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve contact information for a reseller account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

OrganizationName Reseller organization name
FName Reseller first name
LName Reseller last name
Address1 Address first line
Address2 Address second line
City City
3/13/09 273

StateProvince Name of state or province
StateProvinceChoice S indicates StateProvince is a state; P, a province
Country Two-letter country code
Phone Phone number
Fax Fax number
EMailAddress Email address
PhoneExt Phone extension
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves reseller contact information for the specified account and domain, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetResellerInfo&
<ResellerInfo>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<Address2 />
<Fax>5555555556</Fax>
<EmailAddress>[email protected]</EmailAddress>
<PhoneExt />
</ResellerInfo>
<Command>GETRESELLERINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
3/13/09 274
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddContact
GetAccountInfo
GetAddressBook
GetAllAccountInfo
GetContacts
GetWhoisContact
3/13/09 275
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetSPFHosts
GetSPFHosts
Description
Definition
Retrieve Sender Policy Framework (SPF) host records for a domain.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve SPF host records for a domain.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

Name Name of this SPF record
Type Type of this SPF record
A-Radio Setting for A-radio
MX-Radio Setting for MX-radio
PTR-Radio Setting for PTR-radio
ALL-Radio Setting for ALL-radio
3/13/09 276

A-Records Value for A records
MX-Records Value for MX records
IP-Records Value for IP records
INC-Records Value for INC record
HostID Host ID number
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the SPF hosts for a domain and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getspfHosts&
In the response, host values confirm that the query was successful and that SPF records have been configured for
this domain:
<host>
<name>test</name>
<type>TXT</type>
<a-radio>off</a-radio>
<mx-radio>on</mx-radio>
<ptr-radio>on</ptr-radio>
<all-radio>on</all-radio>
<a-records>regular hostnames po</a-records>
<mx-records>mx servers to</mx-records>
<ip-records>127.0.0.1</ip-records>
<inc-records>myisp.net mydomain.com</inc-records>
<hostid>15195981</hostid>
</host>
<Command>GETSPFHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
3/13/09 277
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetHosts
SetHosts
SetSPFHosts
3/13/09 278
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetServiceContact
GetServiceContact
Description
Definition
Retrieve the customer service contact information for a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve customer service contact information for an account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
Service Optional If the Service parameter is omitted, the Billing contact 20
information is returned.
XML.

Organization Name of contact’s organization
Address1 Contact address, line 1
Address2 Contact address, line 2
City Contact’s city
StateProvince Contact’s state or province
PostalCode Contact’s postal code
Country Contact’s country
3/13/09 279

Phone Contact’s phone number
Fax Contact’s fax number
EmailAddress Contact’s email address
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the customer service contact information for rcompartnerid and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GETSERVICECONTACT&
In the response, the presence of contact information, and the ErrCount value 0, indicate that the query was
successful:
<ServiceContact>
<Organization>Partner Domains Inc.</Organization>
<Address2 />
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
<URL />
<ResellerKey />
</ServiceContact>
<Command>GETSERVICECONTACT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
3/13/09 280
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddContact
Contacts
GetAddressBook
GetContacts
GetWhoisContact
3/13/09 281
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetSubAccountDetails
Description
Definition
Get the wholesale prices and enabled settings for one subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to list prices for one subaccount.
This command can be used to change TLD prices for one subaccount, but we recommend using the
SetResellerTLDPricing command instead. SetResellerTLDPricing has fewer requirements than
GetSubaccountDetails, and as a result is easier to use.
Availability
Constraints
• The account must be a reseller account.
Input parameters

size
Account Required Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-NNNN 20
format. You can retrieve this number
using the GetSubAccounts command.
3/13/09 282

size
Action Optional; default value is List Action to take. Permitted values are List, 20
Info, and Manage.
Action=List returns a long list of current
price settings.
Action=Info returns a short list of
information about the subaccount and
parent account.
Action=Manage updates product prices
when this query executes.
If the query does not include the Action
parameter, the product prices do not
change.
UseQtyEngine Optional Year-bracket to retrieve prices for. For
example, UseQtyEngine=2 retrieves the
annual price for domain name
registrations of 2 to 4 years;
UseQtyEngine=5 retrieves the annual
price for 5 to 9 years. Permitted values
are 1, 2, 5, and 10. You can use only one
UseQtyEngine parameter per query. Use
this parameter with Action=List and
Action=Manage.
AcctType Required if Action=Manage Account type. Permitted values are 20
Reseller or Retail.
TLDPrice Required for every TLD we Price for registering a .com domain. 20
offer if Action=Manage. If Permitted format is DD.cc
any TLDs are missing, the
query fails.
TLDRenew Required for every TLD we Price for renewing a TLD domain. 20
query fails.
TLDTransfer Required for every TLD we Price for transferring a TLD domain. 20
query fails.
POP3 Required if Action=Manage Price for a POP Email pak. Permitted 20
format is DD.cc
WPPS Required if Action=Manage Price for RCOM Shield. Permitted format is 20
DD.cc
DotNameBundle Required if Action=Manage Price for a dot-name bundle (the domain 20
name with email provided by the dot-
name Registry). Permitted format is DD.cc

Action If <Action>MANAGE</Action> is in the response,
prices have been changed to those listed.
SubAccount Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-NNNN format.
3/13/09 283

PartyID Party identification number expressed as 32
hexadecimal characters, hyphenated.
LoginID Account ID of the subaccount.
DomainCount Number of domains in this subaccount.
Account Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-NNNN format.
TLD Top-level domain; for example, com for .com
domains.
RegisterPrice Price for registering a domain of this type for one
year.
RegisterEnabled True/False—True indicates that this subaccount
allows customers to register domain names.
RenewPrice Price for renewing a domain of this type for one year.
RenewEnabled True/False -- True indicates that this subaccount
allows customers to renew domain names.
TransferPrice Price for transferring a domain of this type, and
paying for one year of registration.
TransferEnabled True/False -- True indicates that this subaccount
allows customers to transfer domain names.
POP3 Price for one 10-mailbox POP pak, per year, in $US
DotNameBundle Price for a one-year registration of a .name domain,
with the .name Registry’s email forwarding
DNSHosting Price for one year of DNS hosting
WPPS Price for one year of RCOM Shield
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL-Premium Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust QuickSSL
Premium SSL certificate
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust True
BusinessID SSL certificate
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-EV Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust True
BusinessID EV certificate
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust QuickSSL
certificate
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-Wildcard Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust True
BusinessID Wildcard SSL certificate
Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL Price for one year registration of a RapidSSL
certificate
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure
Site SSL certificate
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure
Site PRO SSL certificate
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-EV Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure
Site Extended Validation SSL certificate
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro-EV Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure
Site Pro with Extended Validation SSL certificate
LWSC-Basic Price for one month of Web Site Creator Basic
LWSC-Full Price for one month of Web Site Creator Full
LWSC-Ecommerce Price for one month of Web Site Creator eCommerce
Hosted-Exchange-Mailbox Price for one Hosted Microsoft Exchange mailbox, per
month
Hosted-Exchange-Extra-Storage Price for 100MB of extra storage pooled among all
mailboxes in this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account,
per month
3/13/09 284

Hosted-Exchange-BlackBerry Price for delivery to one BlackBerry device, per month
Hosted-Exchange-BlackBerry-Setup-Fee One-time charge for setting up BlackBerry service for
one device
Hosted-Exchange-GoodLink Price for delivery to one Good Mobile Messaging
device, per month
Hosted-Exchange-GoodLink-Setup-Fee One-time charge for setting up Good Mobile
Messaging service for one device
Hosted-Exchange-ActiveSync Price for delivery to one ActiveSync device, per month
DNSHostingRenew Price to renew one year of DNS hosting
RGP Price to redeem one domain name that is in
Redemption Grace Period (RGP) status. Once
redeemed, you must also pay the registration renewal
fee for this name.
ExtendedRGP Price to redeem one domain name that is in Extended
RGP status. Once redeemed, you must also pay the
registration renewal fee for this name.
POPStorage Price for one unit of extra POP storage, for one year
POPStorageRenew Price to renew one year of extra POP storage, for one
year
POPRenew Price to renew POP service for one year, for one 10-
mailbox POP pak
DotNameEmail Price for one year of email forwarding by the .name
Registry, for one domain name
DotNameRegMailRenew Price to renew one year of registration and email
forwarding by the .name Registry
EmailForwardingRenew Price to renew our email forwarding service, for one
year and one domain name
URLForwardingRenew Price to renew our URL forwarding service, for one
year and one domain name
WPPSRenew Price to renew RCOM Shield for one year, for one
domain
ProductType Product ID number
Product Product name
ProductEnabled Enabled status of this product
Price Price of this product. Both Email Forwarding and URL
Forwarding are yearly subscriptions.
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than
0 check the Err(1 to ErrCount) values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be
presented as is back to the client.
Done True indicates this entire response has reached you
successfully.
Notes
3/13/09 285
Example
The following query requests for a subaccount of rcompartnerid, subaccount 154-dz-5567. The query
specifies prices for all domain name products and, by using the Action=Manage parameter, specifies that the
prices for the subaccount should be updated. Finally, the query requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?Command=GETSUBACCOUNTDETAILS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=154-dz-5567&action=manage&AcctType=retail&
comprice=19&comrenew=20&comtransfer=21&netprice=19&netrenew=20&nettransfer=21&
orgprice=19&orgrenew=20&orgtransfer=21&infoprice=19&inforenew=20&infotransfer=21&
ccprice=69&ccrenew=69&cctransfer=69&bizprice=19&bizrenew=20&biztransfer=21&
tvprice=69&tvrenew=69&tvtransfer=69&wsprice=19&wsrenew=20&wstransfer=21&
usprice=19&usrenew=20&ustransfer=21&bzprice=69&bzrenew=69&bztransfer=69&
nuprice=69&nurenew=69&nutransfer=69&responsetype=xml
The response lists the prices given in the query for each of the domain name products, and then lists identification
information and the updated prices for subaccount 154-dz-5567:
<SubAccountsManage>
<Action>MANAGE</Action>
<Set>
<SubAccount>154-dz-5567</SubAccount>
<AcctType>retail</AcctType>
<Prices>
<price tld="com" id="0" prod="10">19</price>
<price tld="net" id="1" prod="10">19</price>
<price tld="org" id="2" prod="10">19</price>
.
.
.
</Prices>
<data-errors />
</Set>
<Get>
<PartyID>{8D504DD5-C773-41C4-83F6-4495CA479103}</PartyID>
<pricestructure>
<product>
<tld>com</tld>
<registerprice>19</registerprice>
<registerenabled>True</registerenabled>
<renewprice>20</renewprice>
<renewenabled>True</renewenabled>
<transferprice>21</transferprice>
<transferenabled>True</transferenabled>
</product>
<product>
<tld>net</tld>
3/13/09 286
</product>
<product>
<tld>org</tld>
</product>
.
.
.
</pricestructure>
</Get>
</SubAccountsManage>
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTDETAILS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
DeleteSubaccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 287
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetSubAccountPassword
Description
Definition
Get the password for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the password for a domain name that belongs to your account. The password is e-
mailed to the Registrant contact address.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

values.
3/13/09 288
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetSubAccountPassword

client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the password for domain partnerdomain.com, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetSubAccountPassword&
The 0 value for ErrCount indicates that the request has been processed successfully. The password is e-mailed
to the registrant almost instantly.
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 289
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetSubAccounts
GetSubAccounts
Description
Definition
List subaccounts.
Usage
Use this command to list subaccounts for an account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ListBy Optional Sorting parameter. Options are LName, EMailAddress, 12
LoginID.
StartLetter Optional First letter of the ListBy value 1
StartPosition Optional First return value in the list generated with the ListBy and 7
StartLetter parameters. Maximum number of subaccounts
returned per query is 25.
XML.

PartyID Party identification number expressed as 32 hexadecimal characters, hyphenated
LoginID Login ID of the subaccount
DomainCount Number of domains in this subaccount
Account Subaccount ID number in NNN-aa-NNNN format.
3/13/09 290

Reseller Reseller=0 indicates that this subaccount is a retail account; Reseller=1 indicates
this subaccount is a reseller account
Count Number of subaccounts in this account that fit the ListBy and StartLetter criteria
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of subaccounts for account rcompartnerid. It specifies that the return values
should be listed by last name, starting with the letter D, and starting with the seventh subaccount in that list.
Finally, the string requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getsubaccounts&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ListBy=LName&StartLetter=D&StartPosition=7&
responsetype=xml
The response indicates that account rcompartnerid has 12 subaccounts that fit the parameters, and returns the
seventh through twelfth subaccounts in that list:
<SubAccounts>
<SubAccount>
<PartyID>{AFCFAEC0-2FB6-4512-B043-EE6653618E1F}</PartyID>
<LoginID>resellsub</LoginID>
<Account>030-hi-7080</Account>
<FName>john</FName>
<LName>doe</LName>
</SubAccount>
.
.
.
<SubAccount>
<PartyID>{C5D65CB8-1522-422A-9B78-D004AF13ADF0}</PartyID>
<LoginID>testok</LoginID>
<Account>850-tn-1053</Account>
</SubAccount>
<Count>1</Count>
</SubAccounts>
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTS</Command>
3/13/09 291
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
DeleteContact
DeleteSubaccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetTransHistory
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 292
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetSubaccountsDetailList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of subaccounts, and contact information for their owners.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve contact information for your subaccounts.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

LoginID Subaccount ID
FName First name of the subaccount owner
LName Last name of the subaccount owner
EMailAddress Email address of the subaccount owner
OrganizationName Organization of the subaccount owner
URL URL of the subaccount owner’s business
JobTitle Job title of the subaccount owner
Address1 Street address of the subaccount owner’s address, first line
Address2 Street address of the subaccount owner’s address, second line
City Subaccount owner’s city
3/13/09 293

StateProvince Subaccount owner’s state or province
PostalCode Subaccount owner’s postal code
Country Subaccount owner’s country
Phone Subaccount owner’s phone number
Fax Subaccount owner’s fax number
PhoneExt Extension of subaccount owner’s phone number
Reseller Reseller status. 1 indicates this is a reseller subaccount; 0 indicates retail.
Password If this is a retail account, the account password
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of the subaccounts of account rcompartnerid, with owners’ contact
information, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetSubaccountsDetailList&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ResponseType=xml
The response is a list of subaccounts with the owner information:
<SubAccountDetailList>
<SubAccount>
<LoginID />
<FName>john</FName>
<LName>doe</LName>
<URL />
<JobTitle>Tester</JobTitle>
<Address2 />
<Fax>9995559998</Fax>
<PhoneExt />
</SubAccount>
<SubAccount>
3/13/09 294
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<URL />
<Address2 />
<Fax>9995559998</Fax>
<PhoneExt />
</SubAccount>
.
.
.
<SubAccount>
<LoginID>testok</LoginID>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<URL />
<Address2 />
<Fax>9995559998</Fax>
<PhoneExt />
</SubAccount>
<SubAccounts>15</SubAccounts>
</SubAccountDetailList>
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTSDETAILLIST</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetSubAccounts
SubAccountDomains
3/13/09 295
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetTLDList
GetTLDList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the TLDs that you offer.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the TLDs that you offer. If you have not specifically authorized TLDs then
this command returns all TLDs offered by us.
Use the AuthorizeTLD command to authorize TLDs and the RemoveTLD command to remove TLDs from
authorized status for your account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

TLDX Top-level domain name (extension). If ResponseType=text or html, each entry is
indexed X.
TLDCount Number of TLDs listed in this response (that is, the number of TLDs authorized by
this account)
values.
3/13/09 296

client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of TLDs authorized for this account, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=gettldlist&
<tldlist>
<tld>
<tld>com</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>net</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>org</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>us</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>info</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>biz</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>co.uk</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>org.uk</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>de</tld>
</tld>
<tldcount>9</tldcount>
</tldlist>
<Command>GETTLDLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod />
3/13/09 297
<Site />
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AuthorizeTLD
PE_SetPricing
RemoveTLD
3/13/09 298
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetTransHistory
GetTransHistory
Description
Definition
Return a list of up to 25 transactions in an account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve an overview of transactions.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
StartPosition Optional; default is 1 Return sets of 25 records in reverse chronological 4
order. For example, StartPosition=26 returns the
26th through 50th most recent transactions.
Defaults to 1.
StartDate Optional; if omitted, six Beginning date of transactions to return. Must be 10
months of orders are no more than six months before EndDate.
returned Permitted format is MM/DD/YYYY
EndDate Optional; default is End date of transactions to return. Must be no 10
today’s date more than six months after StartDate. Permitted
format is MM/DD/YYYY
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 299

AdjustedBeginDate Start date for this response
AdjustedEndDate End date for this response
FName First (given) name
LName Last (family) name
PartyID Party identification number. Format is 32 hexadecimal characters,
hyphenated, in curly braces
CurrentStartPosition Start position of this response, in the reverse chronological list of
transactions
RecordCount Number of transactions in the transaction history
NewStartPosition Start position of the next response, in the reverse chronological list of
transactions
OldStartPosition Start position of the previous response, in the reverse chronological list of
transactions
Trans-Date Time stamp indicates when the transaction was submitted to our accounting
system
Amount Amount of the transaction, $US
TransDescription Word description of this transaction
TransType Identification number of this transaction type. Values are:
1 Order
2 Debit Credit Card
3 Credit Credit Card
4 Refill Reseller Account
5 Check Refill
7 Credit Reseller Balance
6 Debit Reseller Balance
8 Transfer Order
9 Reverse Refill
10 Refund and Reverse Commissions
11 Transfer from commission account
12 Commission account cashout
16 Sales Commission
17 CCTransaction Fee
20 Refund and Reverse Commissions with Charge Back
21 Charge Back
22 Reverse Commission
23 Reverse Commission with Charge Back
26 Activation Fee
28 Refill Service Convenience Charge
32 Refill Reseller Account (No Service Charge)
LinkValue Used in XML to build links to individual orders.
OrderID Order identification number, a nine-digit number
OrderProcessFlag True indicates the order has been successfully processed.
Balance Balance in the account following this transaction.
ComBalance Commission balance following this transaction.
TransStatus Status of the transaction. Options are:
1 Ready for billing (Processing in UI)
2 Transaction failed (Failed in UI)
3 Transaction successful (Successful in UI)
6 Void (Voided in UI)
Language Language
3/13/09 300

ErrCount) values.
the client.
ResponseCount Response count
MinPeriod Minimum registration period, for domain name purchases
MaxPeriod Maximum registration period, for domain name purchases
Server Name of server
Site Name of site
IsLockable Is this a lockable domain name?
IsRealTimeTLD Is this a TLD that supports real-time purchase?
TimeDifference Time difference between end user and our server
ExecTime Time to execute this API query
Notes
Example
The following query requests the transaction history for account rcompartnerid, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetTransHistory&
By default, the response gives a summary of the 25 most recent transactions:
<GetTransHistory>
<AdjustedBeginDate />
<AdjustedEndDate />
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<PartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</PartyID>
<CurrentStartPosition>1</CurrentStartPosition>
<RecordCount>396</RecordCount>
<OldStartPosition>0</OldStartPosition>
<TransHistory>
<Transaction>
<Trans-Date>7/18/2007 1:25:11 PM</Trans-Date>
<Amount>-$4.40</Amount>
<TransDescription>Order</TransDescription>
<TransType>1</TransType>
<LinkValue>
OrderDetail.asp?OrderID=157385793&OrderProcess=Successful
</LinkValue>
3/13/09 301
<Balance>$7,028.39</Balance>
<ComBalance />
<TransStatus>Successful</TransStatus>
</Transaction>
<Transaction>
<Trans-Date>7/16/2007 2:05:01 AM</Trans-Date>
<Amount>-$8.95</Amount>
<TransDescription>Order</TransDescription>
<TransType>1</TransType>
<LinkValue>
OrderDetail.asp?OrderID=157385407&OrderProcess=Successful
</LinkValue>
<Balance>$7,032.79</Balance>
<ComBalance />
<TransStatus>Successful</TransStatus>
</Transaction>
.
.
.
</TransHistory>
</GetTransHistory>
<Command>GETTRANSHISTORY</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
RefillAccount
RPT_GetReport
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 302
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetWhoisContact
GetWhoisContact
Description
Definition
Get Whois contact information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to get contact information for any domain name registered through Register.com or its
resellers.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

RegistrarHold The enabled status of a domain. If RegistrarHold is True, the
domain is disabled.
ContactType Type of contact data being returned
RegistrantOrganization Organization information
RegistrantFName First name
3/13/09 303

RegistrantLName Last name
RegistrantAddress1 Address line 1
RegistrantAddress2 Address line 2
RegistrantCity City
RegistrantStateProvince State or province
RegistrantPostalCode Postal Code
RegistrantCountry Country
RegistrantPhone Phone number
RegistrantFax Fax number
RegistrantEmailAddress Email address
Whoisregistrar Registrar for the name
Whoisupdated-by Registrar that last updated the Whois info
Whoisstatus Status of the name
Whoisupdated-date Date of last update
Whoiscreated-date Creation date for the name
Whoisregistration-expiration-date Current expiration date
Whoiscreated-by Registrar that created the information for the name
WhoisnameserverCount Number of name servers associated with this name
WhoisnameserverX Name servers. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check
the Err(1 to ErrCount) values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented
as is back to the client.
successfully.
Notes
• If additional contact types are returned other than Registrant they will be "ContactType" Technical,
Administrative or Billing.
Example
The following query requests the whois contact information for partnerdomain.com, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=getwhoiscontact&
<GetWhoisContacts>
3/13/09 304
<domainname sld="partnerdomain" tld="com">partnerdomain.com</domainname>

<contacts>
<contact ContactType="Registrant">
<Organization>'Partner Domains Inc.'</Organization>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<Address1>'111 Main St.'</Address1>
<Address2 />
<City>'Hometown'</City>
<StateProvince />
<PostalCode />
<Country>'UNITED STATES'</Country>
<Phone>'555-555-5555'</Phone>
<Fax />
</contact>
<contact ContactType="Administrative">
.
.
.
</contact>
<contact ContactType="Billing">
.
.
.
</contact>
<contact ContactType="Technical">
.
.
.
</contact>
</contacts>
<epp-info>
.
.
.
</epp-info>
<StatusValues>True</StatusValues>
</GetWhoisContacts>
.
.
.
Related commands
AddContact
Contacts
GetAddressBook
GetContacts
GetExtAttributes
GetResellerInfo
GetServiceContact
Preconfigure
3/13/09 305
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: GetWPPSInfo
GetWPPSInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve the RCOM Shield (Whois privacy protection) status and contact information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve RCOM Shield status for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

DomainNameID Domain name ID number, from our database
WPPSAllowed Whether RCOM Shield is available for this TLD
WPPSExists Whether this domain has an RCOM Shield subscription
3/13/09 306

WPPSEnabled Whether RCOM Shield is enabled for this domain
WPPSExpDate Expiration date for this domain’s RCOM Shield subscription
WPPSAutoRenew Whether auto-renew is enabled for this domain’s RCOM Shield subscription
WPPSPrice Yearly fee for this domain’s RCOM Shield subscription
ContactType The contact type for this set of contact information
Organization The organization name for this contact
FName First name for this contact
LName Last name for this contact
Address1 Address, first line, for this contact
Address2 Address, second line, for this contact
City City for this contact
StateProvince State or province for this contact
PostalCode Postal code for this contact
Country Country for this contact
Phone Phone number for this contact
Fax Fax number for this contact
EmailAddress Email address for this contact
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests RCOM Shield settings for partnerdomain.com and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=GetWPPSInfo&
In the response, the RCOM Shield status information, and the ErrCount value 0, confirm that the query was
successful:
<GetWPPSInfo>
<domainname sld="partnerdomain" tld="com" domainnameid="152533676">
partnerdomain.com
</domainname>
<WPPSAllowed>1</WPPSAllowed>
<WPPSExists>1</WPPSExists>
<WPPSEnabled>1</WPPSEnabled>
<WPPSExpDate>Nov 26, 2004</WPPSExpDate>
3/13/09 307
<WPPSAutoRenew>No</WPPSAutoRenew>
<WPPSPrice>$6.00</WPPSPrice>
<contacts>
<contact ContactType="Administrative">
<Organization>Partner Domains Inc.</Organization>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<Address2 />
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
</contact>
.
.
.
<contact ContactType="WPPS">
<Organization>Whois Privacy Protection Service, Inc.</Organization>
<FName>Whois</FName>
<LName>Agent</LName>
<Address1>PMB 368, 14150 NE 20th St - F1</Address1>
<Address2>C/O partnerdomain.com</Address2>
<Phone>+1.4252740657</Phone>
<Fax>+1.4256960234</Fax>
</contact>
</contacts>
</GetWPPSInfo>
<Command>GETWPPSINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DisableServices
EnableServices
PurchaseServices
ServiceSelect
3/13/09 308
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_CancelAccount
HE_CancelAccount
Description
Definition
Flag a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account for deactivation at the end of the current billing cycle.
Usage
Use this command to cancel a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account. Cancellation is effective at the end of the
current billing cycle.
Availability
Constraints
• The Hosted Microsoft Exchange account must belong to this domain name account.
Input parameters

size
Account Required Name of Hosted Microsoft Exchange account to be 10
deleted. Permitted format is HXNNNNN
Enable Optional; default is Should this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account 1
True remain active? Permitted values are False (disable
immediately) or True (leave enabled).
Delete Optional; default is Should this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account be 5
False cancelled at the end of the current billing period?
True Delete at the end of current bill cycle
False Do not delete at the end of bill cycle
3/13/09 309

size
DropDownReason Required if Reason for cancelling. Permitted values are: 1
Delete=True 1 No longer needed
2 Not as expected
3 Price/value
4 Technical issue
5 Support issue
6 Unsupported functionality
7 Other reason not listed
FreeFormReason Required if User-supplied text explaining cancellation 250
Delete=True
HTML, or XML.

AccountStatus Status of this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account. Possible values are:
1 Active
4 Disabled for nonpayment
5 Disabled for other reason
Cancel Is this account now flagged for deletion at the end of the current billing period?
Success Was this query successful?
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query “flags” an account so that it will be cancelled at the end of the current billing period, and sends
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_CANCELACCOUNT&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=HX69635&delete=true&
dropdownreason=1&freeformreason=finished&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a Success value True and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was successful:
<AccountStatus>1</AccountStatus>
<cancel>True</cancel>
<success>true</success>
3/13/09 310
<Command>HE_CANCELACCOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_ChangePassword
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetPricing
HE_UpgradeAccount
3/13/09 311
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_ChangePassword
HE_ChangePassword
Description
Definition
Change the password for your Hosted Microsoft Exchange account.
Usage
Use this command to change the password for your Hosted Microsoft Exchange account.
Availability
Constraints
• The password must contain at least one letter, and one number or special character.
Input parameters

size
Account Required Hosted Microsoft Exchange account name. Permitted 12
format is HXNNNNN
NewPW Required New password for your Hosted Microsoft Exchange 14
account name. Permitted passwords contain 6 to 14
characters, including at least one letter, and at least one
number or non-alphanumeric character. Permitted non-
alphanumeric characters are ! @ $ ^ * ( ) _ = - [ ] |
ConfirmNewPW Required Repeat the new password for your Hosted Microsoft 14
Exchange account name
or XML.
3/13/09 312

1 Active
Success True indicates that the query was successful.
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query changes the password for a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_ChangePassword&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=HX57904&NewPW=tester1&
ConfirmNewPW=tester1&responsetype=xml&
In the response, a Success value True and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was successful:
<success>True</success>
<Command>HE_CHANGEPASSWORD</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
3/13/09 313
Related commands
HE_CancelAccount
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetPricing
HE_UpgradeAccount
3/13/09 314
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_CreateAccount
HE_CreateAccount
Description
Definition
Create a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account using our real-time order processing.
Usage
Use this command to create a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account using our real-time order processing.
To upgrade an existing Hosted Microsoft Exchange account in real time, use the HE_UpgradeAccount command.
To purchase or upgrade a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account using our shopping cart, use the AddToCart
command.
To downgrade a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, use the HE_UpgradeAccount command.
Availability
Constraints
• Subscription fees for Hosted Microsoft Exchange come from your reseller balance; we do not support
credit card payments for this product.
Input parameters

size
SLD Required Second-level domain name to associate with this 63
Hosted Microsoft Exchange account.
MailboxQty Required Number of mailboxes to support. Permitted values are 1 3
to 255.
ExtraStorageQty Required Number of units of extra storage to purchase. Each unit 3
is 100MB and is shared among all mailboxes in this
Hosted Microsoft Exchange account. Permitted values
are 0 to 255.
BlackBerryQty Required Number of BlackBerry devices to support. Permitted 3
values are 0 to 255.
3/13/09 315

size
GoodLinkQty Required Number of Good Mobile Messaging devices to support. 3
ActiveSyncQty Required Number of Microsoft ActiveSync devices to support. 3
or XML.

Mailboxes Number of Hosted Microsoft Exchange mailboxes purchased in this
order
BlackBerrys Number of BlackBerry subscriptions purchased in this order
GoodLinks Number of Good Mobile Messaging subscriptions purchased in this
order
ActiveSyncs Number of ActiveSync subscriptions purchased in this order
ExtraStorage Number of extra storage units purchased in this order
TotalPrice Total charges for this order
SMTPProxy SMTP proxy address for this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account
AccountID Hosted Microsoft Exchange account identification number, used by the
Exchange servers to identify this account
HostedExchangeLoginID Login ID for this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, used for most
management and access tasks
HostedExchangePassword Login password for this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, used for
most management and access tasks
OrderID Order ID for this purchase
Success Success status for this purchase
back to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query purchases Hosted Microsoft Exchange and add-ons, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_CreateAccount&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&SLD=partnerdomain&TLD=com&MailboxQty=7&
ExtraStorageQty=6&BlackBerryQty=3&GoodLinkQty=2&ActiveSyncQty=1&responsetype=xml
3/13/09 316
In the response, a Hosted Microsoft Exchange account name, and an ErrCount value 0, confirm that the query
was successful:
<Mailboxes>7</Mailboxes>
<BlackBerrys>3</BlackBerrys>
<GoodLinks>2</GoodLinks>
<ActiveSyncs>1</ActiveSyncs>
<ExtraStorage>6</ExtraStorage>
<TotalPrice>363</TotalPrice>
<SMTPProxy>smtp14.msoutlookonline.net</SMTPProxy>
<HostedExchangeID>1234567</HostedExchageID>
<HostedExchangeLoginID>HX01234</HostedExchangeLoginID>
<HostedExchangePassword>F13EC56</HostedExchangePassword>
<Command>HE_CREATEACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_CancelAccount
HE_ChangePassword
HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetPricing
HE_UpgradeAccount
3/13/09 317
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_GetAccountDetails
Description
Definition
Retrieve details for one Hosted Microsoft Exchange account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve details for one Hosted Microsoft Exchange account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
Account Required Hosted Microsoft Exchange account name. Permitted 10
format is HXNNNNN
XML.

HostedExchangeID Hosted Microsoft Exchange identification number, used by us to identify this
account
AccountID Hosted Microsoft Exchange account identification number, used by the
Exchange servers to identify this account
LoginID Account name of this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, used by the cus-
tomer to retrieve mail and manage this account
Password Hosted Microsoft Exchange password
SignupDate Date on which this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account was created
3/13/09 318

TerminateDate Date on which this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account is flagged for deletion
Terminate Is this Hosted Microsoft Exchange flagged for deletion?
Status Status of this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account. Possible values are:
1 Active
Plan Hosted Microsoft Exchange plan represented by this account
Mailboxes Number of mailboxes in this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account
BlackBerry Number of BlackBerry devices currently subscribed in this Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account
GoodLink Number of Good Mobile Messaging devices currently subscribed in this
Hosted Microsoft Exchange account
ActiveSync Number of ActiveSync devices currently subscribed in this Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account
ExtraStorage Number of 100MB units of extra storage currently subscribed in this Hosted
Microsoft Exchange account. Extra storage space is shared among all your
mailboxes.
BillCycleID Billing cycle identification number. 1 represents a one-month billing cycle
SMTPProxy Primary domain name for this account.
NextBillingDate Next billing date
NextBillingPeriod Next billing period, in months
CurrentBillingPeriod Current billing period, in months
BillingAmount Amount that will be billed to your account on the next bill date
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves account details for one Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_GetAccountDetails&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=HX57904&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the presence of account information and an ErrCount value 0 indicates that the query was
successful:
<Account>
<HostedExchangeID>24</HostedExchangeID>
<AccountID>1056747</AccountID>
3/13/09 319
<loginid>HX57904</loginid>
<password>3932293</password>
<SignupDate>1/8/2007 9:33:13 AM</SignupDate>
<TerminateDate />
<Terminate>False</Terminate>
<status>1</status>
<Plan>MSExchange_PLR (Gold) Copy</Plan>
<MailBoxes>100</MailBoxes>
<BlackBerry>2</BlackBerry>
<GoodLink>2</GoodLink>
<ActiveSync>2</ActiveSync>
<ExtraStorage>2</ExtraStorage>
<BillCycleID>1</BillCycleID>
<NextBillingDate>2/8/2007</NextBillingDate>
<NextBillingPeriod>1</NextBillingPeriod>
<CurrentBillingPeriod>1</CurrentBillingPeriod>
<BillingAmount>870</BillingAmount>
</Account>
<Command>HE_GETACCOUNTDETAILS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_CancelAccount
HE_ChangePassword
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetPricing
HE_UpgradeAccount
3/13/09 320
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetAccounts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of Hosted Microsoft Exchange accounts in this domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the Hosted Microsoft Exchange accounts in this domain name account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

LoginID Login ID for this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account
Password Password for this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account
SignupDate Date on which this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account was created
TerminateDate If this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account has been tagged for cancellation, the
date on which service will terminate
Terminate Has this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account been tagged for cancellation?
Status Status of this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account. Return values are:
1 Active
Plan Hosted Microsoft Exchange plan represented by this account
3/13/09 321

Mailboxes Number of mailboxes in this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account
BlackBerry Number of BlackBerry devices currently supported in this Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account
GoodLink Number of Good Mobile Messaging devices currently supported in this Hosted
Microsoft Exchange account
ActiveSync Number of ActiveSync devices currently supported in this Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account
ExtraStorage Number of 100MB units of extra storage currently subscribed in this Hosted
Microsoft Exchange account. Extra storage space is shared among all your mail-
boxes.
BillCycleID Billing cycle identification number. 1 represents a one-month billing cycle
SMTPProxy Primary domain name for this account.
NextBillingDate Next billing date
Count Number of Hosted Microsoft Exchange accounts in this domain name account.
ErrCount) values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves Hosted Microsoft Exchange accounts in a domain name account, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_GETAccounts&
In the response, a list of Hosted Microsoft Exchange accounts and an ErrCount value 0, indicate that the query
was successful:
<ExchangeAccounts>
<Account>
<LoginID>HX60270</LoginID>
<Password>6DF9968</Password>
<SignupDate>1/17/2007 5:55:39 PM</SignupDate>
<TerminateDate />
<Status>1</Status>
<Blackberry>1</Blackberry>
<goodlink>1</goodlink>
<Activesync>1</Activesync>
3/13/09 322
<Extrastorage>1</Extrastorage>
<BillcycleID>1</BillcycleID>
</Account>
<Account>
<LoginID>HX04967</LoginID>
<Password>C2EA47A</Password>
<SignupDate>1/23/2007 5:26:26 PM</SignupDate>
<TerminateDate />
<Status>1</Status>
<goodlink>3</goodlink>
<Activesync>4</Activesync>
<Extrastorage>1</Extrastorage>
<BillcycleID>1</BillcycleID>
</Account>
.
.
.
</ExchangeAccounts>
<Count>8</Count>
<Command>HE_GETACCOUNTS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_CancelAccount
HE_ChangePassword
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetPricing
HE_UpgradeAccount
3/13/09 323
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_GetPricing
HE_GetPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve the wholesale pricing that this account pays for Hosted Microsoft Exchange email services.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the wholesale subscription rates and setup fees that this account pays for Hosted
Microsoft Exchange Mail and its supported devices.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ShowAll Optional; Show pricing for all quantities of mailboxes? Permitted 1
default is 1 values are:
0 Show pricing for one quantity (GetQty value)
1 Show prices for all mailbox quantities
GetQty Required if Return the per-mailbox price for this number of 3
ShowAll=0 mailboxes. Permitted values are 1 to 255
HTML, or XML.

Qty Number of Hosted Exchange mailboxes in this package
Price Price per mailbox in this package
AdditionalStorage Price for 100MB extra storage. When you purchase one unit of extra storage,
100MB is shared among all mailboxes.
BlackBerry Monthly fee for BlackBerry support, per mailbox
3/13/09 324

GoodLink Monthly fee for GoodLink support, per mailbox
ActiveSync Monthly fee for ActiveSync support, per mailbox
BlackBerrySetup One-time setup fee for BlackBerry support, per mailbox
GoodLinkSetup One-time setup fee for GoodLink support, per mailbox
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the prices this account pays for Hosted Microsoft Exchange, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_GETPRICING&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ShowAll=1&responsetype=xml&
In the response, a list of Hosted Microsoft Exchange components and their prices, and an ErrCount value 0,
indicate that the query was successful:
<MailBoxes>
<MailBox>
<QTY>1</QTY>
<Price>8.5</Price>
</MailBox>
<MailBox>
<QTY>3</QTY>
<Price>8</Price>
</MailBox>
<MailBox>
<QTY>5</QTY>
<Price>8</Price>
</MailBox>
<MailBox>
<QTY>10</QTY>
<Price>8</Price>
</MailBox>
<MailBox>
<QTY>25</QTY>
<Price>8</Price>
</MailBox>
<MailBox>
<QTY>50</QTY>
<Price>8</Price>
</MailBox>
3/13/09 325
<MailBox>
<QTY>100</QTY>
<Price>8</Price>
</MailBox>
</MailBoxes>
<Addons>
<AdditionalStorage>5</AdditionalStorage>
<Goodlink>19</Goodlink>
<ActiveSync>2</ActiveSync>
</Addons>
<SetupFees>
<BlackberrySetup>50</BlackberrySetup>
<GoodlinkSetup>30</GoodlinkSetup>
</SetupFees>
<Command>HE_GETPRICING</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_CancelAccount
HE_ChangePassword
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetAccounts
HE_UpgradeAccount
3/13/09 326
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: HE_UpgradeAccount
HE_UpgradeAccount
Description
Definition
Upgrade or downgrade an existing Hosted Microsoft Exchange account in real time.
Usage
Use this command to upgrade or downgrade an existing Hosted Microsoft Exchange account in real time.
If you use our shopping cart, you can upgrade an existing Hosted Microsoft Exchange account using the
AddToCart command.
Availability
Constraints
• The Hosted Microsoft Exchange account must belong to this account.
Input parameters

size
Account Required Hosted Microsoft Exchange login ID. Permitted format is 12
HXNNNNN
3/13/09 327

size
ItemNameX At least one Permitted values are: 12
X = 1 to ItemNameX is Mailboxes
maximum 5 Required ExtraStorage (1 unit of storage is 100MB, shared
among all mailboxes in this Hosted Microsoft
Exchange account)
BlackBerry
GoodLink
ActiveSync
ItemLimitX Required New number of mailboxes, storage units, or devices to 3
X = 1 to subscribe to (this is the number you will have after this
maximum 5 query string is processed). Permitted values are:
1 through 255 for Mailboxes
0 through 255 for other items
XML.

1 Active
Mailboxes Final number of mailboxes in this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account, after the
changes in this query string
BlackBerry Final number of BlackBerry devices supported, after changes
GoodLink Final number of Good Mobile Messenger devices supported, after changes
ActiveSync Final number of ActiveSync devices supported, after changes
ExtraStorage Final number of 100MB units of extra storage, after changes
OrderID Order ID number for the upgrades in this query string
UpgradePrice Amount, in $US, charged for this order, including one-time setup fees
NewPrice New monthly billing rate, in $US, for this Hosted Microsoft Exchange account. This
number includes monthly subscription fees for all services, but not one-time setup
fees. This new amount will apply starting on the next monthly billing date.
Success True indicates that this query was successful
Upgrade True indicates that the query string included upgrades, and that they were success-
ful
Downgrade True indicates that the query string included downgrades, and that they were suc-
cessful
values.
ent.
3/13/09 328
Notes
Example
The following query downgrades the ActiveSync subscription, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=HE_UPGRADEACCOUNT&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=HX57904&
ItemName1=ActiveSync&ItemLimit1=2&DoAll=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success value True and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<upgraded>true</upgraded>
<Command>HE_UPGRADEACCOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_CancelAccount
HE_ChangePassword
HE_CreateAccount
HE_GetAccounts
HE_GetPricing
3/13/09 329
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: InsertNewOrder
InsertNewOrder
Description
Definition
Insert a checkout order of items in the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command if you use our shopping cart technology.
This command checks out the items in a shopping cart that are in A (active) status, and puts the order in a queue.
Purchase, a similar command, completes the purchase of selected products in real time, without using our
shopping cart or waiting for the order processing queue.
Availability
Constraints
• If the shopping cart is empty, ItemCount must equal 1 or the query will return an error message.
Input parameters

size
EndUserIP Required End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud checking, as part 15
of our order processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ItemCount Optional Number of items ready to purchase. All with a status of A 4
(active)
XML.
3/13/09 330

values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query requests purchase of the contents of the shopping cart, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=insertneworder&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&EndUserIP=127.0.0.1&responsetype=xml
The response confirms a successful checkout by sending an order ID number
<ProdType10>10</ProdType10>
<Command>INSERTNEWORDER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 331
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
AddToCart
Check
DeleteFromCart
Extend
Extend_RGP
ExtendDomainDNS
GetDomainExp
GetExtendInfo
GetRenew
Purchase
PurchasePreview
SetRenew
UpdateCart
3/13/09 332
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ModifyNS
ModifyNS
Description
Definition
Modify name servers for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command if you want to use name servers that are different than the name servers currently set for a
domain.
ModifyNS updates DNS records at the Registry and in the registrar’s database. ModifyNSHosting, a similar
command, redirects to another set of name servers without updating the Registry records.
Availability
Constraints
• The query must pass name servers that are registered at NSI.
• Name servers for .us names must be located in the United States.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
3/13/09 333

size
UseDNS Either To switch to our name servers, supply UseDNS=Default 4
UseDNS or
NSX is
Required
NSX Either To switch to custom name servers or no name servers, 60
X=1 to UseDNS or supply the NSX parameter. Maximum of 12 name servers
maximum of 12 NSX is can be set.
Required To designate custom name servers, supply the use name, for
example, NS1=dns01.gpn.register.com
To designate no name servers, supply an empty parameter:
NS1=
XML.

values.
ent.
Notes
• To set name servers to Register.com’s set the UseDNS=ours param and don't pass NS(x) name servers.
To set name servers to your name servers, set NSX=YourNameServerX and don't pass UseDNS=default.
You can set up to 12 of your own name servers.
Example
The following query changes the name servers for partnerdomain.com to dns01.gpn.register.com and
dns02.gpn.register.com, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=modifyns&
ns1=dns01.gpn.register.com&ns2=dns02.gpn.register.com&responsetype=xml
The reponse confirms that the change of name servers was successful:
3/13/09 334
<Command>MODIFYNS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 335
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ModifyNSHosting
ModifyNSHosting
Description
Definition
Modify the name-server redirect settings for a domain name.
Usage
ModifyNSHosting redirects to another set of name servers without updating the Registry records. ModifyNS, a
similar command, updates name server records at the Registry and in the registrar’s database.
Availability
Constraints
• The name server cited in the query must exist.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
NSX Required Name server—maximum of 12 can be set. Permitted value is 60
X=1 to 12 the use name of the name server, for example,
NS1=dns01.gpn.register.com
XML.

3/13/09 336
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ModifyNSHosting

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query designates dns01.gpn.register.com as the name server for partnerdomain.com, and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=modifynshosting&
ns1=dns01.gpn.register.com&responsetype=xml
- <interface-response>
<Command>MODIFYNSHOSTING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- <debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNS
RegisterNameServer
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 337
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ModifyPOP3
ModifyPOP3
Description
Definition
Modify POP account password.
Usage
Use this command to change the password of one or more POP3 mail accounts in a domain.
Availability
Constraints
• The POP3 service need not be active for the password change to be successful.
• The values of UserName in the query must exist for the domain.
• The value for EmailCount must match the number of UserNames and Passwords in the query.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
EmailCount Required Number of accounts on this domain to update. 2
UserNameX Required POP3 user name to update the password on. 30
X=1 to
EmailCount
3/13/09 338

size
IsAdminX Either Should UserNameX have administrative privileges over all 1
X=1 to IsAdminX or mailboxes associated with this domain name? Administrative
EmailCount PasswordX privileges allow this user to reset the password for
is Required. mailboxes, and delete mailboxes. Permitted values are:
They may be 0 Regular user (can change the password for their own
used mailbox but no one else’s)
together. 1 Administrator (when this user logs on to Webmail and
goes to the admin page, he or she can see all
mailboxes for this domain name, can reset passwords
for any or all mailboxes, and can delete any or all
mailboxes)
PasswordX Either New password for UserNameX’s mailbox. 50
X=1 to IsAdminX or
EmailCount PasswordX
is Required.
They may be
used
together.
XML.

values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that two POP3 passwords change in partnerdomain.com: user name john
should now have password johnpw and user name jane should now have password janepw. The query also
requests that the response be in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=modifypop3&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&emailcount=2&
username1=john&password1=johnpw&username2=jane&password2=janepw&responsetype=xml
3/13/09 339
<Command>MODIFYPOP3</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 340
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: NameSpinner
NameSpinner
Description
Definition
Generate variations of a domain name that you specify, for .com, .net, .tv, and .cc TLDs.
Usage
Use this command to generate variations of the domain name you specify. This command will return TLDs .com,
.net, .tv, and .cc.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
SensitiveContent Optional; Block potentially offensive content? Permitted values 5
default is are True or False. True filters out offensive content.
False
MaxLength Optional; Maximum length of SLD to return. Permitted values are 2
default is 63 numbers 2 to 63.
MaxResults Optional; Maximum number of suggested names to return in 2
default is 20 addition to your input. The number actually returned
may be lower because of the spinning algorithm
developed by the Registry. Permitted values are
numbers 0 to 99.
UseHyphens Optional; Return domain names that include hyphens? Permitted 5
default is values are True or False.
False
UseNumbers Optional; Return domain names that include numbers? Permitted 5
default is True values are True or False.
3/13/09 341

size
Basic Optional; Higher values return suggestions that are built by 6
default is adding prefixes, suffixes, and words to the original
Medium input. Permitted values are Off, Low, Medium, and
High.
Related Optional; Higher values return domain names by interpreting the 6
default is High input semantically and construct suggestions with a
similar meaning. Related=High will find terms that are
synonyms of your input. Permitted values are Off, Low,
Medium, and High.
Similar Optional; Higher values return suggestions that are similar to the 6
default is customer’s input, but not necessarily in meaning.
Medium Similar=High will generate more creative terms, with
a slightly looser relationship to your input, than
Related=High. Permitted values are Off, Low,
Medium, and High.
Topical Optional; Higher values return suggestions that reflect current 6
default is topics and popular words. Permitted values are Off,
Medium Low, Medium, and High.
or XML.

SpinCount Number of SLDs returned in this response
TLDList TLDs returned in this response
Domain name SLD for this set of results
Com Is this SLD available from the .com Registry? Y indicates yes; N indicates no.
ComScore The Registry’s score of how closely this SLD matches the SLD input you supplied in
the query string. Highest possible score is 1000.
Net Is this SLD available from the .net Registry? Y indicates yes; N indicates no.
NetScore The Registry’s score of how closely this SLD matches the SLD input you supplied in
Tv Is this SLD available from the .tv Registry? Y indicates yes; N indicates no.
TvScore The Registry’s score of how closely this SLD matches the SLD input you supplied in
Cc Is this SLD available from the .cc Registry? Y indicates yes; N indicates no.
CcScore The Registry’s score of how closely this SLD matches the SLD input you supplied in
OriginalSLD The SLD value you supplied in the input query string
values.
ent.
3/13/09 342
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves 8 domains that resemble the input SLD hand, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=NameSpinner&
UID=rcompartnerid&PW=rcompartnerpw&SLD=hand&TLD=com&MaxResults=8&
Similar=High&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the presence of spun names and the ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was successful:
<namespin>
<spincount>8</spincount>
<TLDList />
<domains>
<domain name="handsewncurtains" com="n" comscore="835" net="y" netscore="864"
tv="y" tvscore="797" cc="y" ccscore="762" />
<domain name="handicappingclub" com="n" comscore="821" net="y" netscore="851"
<domain name="handingok" com="y" comscore="837" net="y" netscore="810"
<domain name="handsofjustice" com="n" comscore="870" net="n" netscore="844"
<domain name="handoki" com="n" comscore="794" net="y" netscore="824"
<domain name="handinghand" com="y" comscore="820" net="y" netscore="793"
<domain name="handcrafthouselogs" com="y" comscore="810" net="y" netscore="783"
<domain name="handloser" com="n" comscore="844" net="n" netscore="817"
</domains>
</namespin>
<originalsld>hand</originalsld>
<Command>NAMESPINNER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
3/13/09 343
Related commands
AddToCart
Check
Purchase
3/13/09 344
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ParseDomain
ParseDomain
Description
Definition
Separate the domain name into its host, SLD, and TLD.
Usage
Use this command to separate a domain name into its constituent parts.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
PassedDomain Required Full name to parse, including the third level if appropriate 70
XML.

Host Host name
values.
client.
3/13/09 345
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ParseDomain
Notes
Example
The following query separates the domain name www.partnerdomain.com into its Host, SLD, and TLD, and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=parsedomain&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&passeddomain=www.partnerdomain.com&
responsetype=xml
<ParseDomain>
<Host>www</Host>
<TLD>com</TLD>
</ParseDomain>
<Command>PARSEDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
None
3/13/09 346
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetCustomerPricing
Description
Definition
Get retail prices that this account charges to consumers. These are also the prices that this account’s
subaccounts will be charged, unless you change them for each individual subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve prices that you have changed from their default values.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

CPID Pricing engine index, for use by Register.com’s database.
ProductType Product type. Permitted values are:
for domains 10 Domain registration
13 DNS hosting
14 DNS hosting renew
16 Domain renewal
17 Domain redemption grace period (RGP)
19 transfer
41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name Registry
44 .name registration and email forwarding renewal
3/13/09 347

for SSL certificates 20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID
23 SSL certificate - RapidSSL
24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
26 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL
27 SSL certificate - GeoTrustTrueBizID Wildcard
180 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site
181 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro
182 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site EV
183 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro EV
for Web site creation 86 Web Site Creator - Basic
services 87 Web Site Creator - Full
88 Web Site Creator - eCommerce
for email services 35 Additional storage for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box
36 Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB per mailbox
38 POP mail 10-pak
39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
42 Email forwarding by the .name Registry
45 Email forwarding by us
46 Email forwarding by us - renewal
125 Hosted Exchange mailbox
126 Hosted Exchange 100MB extra storage
127 Hosted Exchange BlackBerry
128 Hosted Exchange BlackBerry setup fee
129 Hosted Exchange Good Mobile Messaging (GoodLink)
130 Hosted Exchange Good Mobile Messaging setup fee
131 Hosted Exchange ActiveSync
for all other services 47 URL forwarding
48 URL forwarding - renewal
65 Private label annual subscription
66 Private label annual renewal
72 RCOM Shield (Whois Privacy Protection)
73 RCOM Shield - renewal
ProductDescription Product description. Values are listed under ProductType, above.
TLDID Top-level-domain ID number.
TLD Top-level domain name.
RetailPrice Retail price. Response contains a value only if price overrides the default value.
ResellerPrice Reseller price.
Enabled Enabled state for this TLD. Options are True or False.
ErrCount) values.
client.
3/13/09 348
Notes
Example
The following query requests the price that subaccount giambi charges for transferring a .org domain name,
and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETCUSTOMERPRICING&
uid=giambi&pw=giambipw&ProductType=19&tld=org&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that the price for transferring a .org name is $10.00, and .org transfers are enabled in
this subaccount:
<productstructure>
<product>
<cpid>256759</cpid>
<producttype>19</producttype>
<productdescription>Transfer</productdescription>
<tldid>2</tldid>
<tld>org</tld>
<retailprice />
<resellerprice>10.00</resellerprice>
<enabled>True</enabled>
</product>
</productstructure>
<Command>PE_GETCUSTOMERPRICING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CommissionAccount
GetBalance
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 349
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetDomainPricing
Description
Definition
Get the retail pricing that this account charges for registrations, renewals, and transfers, by top-level domain.
Usage
Use this command when you want a list of retail prices for one top-level domain, for registrations, renewals, and
transfers. To get a list of retail prices for all products offered by this account, use PE_GetRetailPricing.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
UseQtyEngine Optional; Return prices for multiple-year registrations? Permitted 1
default is 0 values are 0 and 1.
Years Optional; Number of years for multiple-year registrations. Permitted 2
default is 1 values are 1, 2, 5, and 10.
XML.

values.
client.
3/13/09 350
Notes
Example
The following query requests the pricing for account rcompartnerid for the various top-level domains, with the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETDOMAINPRICING&
The response indicates that the price of .com domains is $10.00 per year, .net is $10.00 per year, and so on:
<pricestructure>
<product>
<tld>com</tld>
<registerprice>10.00</registerprice>
<renewprice>10.00</renewprice>
<transferprice>10.00</transferprice>
</product>
<product>
<tld>net</tld>
</product>
<product>
<tld>org</tld>
</product>
.
.
.
</pricestructure>
<Command>PE_GETDOMAINPRICING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 351
Related commands
CommissionAccount
GetBalance
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 352
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetPOPPrice
Description
Definition
Retrieve the wholesale price that this account pays for POP mail 10-paks.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the wholesale price that this account pays for POP mail 10-paks.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

Pop Wholesale price this account pays per POP 10-pak
values.
client.
3/13/09 353
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetPOPPrice
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the wholesale price that account rcompartnerid pays for a POP 10-pak, and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETPOPPRICE&
In the response, a pop pricing value and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<pricing>
<pop>18.4015</pop>
</pricing>
<Command>PE_GETPOPPRICE</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetPOP3
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_GetRetailPricing
PE_SetPricing
PurchasePOPBundle
3/13/09 354
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
Description
Definition
Retrieve the wholesale cost that this account pays for a product.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve wholesale pricing information for a single product.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ProductType A Product type. Permitted values are: 63
for domains ProductType 10 Domain registration
(other is Required 13 DNS hosting
ProductTypes 14 DNS hosting renew
follow) 16 Domain renewal
19 transfer
41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name
Registry
ProductType Required Product type. Permitted values are: 63
for SSL 20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
certificates 21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID
(see adjacent 23 SSL certificate - RapidSSL
rows for other 24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
ProductTypes) 26 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL
3/13/09 355

size
for Web site 86 Web Site Creator - Basic
creation services 87 Web Site Creator - Full
(see adjacent 88 Web Site Creator - eCommerce
rows for other
ProductTypes)
for email 35 Additional storage for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box
services 36 Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB per mailbox
(see adjacent 38 POP mail 10-pak
rows for other 39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
ProductTypes) 41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name
Registry
for all other 47 URL forwarding
services 48 URL forwarding - renewal
(see previous 65 Private label annual subscription
rows for other 66 Private label annual renewal
ProductTypes) 72 RCOM Shield (Whois Privacy Protection)
ProductType
is 10, 16, or
19
Years Optional; Year bracket for which to retrieve prices. Permitted values 20
default value is are 1, 2, 5, and 10. For example, Years=2 retrieves
1 prices for registrations of 2 to 4 years.
XML.

Price Wholesale price that the UID pays for this product
ProductEnabled Enabled status of this product
ErrCount) values.
client.
3/13/09 356
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the price for registering a .com domain, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETPRODUCTPRICE&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ProductType=10&tld=com&responsetype=xml
In the response, a price and an enabled status for the product confirm that the query was successful:
<productprice>
<price>8.95</price>
<productenabled>True</productenabled>
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETPRODUCTPRICE</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_GetRetailPricing
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 357
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
Description
Definition
Get the wholesale price that this account pays for one product, and tell whether that product is enabled.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the price of one product. For example, you can use this command to retrieve the
price you pay for registering a .com name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
for domains ProductType 10 Domain registration
(other is Required 13 DNS hosting
19 transfer
Registry
3/13/09 358

size
rows for other
ProductTypes)
ProductTypes) 41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name
Registry
TLD Required for If the ProductType is 10, 16, or 19, specify the TLD for 20
ProductType which you want pricing information.
10, 16, or 19
Years Optional; Retrieve quantity discount information. For some products 3
default is 1 like domains, this value represents the price break for
multi-year registrations. For other products like Hosted
Exchange, it represents the price for multiple units of the
product.
XML.
3/13/09 359

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the price for registration of a .org domain name, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETRESELLERPRICE&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&tld=org&ProductType=10&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that a .org domain name is $10.00 per year:
<productprice>
<price>10.00</price>
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETRESELLERPRICE</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CommissionAccount
GetBalance
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 360
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
Description
Definition
Get the Retail pricing for a specified product, and tell whether the product is enabled. The Retail price is the price
you charge to your retail customers; it is also the price you charge your subaccounts unless you set prices
specifically for each subaccount using commands such as UpdateAccountPricing, GetSubAccountDetails, or
PE_SetPricing.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve pricing for a single product. For example, you can use this command to retrieve the
price for renewing a .org name that you currently have set for one retail subaccount.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
for domains ProductTyp 10 Domain registration
(other e is Required 13 DNS hosting
19 transfer
3/13/09 361

size
rows for other
ProductTypes)
ProductTypes) 41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name Registry
TLD Optional If ProductType is 10, 16, or 19, include the TLD for which 15
you want the retail price setting.
Years Optional Retrieve prices for bulk discounts. In some cases like 3
domains, this value represents the price for multi-year
registrations. In other cases like Hosted Microsoft Exchange,
this value represents the price for multiple units subscribed
concurrently.
XML.
3/13/09 362

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the price for registering a .org name, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETRETAILPRICE&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ProductType=10&responsetype=xml
<productprice>
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETRETAILPRICE</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CommissionAccount
GetBalance
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 363
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetRetailPricing
PE_GetRetailPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve the retail prices that this account charges for all products, and their enabled status.
“Retail” prices apply to retail customers of this account. They also apply to any subaccounts in which the prices the
subaccount pays have not been set for that individual subaccount using a command such as
UpdateAccountPricing, GetSubAccountDetails, or PE_SetPricing.
Usage
Use this command to display the full list of retail prices for this account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
TLDOnly Optional; Use TLDOnly=1 if you want only domain name prices; 20
default is 0 otherwise this command returns prices for domain names
and all other products and services.
Years Optional; Beginning of year range for which to retrieve prices. 20
default value Permitted values are 1, 2, 5, and 10. For example, Years=2
is 1 retrieves prices for registrations of 2 to 4 years.
XML.

3/13/09 364

TLDID Our ID number for this TLD
for domains 10 Domain registration
13 DNS hosting
14 DNS hosting renew
16 Domain renewal
19 transfer
for SSL certifi- 20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
cates 21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID
23 SSL certificate - RapidSSL
24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
for Web site cre- 86 Web Site Creator - Basic
ation services 87 Web Site Creator - Full
88 Web Site Creator - eCommerce
for email ser- 35 Additional storage for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box
vices 36 Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB per mailbox
38 POP mail 10-pak
39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
for all other ser- 47 URL forwarding
vices 48 URL forwarding - renewal
65 Private label annual subscription
66 Private label annual renewal
72 RCOM Shield (Whois Privacy Protection)
values.
ent.
3/13/09 365
Notes
Example
The following query requests the prices that account rcompartnerid is charging for all products, and whether
the products are enabled. It also requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&
command=PE_GetRetailPricing&responsetype=xml
The response lists the prices for all products, and tells whether they are offered in this account:
<pricestructure>
<tld>
<tld>com</tld>
<tldid>0</tldid>
<minimumregistration>1</minimumregistration>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>net</tld>
<tldid>1</tldid>
<minimumregistration>1</minimumregistration>
</tld>
.
.
.
<product>
</product>
<product>
</product>
</pricestructure>
<Command>PE_GETRETAILPRICING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
3/13/09 366
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 367
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetTLDID
PE_GetTLDID
Description
Definition
Retrieve the ID number for a TLD.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the ID number for a TLD.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

TLDID ID number for the TLD specified in the query string.
values.
ent.
3/13/09 368
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_GetTLDID
Notes
Example
The following query requests the ID number for the .org TLD, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_GETTLDID&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&tld=org&responsetype=xml
In the response, a value for the TLDID parameter confirms that the query was successful:
<productid>
<tldid>2</tldid>
</productid>
<Command>PE_GETTLDID</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 369
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PE_SetPricing
PE_SetPricing
Description
Definition
Set retail prices that this account charges for all products, or set the wholesale price for a single product for a
single subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to set retail pricing for all products that this account offers. You can also set the wholesale price
for a single product for a single subaccount.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
TLD Required for Top-level domain name (extension) to set pricing for 15
ProductType
10, 13, 14,
16, 19
PartyID If setting Party ID of the subaccount to set pricing for 40
subaccount
prices, either
PartyID or
LoginID is
Required
LoginID If setting Login ID of the subaccount to set pricing for 20
subaccount
prices, either
PartyID or
LoginID is
Required
3/13/09 370

size
Years Optional; Year-bracket to set prices for. For example, Years=2 sets 2
default is 1 the annual price for domain name registrations of 2 to 4
years; Years=5 sets the annual price for 5 to 9 years.
Permitted values are 1, 2, 5, and 10. You can use only one
Years parameter per query.
ProductTypeX A Product type. Permitted values are: 63
X=1, 2, 3, . . . ProductType 10 Domain registration
is Required 13 DNS hosting
Domains in this 14 DNS hosting renew
row 16 Domain renewal
(other 19 transfer
ProductTypes 41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name
follow) Registry
ProductTypeX Required Product type. Permitted values are: 63
X=1, 2, 3, . . . 20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID
SSL certificates 23 SSL certificate - RapidSSL
in this row 24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
(see adjacent 27 SSL certificate - GeoTrustTrueBizID Wildcard
rows for other 180 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site
ProductTypes) 181 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro
X=1, 2, 3, . . . 86 Web Site Creator - Basic
87 Web Site Creator - Full
Web site 88 Web Site Creator - eCommerce
creation services
in this row
(see adjacent
rows for other
ProductTypes)
X=1, 2, 3, . . . 35 Additional storage for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box
36 Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB per mailbox
Email services in 38 POP mail 10-pak
this row 39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
(see adjacent Registry
rows for other 42 Email forwarding by the .name Registry
ProductTypes) 44 .name registration and email forwarding renewal
3/13/09 371

size
X=1, 2, 3, . . . 47 URL forwarding
48 URL forwarding - renewal
Miscellaneous 65 Private label annual subscription
services in this 66 Private label annual renewal
row 72 RCOM Shield (Whois Privacy Protection)
(see previous
rows for other
ProductTypes)
EnabledX Optional Enable or disable the product type. Set =1 to enable or =0 1
X=1, 2, 3, . . . to disable.
PriceX Optional; use Set the product price. Use format DD.cc 1000.
X=1, 2, 3, . . . when setting 00
retail prices for
this UID
ResellerPrice Optional; use Reseller price for this product type. If you use this 1000.
when setting parameter, you can reset the reseller price for only one 00
one wholesale product per query. If you use this parameter, use
price for one parameters ProductType and Enabled rather than
subaccount ProductTypeX and EnabledX.
RetailPrice Optional; use Retail price for this product type. If you use this parameter, 1000.
when setting you can reset the retail price for only one product per 00
one retail price query. If you use this parameter, use parameters
for this UID ProductType and Enabled rather than ProductTypeX
and EnabledX.
XML.

values.
client.
Notes
• Either LoginID or PartyID is required. If LoginID is passed in then it will override the PartyID if it is also
passed in.
• At least one Price must be supplied.
3/13/09 372
Example
The following query requests that the retail price for registering .org names be set at $44.00 and for
renewing .org names $45.00, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PE_SetPricing&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ProductType1=10&TLD1=org&
Enabled1=1&Price1=44&ProductType2=16&TLD2=org&Enabled2=1&
Price2=45&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Status Successful and Errcount 0 confirm that the query successfully reset 2 prices:
<Count>2</Count>
<Command>PE_SETPRICING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AuthorizeTLD
CommissionAccount
GetBalance
GetTLDList
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
PE_GetProductPrice
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_GetRetailPricing
3/13/09 373
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Preconfigure
Preconfigure
Description
Definition
Configure the extended attributes for the Active domains in a shopping cart. Most commonly, extended attributes
are added for certain country codes, including .us, .ca, .co.uk, and .org.uk.
Usage
Use this command when registering domains that require extended attributes. To retrieve extended attributes, use
the GetExtAttributes command.
This command operates only if you use our shopping cart, and only on the domains in the cart that have status
Active. If you use the Purchase command instead of our shopping cart, supply the extended attributes in the
Purchase command.
Availability
Constraints
• This command operates only if you use our shopping cart, and only on the domains in the cart that have
status Active.
• There must be at least one configurable domain in the cart.
• The extended attributes (configuration parameters) you provide in the query must match those required
for the current TLD. For example, configuring a .us name requires that you provide the attributes for .us,
not those for .ca.
Input parameters

size
Load Required for .us, 1 use the previously configured 1
.ca, .co.uk, and values for all preconfiguration
.org.uk information
2 submit new preconfiguration
information (contacts, name
servers, extended attributes)
3/13/09 374

size
ExtendedAttributes Required for some Data required by the Registry for varie
country codes some country codes. Use s
GetExtAttributes to determine
whether this TLD requires extended
attributes. If extended attributes
are required, the GetExtAttributes
return supplies parameter names
tagged as <Name> and permitted
values tagged as <Value>
AutoRenew Required Set to auto-renew? Permitted 1
values are:
1 Set the preconfigured domains
to renew automatically
(recommended)
0 Set the domains to not
auto-renew
RegLock Required Set registrar lock? Permitted values 1
are:
1 Set the preconfigured domains
to registrar lock (recommended, to
prevent unauthorized transfers)
0 Do not lock the domains
IDNX Required for PUNY- International Domain Name code 3
X = 1 to NumberOfLanguages encoded names that for each language used by a
use characters other domain in the cart that has status
than the English Active. To retrieve the Active
alphabet, numbers, domains in the cart, use command
and hyphen GetCartContent.
PreConfigDNS Required Which name servers this domain 7
uses:
default our name servers
other name servers specified
in this query using the
NSX parameter
NSX Required if you want Names of the name servers a 63
X=1 . . . 12 to use name servers domain is using. Maximum of 12
other than ours name servers.
UseHostRecords Optional Use host records provided in this 1
query string. Permitted values are:
0 Use this account’s default host
records
1 Store the host records provided
in this string
HostNameX Optional Name of host record X, for 60
example, www
3/13/09 375

size
RecordTypeX Optional Record type of host record X. 5
A Address
CNAME Alias record type, to
associate a host name
with another host
URL URL redirect
FRAME Frame redirect
MX Mail. Can be a host name
under this domain name
or the name of a mail
server
MXE Mail Easy (email
forwarding)
TXT Text (SPF) record
AddressX Optional Address to redirect to. 260
If RecordTypeX=A, AddressX
must be an IP address
If RecordTypeX=CNAME,
AddressX must be a fully qualified
domain name (see Note) or a host
name defined in this domain
If RecordTypeX=URL, AddressX
must be the exact URL of the page
you redirect to, or an IP address, or
a fully qualified domain name (see
Note)
If RecordTypeX=FRAME,
AddressX is the actual URL, or the
IP address, or the fully qualified
domain name (see Note) of the
page you want to display when
someone types Your_Domain.com
If RecordTypeX=MX, AddressX
must be a fully qualified domain
name (see Note) or a host name
defined in this domain
If RecordTypeX=MXE, AddressX
must be an IP address
If RecordTypeX=TXT, AddressX
is a text (SPF) record. For help
writing an SPF record, go to
http://spf.pobox.com/wizard.html
AccessPassword1 Optional Domain name password 50
AccessPassword2 Optional Domain name password. Must be 50
identical to AccessPassword1.
ExpressCheckout Either If ExpressCheckout=1, the 1
ExpressCheckout account’s default contacts will be
or all four OptX applied. If ExpressCheckout=0 or
parameters are is not used, supply contact
Required information using the OptX and
ContactTypeX parameters below.
3/13/09 376

size
OptContactReg Either Permitted values are: 1
ExpressCheckout UseBilling Use the account billing
or all four OptX contact as the Registrant contact
parameters are for this domain
Required UseRegistrant Use the account
default Registrant contact as the
Registrant contact for this domain
UseExisting Use the Registrant
contact information supplied in this
query string
OptTechnical Either Permitted values are: 1
or all four OptX contact as the Technical contact for
parameters are this domain
Technical contact for this domain
UseExisting Use the Technical
contact information supplied in this
query string
OptAdministrative Either Permitted values are: 1
or all four OptX contact as the Administrative
parameters are contact for this domain
Administrative contact for this
domain
UseExisting Use the
Administrative contact information
supplied in this query string
OptContactAux Either Permitted values are: 1
or all four OptX contact as the Auxiliary Billing
parameters are contact for this domain
Auxiliary Billing contact for this
domain
UseExisting Use the Auxiliary
Billing contact information supplied
in this query string
ContactTypeOrg Optional Name of Contact’s organization. 60
ContactType can be REGISTRANT,
AUXBILLING, TECH, ADMIN.
Supply ContactType parameters for
any contact type where you
supplied OptX=UseExisting.
ContactTypeJobTitle Optional Contact’s job title 60
ContactTypeFName Optional Contact’s first name 60
ContactTypeLName Optional Contact’s last name 60
ContactTypeAddress Optional Contact’s address 60
ContactTypeAddress2 Optional Contact’s address, second line 60
ContactTypeCity Optional Contact’s city 60
ContactTypeState Optional Contact’s state 60
3/13/09 377

size
ContactTypeProvince Optional Contact’s province 60
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice Optional Contact’s state or province choice. 1
Use value S if Contact is located in
a state; use P if a province.
ContactTypeZip Optional for most Contact’s postal code 16
TLDs; Required for
.org
ContactTypeCountry Optional Contact’s country. Permitted format 60
is 2-letter country code
ContactTypePhone Optional Contact’s phone number. Required 17
format is
characters
ContactTypePhoneExt Optional Contact’s phone extension 6
ContactTypeFax Optional Contact’s fax number. Required 17
format is
characters
ContactTypeEmail Optional Contact’s email address 128

PreConfigSuccess 1 indicates no extended attributes required. 2 indicates query failed at Registry.
Count Number of TLDs affected
ErrCount) values.
client.
IsLockable 0 indicates the domain is not lockable; 1 indicates the domain is lockable
IsRealTimeTLD Indicates whether this is a TLD that registers in real time. 0 indicates no; 1 indi-
cates yes.
Notes
• A fully qualified domain name is expressed in the format “hostname.SLD.TLD.”. Note that the period at the
end is an essential component of a fully qualified domain name.
3/13/09 378
Example
The following query supplies the extended attributes for partnerdomain.us and requests the
interface.asp?command=preconfigure&uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&
sld=partnerdomain&tld=us&Load=2&us_nexus=c11&us_purpose=p3&PreConfigDNS=default&
ExpressCheckout=1&responsetype=xml
<PreConfigBillingInfo>
<BillingAddress1>111 Main St.</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingCountry>United States</BillingCountry>
<BillingPhone>5555555555</BillingPhone>
<BillingFax>5555555556</BillingFax>
</PreConfigBillingInfo>
<PreConfigSuccess>2</PreConfigSuccess>
.
.
.
<Command>PRECONFIGURE</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddContact
Contacts
GetContacts
GetExtAttributes
GetWhoisContact
3/13/09 379
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: Purchase
Purchase
Description
Definition
Purchase a domain name in real time.
Usage
The Purchase command enables direct real-time purchases. The Purchase command bypasses the shopping
cart and the queuing delay associated with it.
The Purchase command is typically used for a single-name purchase and returns an immediate success/failure
response.
Most commonly, the Purchase command is used by resellers who maintain their own databases.
Availability
Constraints
• To use our credit card processing, this must be a reseller account directly under Register.com, and must
have signed a credit card agreement with us.
• The domain name(s) to be purchased must be valid. (See requirements under the Check command.)
• Register.com must be licensed to sell the names you attempt to register (Register.com is not licensed
with the Registries for all TLDs).
• .co.uk and .org.uk names must have at least two name servers.
Input parameters

size
3/13/09 380

size
ExtendedAttributes Required for Data required by the Registry for some varies
some country country codes. Use GetExtAttributes to
code TLDs determine whether this TLD requires
extended attributes.
IDNCode Optional for International Domain Name code for 3
PUNY-encoded each language used by a domain in the
names that use cart that has status Active. To retrieve
characters other the Active domains in the cart, use
than the English command GetCartContent.
alphabet, Arabic
numbers, and
hyphen
UseDNS Either UseDNS Specify UseDNS=default to use our 7
or NSX is name servers (most of the services
Required that we provide require our name
servers). See Note.
NSX Either UseDNS Use this parameter to assign user- 60
or NSX is specified name servers. Permitted
Required values are the use names of registered
name servers, for example,
NS1=dns01.gpn.register.com
See Note.
UnLockRegistrar Optional; default Set to 1 to unlock or 0 to lock the 1
value is 0 name.
RenewName Optional; default Set to 1 to renew the name 1
value is 0 automatically before it expires.
DomainPassword Optional; default Set a password on the domain name. 60
value is 0
EmailNotify Optional; default Set to 1 to receive email notification of 1
is 0 customer orders, set to 0 or don't use
it otherwise.
NumYears Optional Number of years to register the name. 2
QueueOrder Optional If QueueOrder=1, register the 6
domain at the Registry and return an
order ID, then put this order in our
order queue instead of processing in
real time.
This option reduces the risk of the
order timing out when our system is
under stress.
This option is suitable for real-time
TLDs like .com and .net but less
relevant for manually processed TLDs
like .de and .co.uk.
The slight delay associated with this
option makes it unsuitable if your
processes immediately execute
secondary calls like setting host
records—they must be done after the
order completes.
3/13/09 381

size
IgnoreNSFail Optional; default Continue processing even if name 6
is No servers cannot be applied? If
IgnoreNSFail=Yes, this purchase
request will succeed even if the
Registry does not recognize the name
servers listed in this query.
If you use IgnoreNSFail=Yes and
failures are returned, you should
confirm the status of name servers
with the Registry.
UseCreditCard Optional If UseCreditCard=yes, use our 3
credit-card-processing services. This
service is available only to resellers
who have entered into a credit card
processing agreement with us.
ChargeAmount Required if using Amount to charge per year for the 6
our credit card registration (this value will be
processing multiplied by NumYears to calculate
the total charge to the credit card).
Required format is DD.cc
EndUserIP Required if using End user’s IP address. This is used in 15
our credit card fraud checking, as part of our order
processing processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
CardType Required if using Type of credit card 20
our credit card
processing
CCName Required if using Cardholder's name 60
our credit card
processing
CreditCardNumber Required if using Customer's credit card number 128
our credit card
processing
CreditCardExpMonth Required if using Credit card expiration month 2
our credit card
processing
CreditCardExpYear Required if using Credit card expiration year 4
our credit card
processing
CVV2 Required if using Credit card verification code 4
our credit card
processing
CCAddress Required if using Credit card billing address 60
our credit card
processing
CCZip Required if using Credit card billing postal code 15
our credit card
processing
CCCountry Required if using Credit card billing country 60
our credit card
processing
3/13/09 382

size
RegistrantFirstName Required if using Registrant first name 60
our credit card
processing
OR
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
RegistrantLastName Required if using Registrant last name 60
our credit card
processing
OR
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
RegistrantJobTitle Required if Registrant job title 60
param
RegistrantOrga
nizationName
is used
RegistrantAddress1 Required if using Registrant Address 60
our credit card
processing
OR
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
3/13/09 383

size
RegistrantCity Required if using Registrant city 60
our credit card
processing
OR
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
S state
P province
RegistrantStateProvince Optional if using Registrant state or province 60
our credit card
processing
RegistrantPostalCode Required if using Registrant postal code 16
our credit card
processing
OR
for .org names
when you supply
one of the other
core Registrant
attributes
RegistrantCountry Required if using Registrant country, expressed as the 60
our credit card two-character country code
processing
OR
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
RegistrantEmailAddress Required if using Registrant email address 128
our credit card
processing
OR
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
3/13/09 384

size
RegistrantPhone Required if using Registrant phone. Required format is 20
our credit card +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
processing CountryCode and PhoneNumber use
OR only numeric characters.
if extended
attributes are
required
OR
if you supply one
of the other core
Registrant
attributes (see
Note)
RegistrantFax Required if Registrant fax number. Required 20
RegistrantOrgani format is
zationName is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
used CountryCode and PhoneNumber use
ContactTypeFirstName Optional ContactType first name. 60
Replace ContactType in the parameter
names with Tech, Admin or
AuxBilling.
Use these parameters if you want the
Technical, Administrative, or Auxiliary
Billing contact information to be
different from the Billing contact.
You can also supply or change contact
information later using the Contacts
API command.
ContactTypeLastName Required if you ContactType last name 60
supply one of the
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
(see Note)
ContactTypeOrganizationName Optional ContactType organization 60
ContactTypeJobTitle Required if you ContactType job title 60
supply one of the
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
(see Note)
ContactTypeAddress1 Required if you ContactType address, line 1 60
supply one of the
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
(see Note)
ContactTypeAddress2 Optional ContactType additional address info 60
ContactTypeCity Required if you ContactType city 60
supply one of the
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
(see Note)
3/13/09 385

size
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice Optional ContactType state or province choice: 1
S state
P province
ContactTypeStateProvince Optional ContactType state or province 60
ContactTypePostalCode Optional; ContactType postal code 16
Required for .org
names if you
supply one of the
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
ContactTypeCountry Required if you ContactType country, expressed as the 60
supply one of the two-character country code
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
(see Note)
ContactTypeEmailAddress Required if you ContactType email address 128
supply one of the
other core
attributes for
this ContactType
(see Note)
ContactTypePhone Required if you ContactType phone. Required format is 20
supply one of the +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
other core CountryCode and PhoneNumber use
attributes for only numeric characters.
this ContactType
(see Note)
ContactTypeFax Optional ContactType fax number. Required 20
format is

OrderID Order number if successful. We recommend that you store this number for future
use.
RRPText Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode value.
values.
ent.
3/13/09 386
Notes
• If using our credit card option ALL registrant and credit card information is required.
• For most TLDs (those that don’t require extended attributes), Registrant contact information is optional: if not
supplied, it is inherited from the Billing contact. However, if you supply any one of the core Registrant values,
you must supply them all. The core Registrant values are:
RegistrantFirstName
RegistrantLastName
RegistrantAddress1
RegistrantCity
PostalCode (for .org names)
RegistrantCountry
RegistrantEmailAddress
RegistrantPhone
• Additional parameters for contact information can be passed by replacing Registrant in the parameter
names above with Tech, Admin or AuxBilling.
• To set name servers to Register.com’s, set the UseDNS=default param and don't pass NS(x) name
servers. To set name servers to your name servers, set NSX=YourNameServerX and don't pass
UseDNS=default. You can set up to 12 of your own name servers.
• Some TLDs, including .de, require you to specify name servers. The Registry will automatically delete the
domain name if no name servers are specified.
• We recommend that you store the OrderID value—at least the most recent one for each domain—from the
return. Several other commands use this value as a required input parameter.
• In the return, an RRPCode of 200 indicates a successful registration. Otherwise, check the return parameter
ErrCount. If greater than 0 the transaction failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the
client. Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined above.
• In the return, if the RRPCode value is 1300 and the IsRealTimeTLD value is false, then this is a non-
real-time TLD. For these names, use the GetOrderDetail command roughly every 24 hours to check the
progress of the registration.
Example
The following query requests the purchase of domain name partnerdomain2.net, and requests the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=Purchase&
sld=partnerdomain2&tld=net&RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller%20Documents%20Inc.&
RegistrantFirstName=john&RegistrantLastName=doe&RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20St.&
RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantStateProvince=NY&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=S&
RegistrantEmailAddress=john%2Edoe%40partnerdomain%2Ecom&Registrant-
Phone=+1.5555555555&
RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&ResponseType=XML
The response includes the three components that indicate a successful transaction: an order ID indicates success
at the registrar level, and the RRPCode value of 200 and RRP text with a success message indicate success at
the Registry level:
<RRPText>Command completed successfully - 156094996</RRPText>
<Command>PURCHASE</Command>
3/13/09 387
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
Check
InsertNewOrder
PurchaseServices
3/13/09 388
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PurchaseHosting
PurchaseHosting
Description
Definition
Subscribe to our domain name hosting services, while leaving the registration of the domain name at another
registrar. This is a real-time command.
Usage
Use this command to purchase domain name hosting services in real time, while leaving the registration of a
domain name at another registrar.
To purchase DNS hosting using the shopping art and order queue, use the AddToCart command.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
DomainPassword Optional Set a password on the domain name 60
NumYears Optional Number of years to register the name 2
Renewname Optional Set =1 to auto-renew the name 1
ChargeAmount Optional Amount to charge per year for the 6
registration
3/13/09 389

size
UseCreditCard Optional overall, Permitted values are yes and no. The 3
but Required for credit card supplied in this query string
resellers who is charged only if
have a credit UseCreditCard=yes. If this param is
card processing omitted, or if the value supplied is
agreement with anything other than yes, the account
us AND want to balance rather than the credit card is
use our CC debited for this transaction. This is
processing to true even if the query string includes
charge this all the required credit card
transaction to information.
the credit card
included in this
query string.
Default is no.
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
RegistrantFirstName Required if Registrant first name 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantLastName Required if Registrant last name 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantOrga
nizationName
is used
RegistrantAddress1 Required if Registrant Address 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantCity Required if Registrant city 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantStateProvince Required if Registrant state or province 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
S state
P province
RegistrantPostalCode Required if Registrant postal code 16
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantCountry Required if Registrant country 60
UseCreditCard
=yes
RegistrantPhone Required if Registrant phone. Required format is 20
UseCreditCard +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
=yes CountryCode and PhoneNumber use
3/13/09 390

size
RegistrantFax Required if Registrant fax numbe. Required format 20
RegistrantOrga is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
nizationName CountryCode and PhoneNumber use
is used only numeric characters.
RegistrantEmailAddress Required if Registrant email address 128
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
UseCreditCard
=yes
EmailNotify Optional Set =1 to receive email notification for 1
orders, set =0 or omit this parameter
otherwise.

OrderID Order number if successful.
RRPText Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode.
values.
3/13/09 391

client.
Notes
• Additional params for contact information can be passed by replacing Registrant in the param names
above with Tech, Admin or AuxBilling.
• If using our credit card option ALL registrant and credit card information is required.
Example
The following query orders and pays for one year of DNS hosting for the site partnerdomain.com, and sends
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=purchasehosting&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&numyears=1&
RegistrantAddress1=111+Main+St.+&RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantCountry=USA&
[email protected]&RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Doe&
RegistrantPhone=+1.5555555555&RegistrantPostalCode=99999&Renewname=1&
UseCreditCard=yes&EndUserIP=127.0.0.1&CreditCardNumber=4111111111111111&
CreditCardExpMonth=05&CreditCardExpYear=2005&CCName=John+Doe&CardType=visa&
ChargeAmount=12&responsetype=xml
<Command>PURCHASEHOSTING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
ExtendDomainDNS
DeleteHostedDomain
GetHosts
SetHosts
3/13/09 392
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PurchasePOPBundle
PurchasePOPBundle
Description
Definition
Purchase, in real time, a pak of 10 POP Email accounts for the specified domain name.
Usage
Use this command to purchase, in real time, a pak of 10 POP Email accounts for the specified domain name.
We recommend the POP3 mail service for parties who want to be able to send mail from their domain name
(instead of, for example, a yahoo or hotmail sender’s address), and for parties who want to manage multiple email
accounts as a body (rather than having everyone’s email forwarded to scattered locations).
After you sell a POP Email bundle, you can set up users with the SetUpPOP3User command.
Availability
Constraints
• This command can be used only for purchasing POP paks for reseller accounts. Retail accounts must
use a queue-based shopping cart process.
Input parameters

size
SLD Required Second-level domain name (for example, register 63
in register.com)
Quantity Required Number of 10-address paks. 10
ResponseType Optional in all Format of response. Options are Text (default), 4
cases HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 393

OrderID Identification number of the order
BundleID Identification number of each POP3 10-pak
BundleCount Number of POP 10-paks sold in this transaction, if more than one
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests 1 pak of 10 POP3 mailboxes for partnerdomain.com, and requests the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PurchasePOPBundle&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&Quantity=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, the return of an orderid value and a bundleid value confirm a successful query:
<orderid>156133590</orderid>
<Command>PURCHASEPOPBUNDLE</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 394
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
GetPOPExpirations
GetPOPForwarding
ModifyPOP3
PurchaseHosting
PurchaseServices
RenewPOPBundle
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 395
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PurchasePreview
PurchasePreview
Description
Definition
Preview a shopping cart order.
Usage
Use this command to view the items that will be purchased if you check out now.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
XML.

ItemID Shopping cart item ID, from our internal records
Description Description of shopping cart item
Years Number of time units customer wants to subscribe
NameID Domain name ID, from our internal records
Name Name the customer has requested for this item
StatusID Status ID
ItemPrice Price for one unit of this item
ExtPrice ItemPrice multiplied by Years (number of time units)
NeedsConfig Flag that marks domains requiring pre-configuration
ProductType Product type ID number, from our internal records
3/13/09 396

FreeTrial Is this product being offered as a free trial?
ParentItemID Parent item ID number, from our internal records
ICANNFees Fees charged by ICANN for this product
BasePrice Price of this product before the ICANN fee
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following requests a preview of account rcompartnerid and an inventory of its shopping cart, and requests
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=purchasepreview&
The response gives some general information about the account, plus the current contents of the shopping cart:
<Purchase-Summary>
<Balance>3627.65</Balance>
<AvailableBalance>3587.85</AvailableBalance>
<DotComPrice>10.00</DotComPrice>
<DotNetPrice>10.00</DotNetPrice>
<DotOrgPrice>10.00</DotOrgPrice>
<DotCcPrice>24.95</DotCcPrice>
<DotTvPrice>39.95</DotTvPrice>
<CartItem>
<ItemID>365635</ItemID>
<Description>Register</Description>
<Years>2</Years>
<NameID>152534050</NameID>
<Name>partnerdomain.com</Name>
<StatusID>A</StatusID>
<ItemPrice>10.00</ItemPrice>
<ExtPrice>20.00</ExtPrice>
<NeedsConfig />
</CartItem>
<TotalPrice>20.00</TotalPrice>
</Purchase-Summary>
<Command>PURCHASEPREVIEW</Command>
3/13/09 397
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
AddToCart
DeleteFromCart
GetCartContent
InsertNewOrder
UpdateCart
3/13/09 398
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PurchaseServices
PurchaseServices
Description
Definition
Purchase, in real time, RCOM Shield, SSL certificates, POP Email, Web Site Creator, or DNS hosting services.
The PurchaseServices command allows you to purchase one service each time you run the query.
Usage
Use this command to puchase one value-added service in real time, as opposed to going through a shopping cart
and our order queue. Most commonly, real-time commands are used by resellers who maintain their own
databases.
Our credit card services are available for RCOM Shield and DNS hosting.
Availability
Constraints
• Some products are available to only some TLDs. For example, RCOM Shield is not available for .us.
• To use our credit card processing (available only for RCOM Shield and DNS hosting in the
PurchaseServices suite of products), this must be a GPN reseller account that has signed a credit card
agreement with us.
Input parameters
Click a link in the table below to go directly to a specific product:
Product
Input parameters for SSL Certificates
Input parameters for DNS hosting

The table below lists input parameters for RCOM Shield.
3/13/09 399


size
Service Required Permitted value for RCOM Shield is 15
WPPS
SLD Required for WPPS Second-level domain name (for 63
example, register in register.com).
TLD Required for WPPS Top-level domain name (extension). 15
NumYears Optional for Number of years to subscribe to 2
WPPS; default is 1 RCOM Shield
RenewName Optional for Use RenewName=1 to automatically 1
WPPS; default is 0 renew RCOM Shield 30 days before it
expires
EmailNotify Optional; Permitted values are 0 and 1. 1 sends 3
default is 0 you an email confirmation when a
customer makes a purchase using this
command.
UseCreditCard Optional overall, Permitted values are yes and no. The 3
but Required for credit card supplied in this query
resellers who have string is charged only if
a credit card UseCreditCard=yes. If this param is
processing omitted, or if the value supplied is
agreement with us anything other than yes, the account
AND want to use balance rather than the credit card is
our CC processing debited for this transaction. This is
to charge this true even if the query string includes
transaction to the all the required credit card
credit card included information.
in this query string.
Default is no.
Available for
WPPS.
EndUserIP Required for our End user’s IP address. This is used in 15
credit card fraud checking, as part of our order
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ChargeAmount Required for our CC Amount to charge for each year; 6
processing ChargeAmount will be multiplied by
NumYears. Required format is DD.cc
CardType Required for our CC Credit card type. Permitted values are 20
processing Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
CreditCardNumber Required for our CC Credit card number 128
processing
CreditCardExpMonth Required for our CC Expiration month of the credit card, in 2
processing format MM
CreditCardExpYear Required for our CC Expiration year of the credit card, in 4
processing format YYYY
CVV2 Required for our CC Credit card verification value 4
processing, if
printed on the card
3/13/09 400

size
CCName Required for our CC Cardholder’s name 60
processing
CCAddress Required for our CC Credit card billing street address 60
processing
CCZip Required for our CC Credit card billing postal code 60
processing
CCPhone Optional for our CC Credit card billing phone. Required 20
processing format is
RegistrantFirstName Required for our CC Registrant first name 60
processing
RegistrantLastName Required for our CC Registrant last name 60
processing
RegistrantAddress1 Required for our CC First line of Registrant address 60
processing
RegistrantAddress2 Optional for our CC Second line of Registrant address 60
processing
RegistrantCity Required for our CC Registrant city 60
processing
RegistrantStateProvince Optional for our CC Registrant state or province, if 60
processing applicable
RegistrantStateProvinceChoice Optional for our CC Is the RegistrantStateProvince 60
processing value a state or a province? Permitted
values are S for state, P for province.
RegistrantPostalCode Required for our CC Registrant postal code 16
processing
RegistrantCountry Required for our CC Registrant country. Two-letter country 60
processing code is a permitted format.
RegistrantPhone Required for our CC Registrant phone. Required format is 20
processing +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
RegistrantPhoneExt Optional for our CC Registrant phone extension 60
processing
RegistrantFax Optional for our CC Registrant fax. Required format is 60
RegistrantEmailAddress Required for our CC Registrant email address 128
processing
ResponseType Optional in all Format of response. Options are Text 4
cases (default), HTML, or XML.
Input parameters for SSL Certificates

The table below lists input parameters for SSL certificates.
3/13/09 401


size
Service Required Service to purchase. Permitted values for certs are: 15
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL-Premium
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-Wildcard
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-EV
Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-EV
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro-EV
NumYears Optional for certs; Number of years to purchase this cert. Permitted 2
default is 1 values are 1 to the following maxima:
5 GeoTrust QuickSSL
6 GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
5 GeoTrust True BusinessID
5 GeoTrust True BusinessID Wildcard
2 GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
5 RapidSSL
5 VeriSign Secure Site
5 VeriSign Secure Site Pro
2 VeriSign Secure Site with EV
2 VeriSign Secure Site Pro with EV
ResponseType Optional in all cases Format of response. Options are Text (default), 4
HTML, or XML.

The table below lists input parameters for POP Email.
Using the PurchaseServices command, you can purchase POP Email for 1 year. You can renew in real time
using the RenewPOPBundle command, or set auto-renew preferences with the SetPakRenew or SetRenew
commands.

size
Service Required Type of service to purchase. For POP Email, 15
Service=POP3.
SLD Required for POP3 Second-level domain name (for example, 63
register in register.com).
TLD Required for POP3 Top-level domain name (extension). 15
3/13/09 402

size
Quantity Required for POP3 For POP3, number of 10-address POP paks. 10
EmailNotify Optional; Permitted values are 0 and 1. 1 sends you an 3
default is 0 email confirmation when a customer makes a
purchase using this command.
ResponseType Optional in all cases Format of response. Options are Text 4

The table below lists input parameters for Web Site Creator (WSC).
Using the PurchaseServices command, you can subscribe to WSC with a monthly billing cycle.

size
Service Required Type of service to purchase. For WSC, use 15
Service=LWSCBasic, LWSCFull, or
LWSCECom.
LWSCBasic, register in register.com). For LWSC*, this is
LWSCFull, and the domain WSC will be associated with.
LWSCECom
TLD Required for Top-level domain name (extension). For 15
LWSCBasic, LWSC*, this is the domain WSC will be
LWSCFull, and associated with.
LWSCECom
Input parameters for DNS hosting

The table below lists input parameters for DNS hosting.
3/13/09 403


size
Service Required Type of service to purchase. For DNS hosting, 15
use Service=DNSHosting.
NumYears Required for Number of years to subscribe to this service. 2
DNSHosting Permitted values are 1 to 10.
DNSHosting register in register.com).
TLD Required for Top-level domain name (extension). 15
DNSHosting
DomainPassword Optional for Set a password on the domain name 60
DNSHosting
RenewName Optional for Set to 1 to auto-renew the name 1
DNSHosting
RegistrantLastName Required for Registrant last name 60
DNSHosting
RegistrantAddress1 Required for First line of Registrant address 60
DNSHosting
RegistrantPostalCode Required for Registrant postal code 16
DNSHosting
RegistrantEmailAddress Required for Registrant email address 128
DNSHosting
UseCreditCard Optional overall, but Permitted values are yes and no. The credit 3
Required for card supplied in this query string is charged
resellers who have a only if UseCreditCard=yes. If this param is
credit card omitted, or if the value supplied is anything
processing other than yes, the account balance rather
agreement with us than the credit card is debited for this
AND want to use our transaction. This is true even if the query
CC processing to string includes all the required credit card
charge this information.
transaction to the
credit card included
in this query string.
Default is no. Credit
card processing is
available for
DNSHosting.
EndUserIP Required for our End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud 15
credit card checking, as part of our order processing
processing service. Use format NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ChargeAmount Required for our CC Amount to charge for each year of DNS 6
processing hosting; ChargeAmount will by multiplied
by NumYears to yield the total charge for this
order. Required format is DD.cc
3/13/09 404

size
CardType Required for our CC Credit card type. Permitted values are Visa, 20
processing Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
CreditCardNumber Required for our CC Credit card number 128
processing
CreditCardExpMonth Required for our CC Expiration month of the credit card, in format 2
processing MM
CreditCardExpYear Required for our CC Expiration year of the credit card, in format 4
processing YYYY
CVV2 Required for our CC Credit card verification value 4
processing, if
printed on the card
CCName Required for our CC Cardholder’s name 60
processing
CCAddress Required for our CC Credit card billing street address 60
processing
CCZip Required for our CC Credit card billing postal code 60
processing
CCPhone Optional for our CC Credit card billing phone. Required format is 20
CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
numeric characters
RegistrantFirstName Required for our CC Registrant first name 60
processing
RegistrantAddress2 Optional for our CC Second line of Registrant address 60
processing
RegistrantCity Required for our CC Registrant city 60
processing
RegistrantCountry Required for our CC Registrant country. Two-letter country code is 60
processing a permitted format.
RegistrantPhone Required for our CC Registrant phone. Required format is 20
numeric characters.

CCTransResult Credit card preauthorization result; included when using our credit card
processing for Service=WPPS or DNSHosting
BundleID Our identification number for this POP pak; included for Service=POP3
BundleCount Total number of POP paks purchased with this query; included for Ser-
vice=POP3
OrderID Order ID number
CertID Cert ID for the cert purchased in this order; included for any cert pur-
chase
3/13/09 405

to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query adds three POP mail paks to domain partnerdomain.com and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=PURCHASESERVICES&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Service=POP3&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&
Quantity=3&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of an OrderID and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<Bundles>
<BundleID>8069</BundleID>
</Bundles>
<BundleCount>3</BundleCount>
<Command>PURCHASESERVICES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 406
Related commands
Forwarding
GetHomeDomainList
Purchase
PurchaseHosting
PurchasePOPBundle
RenewServices
SetHosts
3/13/09 407
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: PushDomain
PushDomain
Description
Definition
Push a domain name into another account.
Usage
Use this command to transfer a domain name from one Register.com account to another.
Availability
Constraints
• The account to which the domain name is being pushed must be under Register.com or one of its
resellers.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
AccountID Required Login ID of the account to push the name into. Use 16
GetSubAccounts to list subaccounts.
PushContact Optional; Push the contact information for this domain from the old 16
default is 1 account to the new account? Permitted values are:
0 Do not push contact information with the domain
1 Push contact information with the domain
XML.
3/13/09 408

PushDomain Returns =1 if successful or =0 if it fails
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that the domain name partnerdomain2.net be pushed from account
rcompartnerid to account giambi, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=pushdomain&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain2&tld=net&accountid=giambi&response-
type=xml
<Push>
<domainname sld="partnerdomain2" tld="net" id="152533887">
partnerdomain2.net
</domainname>
<PushDomain>1</PushDomain>
</Push>
<Command>PUSHDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 409
Related commands
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 410
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: RefillAccount
RefillAccount
Description
Definition
Add funds to your account using a credit card.
Usage
To add funds to your account, set parameter Debit=True and include the credit card parameters.
To remove your credit card information from our database, set parameter Debit=True and omit the credit card
parameters.
To retrieve your account balance without adding funds, and to retrieve the current credit card information for the
account, set parameter Debit=False.
Availability
Constraints
• The account must be a reseller account.
Input parameters

size
Debit Required Debit the credit card; options are True or 1
False. Debit=True uses the credit card in this
query string for this transaction, and replaces
the credit card information for the account
record with the values in this query string.
Debit=False retrieves your account balance
without changing it, and without charging your
credit card; it also retrieves the current credit
card information for the account.
EndUserIP Required to add funds to End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud 15
this account checking, as part of our order processing
3/13/09 411

size
CCAmount Required to add funds to Amount to charge to credit card, in DD.cc Min
this account format. We charge a 3% convenience fee which $100
is deducted immediately from the CCAmount.
CCType Required to add funds to Credit card type. Options are AmEx, Discover, 10
this account MasterCard, Visa.
CCName Required to add funds to Credit card holder’s name as imprinted on the 60
this account credit card
CCNumber Required to add funds to 16-digit credit card number 16
this account
CCMonth Required to add funds to Month in which credit card expires, in MM 2
this account format
CCYear Required to add funds to Year in which credit card expires, in YYYY 4
this account format
CVV2 Required to add funds to Credit card security verification code, 3- or 4- 4
this account digit number from the back of the credit card
CCAddress Required to add funds to Street address as shown on credit card bill 60
this account
CCCity Optional City as shown on credit card bill 60
CCStateProvince Required to add funds to State or province as shown on credit card bill 60
this account
CCZip Required to add funds to Zip code or postal code as shown on credit card 16
this account bill
CCCountry Required to add funds to Country of credit card billing address, 2
this account expressed as 2-character country code
CCPhone Required to add funds to Phone number as shown on credit card bill. 20
this account Required format is
numeric characters.
SendMail Optional Send email confirmation to the billing contact 2
for this account. 0 or No turns off the email;
any other value or omitting this parameter
sends the email.

Reseller 1 indicates that this is a reseller account
CCTRANSRESULT Result of the credit card transaction
ResellerRefill Success status of the account refill
CreditCardStatus Success status of the credit card transaction
ErrCount) values.
client.
3/13/09 412
Notes
Example
The following query adds $100.00 to the account balance for rcompartnerid, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=REFILLACCOUNT&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&CCAmount=100&CCType=MasterCard&
CCName=JohnDoe&CCNumber=5215521552155215&CCMonth=02&CCYear=2009&
cvv2=200&ccaddress=100+Main+St.&CCStateProvince=NY&cczip=99999&
debit=true&CCCountry=us&CCPhone=+1.5555559999&ResponseType=xml
In the response, the values for CCTRANSRESULT, ResellerRefill, CreditCardStatus, and ErrCount
confirm that the refill was successful:
<CurrentDate>Wednesday, August 20, 2007</CurrentDate>
<RefillAccount>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<CCTRANSRESULT>APPROVED</CCTRANSRESULT>
<ResellerRefill>Transactions processed successfully.</ResellerRefill>
<CreditCardStatus>Successful</CreditCardStatus>
<CCYear>2004</CCYear>
<CCMonth>2</CCMonth>
<CCNumber>************5215</CCNumber>
<CCName>JohnDoe</CCName>
<PaymentType>MasterCard</PaymentType>
<CCAddress>100 Main St.</CCAddress>
<CCCity>Hometown</CCCity>
<CCStateProvince>NY</CCStateProvince>
<CCCountry>us</CCCountry>
<CCPhoneDial />
<CCPhone>5555559999</CCPhone>
<CCZip>99999</CCZip>
</RefillAccount>
<Command>REFILLACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 413
Related commands
GetBalance
GetTransHistory
3/13/09 414
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: RegisterNameServer
RegisterNameServer
Description
Definition
Register a domain name server.
Usage
Use this command to register one of your own servers as a domain name server.
Availability
Constraints
• The server you register must use a domain name that is in your account.
• Register.com must be licensed with the Registry in which you want to register a name server; you can
only register name servers for TLDs that we support.
• The registrar lock for the domain must be set to off while you register a name server. You can switch the
registrar lock back on (and we recommend that you do so) once the name server is registered.
• .co.uk and .org.uk names must have at least two name servers.
Input parameters

size
Add Required Authority to add a name server. Set Add=true to authorize. 5
NSName Required Name server to register. Use format 60
dns1.NameServerName.com
IP Required IP of the name server. 15
XML.
3/13/09 415

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that the computer with IP address 127.0.0.1, known as
dns01.gpn.register.com, be registered as a name server. The query requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=registernameserver&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&add=true&nsname=dns1.partnerdomain.com&
ip=127.0.0.1&responsetype=xml
In the response, the RRP code of 200 and success message in the RRP text indicate a successful registration:
<NS>dns1.partnerdomain.com</NS>
<IP>127.0.0.1</IP>
<RegistrarLock>ACTIVE</RegistrarLock>
<Command>REGISTERNAMESERVER</Command>
<Server>TestServer</Server>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 416
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
UpdateNameServer
3/13/09 417
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: RemoveTLD
RemoveTLD
Description
Definition
Remove TLDs from your list of authorized TLDs that you offer to your resellers and retail customers. Or, revert to
our default list, which includes all TLDs that we support.
Usage
Use this command to remove TLDs from your custom list of authorized TLDs that you offer to your resellers and
retail customers. This command controls the list of TLDs we send you for registrations, renewals, and transfers.
This command does not function unless you have previously used the AuthorizeTLD command to authorize
TLDs. It will not remove TLDs if your account is using our default list.
If you run RemoveTLD with one TLD, our system starts with your current list, removes the single TLD, and leaves
the rest. If you remove all TLDs from your list of authorized TLDs, your account will revert to our default list (all
TLDs that we support).
Availability
Constraints
• You can only remove TLDs that you added using the AuthorizeTLD command.
Input parameters

size
TLD Either TLD or One top-level domain (TLD) to remove from your list 15
DomainList is of authorized TLDs. For example, if you want to
Required remove .biz, use TLD=biz
DomainList Either TLD or Comma-separated list of TLDs to remove from your 100
DomainList is list of authorized TLDs. For example, if you want to
Required remove .com, .net, and .org, use
DomainList=com,net,org
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 418

DeleteTLDX List of TLDs to remove from the list of TLDs authorized for this account. Indexed X
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query removes TLDs .us and .ca from rcompartnerid‘s list of authorized TLDs, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=removetld&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&domainlist=us,ca&responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of TLDs and the ErrCount value of 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<tldlist>
<deletetld>us</deletetld>
<deletetld>ca</deletetld>
</tldlist>
<Command>REMOVETLD</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 419
Related commands
AuthorizeTLD
GetTLDList
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 420
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: RenewPOPBundle
RenewPOPBundle
Description
Definition
Renew the annual subscription on a POP mail 10-pak in real time.
Usage
Use this command to renew, in real time, the annual subscription on a POP mail 10-pak.
Availability
Constraints
• This command is available for reseller accounts only. Retail accounts must use the queue-based
shopping cart process to renew POP bundles.
Input parameters

size
UID Required Account login ID. Must be a reseller account. 20
SLD Required Second-level domain name (for example, 63
register in register.com)
PakID Required ID number of this POP pak. You can retrieve the 10
ID numbers of all POP paks in the account with
the GetPOPExpirations command.
Quantity Required Number of years to renew this POP pak 2
subscription
3/13/09 421

size
UseCreditCard Optional Permitted values are yes and no. The credit card 3
overall, but supplied in this query string is charged only if
Required for UseCreditCard=yes. If this param is omitted or
resellers who if UseCreditCard=no, the account balance
use our credit rather than the credit card is debited for this
card transaction. This is true even if the query string
processing includes all the Registrant contact and credit card
AND want to information.
charge this
transaction to
the credit card
included in this
query string
EndUserIP Required for End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud 15
our credit card checking, as part of our order processing service.
processing Use format NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
RegistrantFirstName Required for Registrant first name 60
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
RegistrantAddress2 Optional for Second line of Registrant address 60
our CC
processing
RegistrantCity Required for Registrant city 60
our CC
processing
RegistrantCountry Required for Registrant country. Two-letter country code is a 60
our CC permitted format.
processing
our CC
processing
RegistrantPhone Required for Registrant phone. Required format is 20
our CC +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
processing CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
numeric characters.
our CC
processing
CardType Required for Credit card type. Permitted values are Visa, 20
our CC Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
processing
CCName Required for Cardholder’s name 60
our CC
processing
CreditCardNumber Required for Credit card number 128
our CC
processing
3/13/09 422

size
CreditCardExpMonth Required for Expiration month of the credit card, in format MM 2
our CC
processing
CreditCardExpYear Required for Expiration year of the credit card, in format YYYY 4
our CC
processing
CVV2 Required for Credit card verification code 4
our CC
processing
CCAddress Required for Credit card billing address 60
our CC
processing
ChargeAmount Required for Amount to charge this credit card. Required 6
our CC format is DD.cc
processing
HTML, or XML.

OrderID Order ID for a successful renewal
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query renews POP pak 5105 for 1 year and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=renewpopbundle&
pakid=5105&quantity=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, an OrderID value and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<Command>RENEWPOPBUNDLE</Command>
3/13/09 423
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Extend
GetPOP3
GetPOPExpirations
GetRenew
Purchase
PurchasePOPBundle
RenewServices
3/13/09 424
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: RenewServices
RenewServices
Description
Definition
Renew one value-added service in real time.
Usage
Use this command to renew one value-added service in real time, as opposed to going through our shopping cart.
This real-time command currently supports RCOM Shield.
Availability
Constraints
• The service must currently be subscribed for this domain. If not already subscribed, do so using the
PurchaseServices or AddToCart commands.
Input parameters

size
Service Required Service to be renewed. Permitted value 15
for RCOM Shield is RCOMShield
NumYears Optional; Number of years to renew this service 2
default is 1
SLD Required for Second-level domain name (for 63
RCOMShield example, register in register.com) for
the domain this service is associated
with
TLD Required for Top-level domain name (extension) for 15
RCOMShield the domain this service is associated
with
3/13/09 425

size
UseCreditCard Optional Permitted values are yes and no. The 3
overall, but credit card supplied in this query string
Required for is charged only if UseCreditCard=yes.
resellers who If this param is omitted, or if the value
have a credit supplied is anything other than yes, the
card account balance rather than the credit
processing card is debited for this transaction. This
agreement is true even if the query string includes
with us AND all the required credit card information.
want to use our
CC processing
to charge this
transaction to
the credit card
included in this
query string.
Default is no.
Available for
RCOMShield.
EndUserIP Required for End user’s IP address. This is used in 15
our credit card fraud checking, as part of our order
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ChargeAmount Required for Amount to charge for each year; 6
our CC ChargeAmount is multiplied by
processing NumYears. Required format is DD.cc
CardType Required for Credit card type. Permitted values are 20
our CC Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
processing
our CC
processing
CreditCardExpMonth Required for Expiration month of the credit card, in 2
our CC format MM
processing
CreditCardExpYear Required for Expiration year of the credit card, in 4
our CC format YYYY
processing
CVV2 Required for Credit card verification value 4
our CC
processing, if
printed on the
card
our CC
processing
CCAddress Required for Credit card billing street address 60
our CC
processing
CCZip Required for Credit card billing postal code 60
our CC
processing
3/13/09 426

size
CCPhone Optional for Credit card billing phone. Required 20
our CC format is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
processing where CountryCode and PhoneNumber
use only numeric characters
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
RegistrantStateProvince Optional for Registrant state or province, if applicable 16
our CC
processing
RegistrantStateProvinceChoice Optional for Is the RegistrantStateProvince value 16
our CC a state or a province? Permitted values
processing are S for state, P for province.
our CC
processing
RegistrantCountry Required for Registrant country. Two-letter country 60
our CC code is a permitted format.
processing
RegistrantPhoneExt Optional for Registrant phone extension 16
our CC
processing
RegistrantFax Optional for Registrant fax. Required format is 128
our CC
processing
3/13/09 427

OrderID Identification number for tracking this order in our system
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query renews RCOM Shield for two years and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=renewservices&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=rcompartnerid&tld=rcompartnerpw&
service=RCOMShield&numyears=2&responsetype=xml
In the response, an order ID number confirms that the query was successful:
<Command>RENEWSERVICES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
PurchaseServices
RenewPOPBundle
3/13/09 428
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: RPT_GetReport
RPT_GetReport
Description
Definition
Retrieve an itemized list of one type of activity in a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of one of the following types of account activity in a domain name account:
registrations, renewals, transfers, private label, subaccounts, accounting, or expiring names.
Availability
Constraints
• The beginning date for reports must be no earlier than 6 months before today.
• The ResponseType must be XML. You can parse the XML response after receiving it.
Input parameters

size
Version Optional; Version of this command. Permitted values are 0 and 20
default is 0 1.
Use Version=1 to receive the return parameters
listed in the Returned parameters table below.
Version=0 and Version=1 return parameters vary
slightly in the data returned and in the tag names. We
recommend that you use Version=1, which avoids
timeouts by supporting paging of results, and
queueing of the query.
3/13/09 429

size
ReportType Required Type of report to generate. Permitted values are: 1
0 Registrations
1 Renewals
2 Transfers in
11 Transfers out
3 Private label
4 Subaccounts
5 Accounting
6 Expiring names
10 Pricing Editor updates
BeginDate Optional; First date to include in the report. Must be no earlier 10
default is the than six months before today.
last day of the Use format MM/DD/YYYY
month, two
months before
the current
month
EndDate Optional; Last date to include in the report. 10
default is Use format MM/DD/YYYY
today’s date
Start Optional; In the overall list of returns for this report type and 8
default is 1 date range, the start position for the return to this
query.
RecordsToReturn Optional; Number of items to return in this report. 8
default is 100
if
Download=
False
default is 9999
if
Download=
True
Download Required Do you wish to run report in real time or deliver to this
account’s Billing contact email address?
Permitted values are True to send the report via
email, False to run in real time and deliver via the API
return.
Reports will always be delivered by email if they
extend past four months before today, or if they
include more than 25,000 results.
ReportOutputType Required If delivering the report via email, ReportOutputType
must be 2.
ResponseType Required Format of response. Permitted value is XML. 4

The following parameters are present in every report. Each specific type of report listed above has a wide variety
of other return parameters specific to the report type.

RptString List report descriptions
ThreeMoPast The date three months before today
SixMoPast The date six months before today
3/13/09 430

BeginDate The first date included in this report
EndDate The last date included in this report
ID Report type identification number
Name Report name
ReportType Report type specified in this query string
ReportName Name of the report type specified in this query string
QueueReportResults Should report results be queued? Permitted values are 1 to queue results; 0
to send results immediately via HTTP.
ReportResults Results specific to this report type. The results, and return parameters, vary
by report type.
NewStartPosition In the full list of results, the start position of the next page of results
ThisStartPosition In the full list of results, the position of the first result listed on this page
ThisEndPosition In the full list of results, the position of the last result listed on this page
PreviousStartPosition In the full list of results, the position of the previous page of results
TotalReturned Number of results listed on this page
TotalRows Number of results total for this report
ShowPrevious Should this page show a link to the previous page of results?
ShowNext Should this page show a link to the next page of results?
ShowPaging Should this page show links to previous and next results?
Version Version of this command that generated this return
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of registrations for the period 12/1/2009 to 1/1/2010, and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=RPT_GETREPORT&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ReportType=0&
BeginDate=12/01/2009&EndDate=01/01/2010&responsetype=xml
<rpt>
<rptString>Registrations | Renewals | Transfers In | Private Label | Sub-Accounts |
Accounting | Expiring Domains | | | | Pricing Editor Updates | Transfers Out | |
</rptString>
<threemopast>10/01/2009</threemopast>
3/13/09 431
<sixmopast>07/01/2009</sixmopast>
<begindate>12/01/2009</begindate>
<enddate>01/01/2010</enddate>
<option>
<reporttype id="0" name="Registrations" />
<reporttype id="1" name="Renewals" />
<reporttype id="2" name="Transfers" />
<reporttype id="3" name="Private Label" />
<reporttype id="4" name="Sub-Accounts" />
<reporttype id="5" name="Accounting" />
<reporttype id="6" name="Expiring Names" />
<reporttype id="7" name="Auction History" />
<reporttype id="8" name="Auction Payment Pending" />
</option>
<reporttype>0</reporttype>
<reportname>Registrations</reportname>
<results>
<QueueReportResults>0</QueueReportResults>
<root>
<tlds>
<tld TLD="com" NumDomains="300" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="net" NumDomains="28" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="mobi" NumDomains="24" AvgRegistration="2.13" />
<tld TLD="org" NumDomains="7" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="biz" NumDomains="5" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="info" NumDomains="4" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="kids.us" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="ca" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="cc" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="tv" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="us" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="us.com" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
<tld TLD="asia" NumDomains="1" AvgRegistration="1.00" />
</tlds>
<orders>
<order OrderID="156189763" SLD="fgs456" TLD="com"
CreationDate="2009-12-31T06:29:37.607" ExpDate="2009-12-31T09:29:32"
PaidAmount="8.9500" BilledToCust="0.0000" />
<row OrderID="156189777" SLD="sdifuf" TLD="com"
CreationDate="2010-01-01T08:43:52.077" ExpDate="2011-01-01T11:43:47"
PaidAmount="8.9500" BilledToCust="0.0000" />
</orders>
</root>
<NewThisMonth>375</NewThisMonth>
<AverageRegPeriod>1.072000</AverageRegPeriod>
<ThisStartPosition>1</ThisStartPosition>
<ThisEndPosition>51</ThisEndPosition>
<PreviousStartPosition />
<TotalReturned>51</TotalReturned>
<TotalRows>375</TotalRows>
<ShowPrevious>0</ShowPrevious>
<ShowNext>True</ShowNext>
<ShowPaging>True</ShowPaging>
<Version>1</Version>
</results>
</rpt>
<Command>RPT_GETREPORT</Command>
3/13/09 432
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
3/13/09 433
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SendAccountEmail
SendAccountEmail
Description
Definition
Email subaccount login information to the billing contact of record.
Usage
Use this command to email subaccount login information to the billing contact for that subaccount.
Availability
Constraints
• The subaccount must be a child of this account.
Input parameters

size
LoginID Required Login ID of subaccount 20
Account Required ID number of subaccount, in NNN-aa-NNNN format. Use 11
the GetSubAccounts command to retrieve the subaccount
ID number.
XML.

values.
client.
3/13/09 434
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SendAccountEmail
Notes
Example
The following query sends an email to the owner of the subaccount, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SendAccountEmail&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&loginID=rcompartneridsub&account=659-fs-2869
&responsetype=xml
<Command>SENDACCOUNTEMAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
GetAccountPassword
GetSubAccounts
3/13/09 435
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ServiceSelect
ServiceSelect
Description
Definition
Enable and disable services for a domain. You can also use this command to retrieve the current settings for a
service.
Usage
Use this command to enable or disable email (MX or MXE), DNS, Web Site Creator, RCOM Shield services for a
domain.
Use this command to create a Web Site Creator account.
Use this command to get the current settings for a service.
Availability
Constraints
• One query can select only one service. You must repeat the query for each service you want to select.
Input parameters

size
Service Required; if Service type. Permitted values are: 15
Service is EmailSet (email services)
used without WPPS (RCOM Shield Whois Privacy Protection)
NewOptionID
and Update,
the response
gives the
current setting
3/13/09 436

size
NewOptionID Optional; if you Setting for the service. Permitted values are: 4
use Service=DNSServer (which domain name servers):
NewOptionID 1006 use our name servers
you must also 1012 use user-specified domain servers, including none
use Update Service=WSB (Web site services):
1060 no Web site services
1063 Web Site Creator stand-alone (use this option to
create or enable Web Site Creator stand-alone)
Service=EmailSet (Email services):
1048 no email
1051 email forwarding (to a POP or WebMail address)
1054 user (mail server name required)
1105 user simplified (mail server’s IP address required)
1114 POP3/WebMail plus email forwarding
Service=WPPS (RCOM Shield Whois Privacy Protection):
1120 WhoIs information is masked
1123 WhoIs information is viewable
Update Required if you True updates the NewOptionID value for the service 5
use
NewOptionID
SLD Required for Second-level domain name (for example, register in 63
Service= register.com)
EmailSet
WPPS
Service=
EmailSet
WPPS
XML.

current-svc Current service option setting
values.
client.
Notes
3/13/09 437
Example
The following query enables email services, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=serviceselect&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&newoptionid=1114&
service=emailset&update=True&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that email services have changed from option 1048 (no email) to 1114 (POP3/WebMail
plus email forwarding):
<ServiceSelect>
<domainname sld="partnerdomain" tld="com" domainnameid="152533676">
partnerdomain.com
</domainname>
<service name="email">
<UpdateOption>True</UpdateOption>
<option name="1048" />
<option name="1114" />
</service>
<current-svc>1114</current-svc>
<WebSite />
</ServiceSelect>
<Command>SERVICESELECT</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
ModifyNS
PE_SetPricing
SetHosts
3/13/09 438
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetCatchAll
SetCatchAll
Description
Definition
Set a forwarding address for any emails addressed to nonexistent mailboxes.
Usage
Use this command to forward email addressed to nonexistent email addresses under a domain name. The
domain name must be in our system, but the forwarding address does not need to be.
Availability
Constraints
• The ForwardTo address does not need to be in our system.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
ForwardTo Required Email address to forward mail to. Use format 130
[email protected]
XML.

CatchAll Email address that mail will be sent to if the addressee mailbox does not exist
3/13/09 439

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query forwards any email addressed to nonexistent mailboxes for this domain name, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SetCatchAll&
[email protected]&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of the CatchAll email address you supplied confirms that the query was successful:
<CatchAll>[email protected]</CatchAll>
<Command>SETCATCHALL</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
3/13/09 440
Related commands
DeletePOP3
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
GetPOP3
GetPOPForwarding
SetPOPForwarding
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 441
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetCustomerDefinedData
Description
Definition
Enter data fields defined by you, and the corresponding data.
Usage
Use this command to create a storage place for data fields that do not currently exist.
Also use this command to put data into those custom data fields. This command allows you to add data one field
at a time.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
ObjectID Required Object ID number, an integer assigned by you. 2
Type Required Object type. Options are: 1
Type=2
OrderID Required if Order ID, which you can retrieve using GetDomainStatus. 11
Type=3
Value Required Content of this entry 50
3/13/09 442

size
DisplayFlag Recommended Visibility to subaccount. Options are: 1
0 Not visible when logged on with subaccount ID
1 Visible when logged on using subaccount ID
EnteredBy Recommended Name of the person adding this entry 50
XML.

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query creates a new data field labeled FavoriteCuisine and assigns a value Italian for this
account.:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SetCustomerDefinedData&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&ObjectID=1&Type=1&Key=FavoriteCuisine&Value=Italian&
DisplayFlag=0&EnteredBy=John&responsetype=xml
In the response, the value 0 for ErrCount confirms that the query executed successfully:
<Command>SETCUSTOMERDEFINEDDATA</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 443
Related commands
3/13/09 444
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetDNSHost
SetDNSHost
Description
Definition
Dynamically updates the IP address of the host computer in our name server records.
Usage
Use this command to update the IP address of a host that does not have a static IP address.
If possible, use this command in a secure mode: https instead of http.
Availability
All customers have access to this command.
Constraints
• The domain name must have a password.
• The host must be set as an IP address.
Input parameters

size
Zone Required The host and domain name that you want to update in 93
the DNS. For example, www.partnerdomain.com.
DomainPassword Required Password for managing the domain (a domain that uses 60
the SetDNSHost command must have a password)
Address Optional The IP address to set the DNS record to. If omitted, the 15
IP you are coming from (as our server sees it) is used.
For example, if you are connecting to our server through
a proxy, the proxy server's IP will be used.
or XML.
3/13/09 445
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetDNSHost

values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query uses a secure server to set the host for partnerdomain.com. Because the query string
does not specify the IP, the command sets the IP to that from which the server received the query:
https://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SetDNSHost&
zone=partnerdomain.com&DomainPassword=tester&responsetype=xml
The error count value 0 confirms that the DNS host was set successfully:
<Command>SETDNSHOST</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetHosts
GetRegHosts
SetHosts
3/13/09 446
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetDomainSRVHosts
SetDomainSRVHosts
Description
Definition
Create or edit SRV host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to create or edit SRV (service) records for a domain name.
This command deletes all previously existing SRV records for the domain name. You must include all SRV records
that you want to end up with, in the query string.
SRV records are required for some newer Internet protocols such as SIP and XMPP. Some other protocols
support, but do not require, SRV records.
This command allows a user to supply the components of an SRV record that are discretionary, then adds TTL,
Class, and formatting to produce a complete SRV record.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must use our name servers.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
HostIDX Optional ID number of an existing host record, if it exists and you
want to edit it. Use the GetDomainSRVHosts command to
retrieve SRV record ID numbers.
ServiceX Required Service type of this record. Required format is 1 to 14 14
characters in length; includes lower-case letters, digits,
and hyphens; and begins and ends with a letter or digit
ProtocolX Required Transport protocol for this record, such as TCP or UDP 14
3/13/09 447

size
PriorityX Required Priority for this record. Lowest priority values are used 5
first, working toward higher priority values when lower
values are unavailable. Use this value to designate backup
service. Permitted values are numbers from 0 to 65535
WeightX Required Proportion of time to use this record. Records of equal 5
priority are added and the total normalized to 100%. Use
this parameter to specify load balancing among records of
the same priority. Permitted values are numbers from 0 to
65535
PortX Required Port to use for this service. Permitted format is numbers 5
from 0 to 65535
TargetX Required Fully qualified domain name for this SRV record. Permitted
format is SRVRecordName.SLD.TLD. (include the trailing
period in a fully qualified domain name)
XML.

InsertedCount Number of SRV records added
UpdatedCount Number of SRV records edited
DeletedCount Number of SRV records deleted
Success Success status of this query
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query keeps an existing SRV record and adds a new record, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SETDOMAINSRVHOSTS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&HostID1=17217418&
Service1=imap&Protocol1=TCP&Priority1=10&Weight1=50&Port1=1&
Target1=imap.partnerdomain.com.&HostID2=&Service2=xmpp&Protocol2=UDP&
Priority2=10&Weight2=50&Port2=98&Target2=xmpp.partnerdomain.com.&
ResponseType=XML
3/13/09 448
In the response, the Success value True and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful. In
addition, the response specifies the numbers of SRV records that were added, changed, and deleted:
<InsertedCount>1</InsertedCount>
<UpdatedCount>0</UpdatedCount>
<DeletedCount>0</DeletedCount>
<Success>true</Success>
<Command>SETDOMAINSRVHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetDomainInfo
GetDomainSRVHosts
GetHosts
SetHosts
3/13/09 449
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetDomainSubServices
Description
Definition
Update settings for domain services (active or inactive for email forwarding host records).
Usage
Use this command to enable or disable services. (e.g., Host or email forwarding records).
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SetDomainSubServices&uid=yourloginid
&pw=yourpassword&sld=domain&tld=com&ActivateForwarding=0&ActivateHostRecords=1

size
register.com)
ActivateForwarding Optional; Enable email forwarding? Permitted values are: 1
default is 1 1 to enable
0 to disable
ActivateHostRecords Optional; Enable URL forwarding? Permitted values are: 1
default is 1 1 to enable
0 to disable
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 450

RegistrarHold The enabled status of a domain. If RegistrarHold is True, the domain is dis-
abled.
EmailForwarding 1, 0 or empty
HostRecords 1, 0 or empty
SetDomainServices Successful or Failed
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query sets the subservices of a domain and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=setdomainsubservices&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain2&tld=net&
ActivateForwarding=1&ActivateHostRecords=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, the SetDomainServices value Successful and the ErrCount value of 0 confirm that
services have been set successfully:
<DomainServices>
<EmailForwarding>1</EmailForwarding>
<HostRecords>1</HostRecords>
<SetDomainServices>Successful</SetDomainServices>
</DomainServices>
<Command>SETDOMAINSUBSERVICES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 451
Related commands
GetDomainSubServices
3/13/09 452
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetDotNameForwarding
Description
Definition
Set the email forwarding address for a .name domain.
Usage
Use this command if you want to use the .name Registry’s email forwarding feature (you can also use
Register.com’s email forwarding with .name domains).
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must have a .name TLD.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
ForwardTo Required Email address to forward to, in the format 120
[email protected]
XML.

ForwardTo Email address to which email will be forwarded
3/13/09 453
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetDotNameForwarding

values.
client.
Notes
Example
John Doe registers domain john.doe.name, which automatically includes the email address [email protected]. The
following query forwards email addressed to [email protected] to [email protected], and sends
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=setdotnameforwarding&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=john.doe&tld=name&
[email protected]&responsetype=xml
<dotnameforwarding>
<ForwardTo>[email protected]</ForwardTo>
</dotnameforwarding>
<Command>SETDOTNAMEFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 454
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetHosts
SetHosts
Description
Definition
Set host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to change the host records for a domain name.
This command deletes the existing host records before replacing them with the host records included in the query
string. To avoid unpleasant surprises for the user, some resellers use the GetHosts command to retrieve existing
host records, and populate the SetHosts query string with existing host records while also allowing the user to
add or delete host records.
To set SRV records, use the SetDomainSRVHosts command.
To enable or disable email, use the ServiceSelect command.
Availability
Constraints
• This command deletes your existing host records before replacing them with the records you include in
the query string. See Usage note, above.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
HostNameX Required Name of the host record to add. This command deletes all 60
X=1 to existing host records and replaces them with the records you
maximum 50 supply in this query string. Index the parameters for each
host record X; X must be numeric and in sequence beginning
with 1.
3/13/09 455

size
RecordTypeX Required Record type of host record X. Permitted values are: 5
X=1 to A Address
maximum 50 CNAME Alias record type, to
with another host
URL URL redirect
server
forwarding)
AddressX Required Address to redirect to. 260
X=1 to If RecordTypeX=A, AddressX must be an IP address
maximum 50 If RecordTypeX=CNAME, AddressX must be a fully
qualified domain name (see Note) or a host name defined in
this domain
If RecordTypeX=URL, AddressX must be the exact URL of
the page you redirect to, or an IP address, or a fully qualified
domain name (see Note)
If RecordTypeX=FRAME, AddressX is the actual URL, or
the IP address, or the fully qualified domain name (see Note)
of the page you want to display when someone types
Your_Domain.com
If RecordTypeX=MX, AddressX must be a fully qualified
domain name (see Note) or a host name defined in this
domain
If RecordTypeX=MXE, AddressX must be an IP address
If RecordTypeX=TXT, AddressX is a text (SPF) record. For
help writing an SPF record, go to
MXPrefX Optional; use Host record preference for setting mail redirection. The lower 5
X=1 to with record the number, the higher the priority. If not specified, default
maximum 50) type MX; value is 10.
default is 10
XML.

values.
ent.
3/13/09 456
Notes
• A fully qualified domain name is expressed in the format “hostname.SLD.TLD.”. Note that the period at the
end is an essential component of a fully qualified domain name.
Example
The following query sets four host records for partnerdomain.com. The results:
• partnerdomain.com forwards mail to IP address 66.150.5.189.
• photos.partnerdomain.com points to domain name photos.msn.com
• yahoo.partnerdomain.com points to IP address 204.71.200.72
• msn.partnerdomain.com points to URL http://www.msn.com
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=sethosts&
HostName1=@&RecordType1=A&Address1=66.150.5.189&
HostName2=photos&RecordType2=CNAME&Address2=photos.msn.com.&
HostName3=yahoo&RecordType3=URL&Address3=204.71.200.72&
HostName4=msn&RecordType4=FRAME&Address4=http://www.msn.com&
responsetype=xml
The error count value of 0 confirms that hosts have been set successfully:
<Command>SETHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetHosts
GetMetaTag
GetRegHosts
GetSPFHosts
PurchaseServices
SetDomainSRVHosts
SetDNSHost
SetSPFHosts
UpdateMetaTag
3/13/09 457
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetPakRenew
SetPakRenew
Description
Definition
Set the auto-renew behavior for a POP email pak.
Usage
Use this command to set auto-renew behavior for an individual POP pak.
Availability
Constraints
• The POP pak bundle ID must belong to this domain.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
BundleID Required Numerical ID for the POP pak (retrieve the bundle ID using 4
the GetPOP3 command)
AutoPakRenew Required Auto-renew setting to be applied to this POP pak. Permitted 1
values are 1 (on) or 0 (off)
XML.

DomainRRP Domain type
3/13/09 458
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetPakRenew

PakUpdated Bundle ID of the POP pak for which the auto-renew value is being reset
AutoPakRenew Auto-renew setting for the pak. Values are 1 (on) or 0 (off)
values.
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query turns the POP pak auto-renew setting for bundle 5105 on, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SETPAKRENEW&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&DomainNameID=152533676&
bundleid=5105&AutoPakRenew=1&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the error count of 0 and absence of error messages confirm that the query was successful:
<PakUpdated>5105</PakUpdated>
<AutoPakRenew>1</AutoPakRenew>
<Command>SETPAKRENEW</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetPOP3
GetRenew
SetRenew
3/13/09 459
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetPassword
SetPassword
Description
Definition
Set a password for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to set a password for access to a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name password must use ASCII characters, and must be 6 to 60 characters in length.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
DomainPassword Required Password to access and manage the domain name. Must 60
use ASCII characters and be 6 to 60 characters in length.
or XML.

values.
3/13/09 460
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetPassword

ent.
Notes
Example
The following query sets the domain password for partnerdomain.com as partnerdomainpw, and requests
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=setpassword&
sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&domainpassword=partnerdomainpw&responsetype=xml
The response confirms that the password is set successfully:
<Command>SETPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 461
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetPOPForwarding
SetPOPForwarding
Description
Definition
Create, change, or delete an email forwarding address for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to create, update, or delete email forwarding records for a domain name.
This command can be used to configure email forwarding addresses for both our POP mail and our email
forwarding services.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
UserName Required The user name for this mailbox (email address will be 30
[email protected]).
EMail Required Domain for this mailbox. Must be the same values as SLD 78
and TLD above. Use format SLD.TLD (email address will be
[email protected]).
ForwardTo Required Email address to forward to. Use format 130
[email protected]
3/13/09 462

size
Enable Required Add this email forwarding? Permitted values are: 1
0 Delete this email forwarding address
1 Add or change this email forwarding address
StatusFlags Optional Deliver to forwarding address? Permitted values are: 1
no value Deliver to original mailbox only
0 Deliver to both original mailbox and forwarding address
1 Deliver only to the forwarding address
XML.

Success 1 indicates the query was successful
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query creates an email forwarding record: Email addressed to [email protected] will
be forwarded to [email protected]. The query string also requests a response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SETPOPFORWARDING&
username=sales&Email=partnerdomain.com&[email protected]&
Enable=1&StatusFlags=1&ResponseType=xml
In the response, the Success value 1 indicates that the query was successful:
<success>1</success>
<Command>SETPOPFORWARDING</Command>
3/13/09 463
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeletePOP3
GetCatchAll
GetPOP3
GetPOPForwarding
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 464
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetRegLock
SetRegLock
Description
Definition
Set the registrar lock for a domain name.
Usage
Set the registrar unlock value to 0 to prevent unauthorized transfer of a domain name to another registrar.
Set the registrar unlock value to 1 to allow unrestricted transfer of a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
UnlockRegistrar Required Lock option to be set. Permitted values are 1 to unlock, 0 1
to lock).
XML.

RegistrarLock Current lock status if successful, (=Failed otherwise).
3/13/09 465

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that the registrar lock be set (unlockregistrar set to false), and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/Interface.asp?command=setreglock&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&unlockregistrar=0&
responsetype=xml
<Command>SETREGLOCK</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 466
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRenew
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 467
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetRenew
SetRenew
Description
Definition
Set the auto-renew flag for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command with RenewFlag set to 1 to renew the domain registration automatically. Use this command
with RenewFlag set to 0 to require the owner to actively renew.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
RenewFlag Required Turn the auto-renew setting for the domain on or off. 1
Options are 1 to auto-renew, 0 otherwise
AutoPakRenew Optional Turn the auto-renew setting for all POP paks in this 1
domain on or off. Permitted values are 1 to auto-
renew, 0 otherwise. To control the auto-renew
settings for individual POP paks, use the SetPakRenew
command.
EmailForwardRenew Optional Turn the auto-renew setting for email forwarding in 1
this domain on or off. Permitted values are 1 to auto-
renew, 0 otherwise.
3/13/09 468

size
URLForwardRenew Optional Turn the URL forwarding setting for POP paks in this 1
domain on or off. Permitted values are 1 to auto-
renew, 0 otherwise.
WPPSRenew Optional Turn the auto-renew setting for Whois Privacy 1
Protection Service in this domain on or off. Permitted
values are 1 to auto-renew, 0 otherwise.
HTML, or XML.

RenewName Current auto-renew setting (1 = on, 0 = off)
AutoPakRenew Current auto-renew setting for POP paks (True = on, False = off). This return
parameter only appears if the AutoPakRenew is an input parameter.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that partnerdomain.com renew automatically, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=setrenew&
sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&renewflag=1&responsetype=xml
The response confirms that the autorenew flag is set successfully (RenewName=1):
<RenewName>1</RenewName>
<Command>SETRENEW</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
3/13/09 469
</debug>
Related commands
Extend
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
InsertNewOrder
SetPakRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
StatusDomain
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 470
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetResellerServicesPricing
Description
Definition
Set the prices you charge your reseller for services.
Usage
Use this command to set prices you charge a subaccount for services.
This command differs from the GetSubAccountDetails command in that the SetResellerServicesPricing
command allows you to set pricing of any combination of services, SetResellerServicesPricing does not require
you to simultaneously convert an account to reseller status, and SetResellerServicesPricing does not require
you to set all service prices in a single query.
To cover all the functionality of the GetSubAccountDetails command without its restrictions, use
SetResellerTLDPricing, and SetResellerServicesPricing.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
SubUID Either SubUID Login ID of the subaccount to set pricing for. 20
or Account is
Required
Account Either SubUID Account ID of the subaccount to set pricing for, in 11
or Account is NNN-aa-NNNN format. To retrieve the subaccount ID, use
Required the GetSubAccounts command.
DotNameBundle Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for a name-and- 5
email .name bundle, in DD.cc format
DNSHosting Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for one year of 5
DNS hosting, in DD.cc format
3/13/09 471

size
POP3 Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for a POP3 5
10-pak, in DD.cc format
WPPS Optional Price your are charging this subaccount for a one-year 5
subscription to Whois Privacy Protection Service, in DD.cc
format
or XML.

ServiceX Name of this service. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
PriceX Price you set for this service. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
ServicesCount Number of services listed in this response (all services, not just those for which you
set prices in your query)
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query sets prices for services—wholesale prices that rcompartnerid charges subaccount
443-up-6579—and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SETRESELLERSERVICESPRICING
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&account=443-up-6579&pop3=19.95&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of prices that match those you set, and the ErrCount value 0, indicate that the query was
successful:
<services>
<service name="pop3" price="19.95" />
<service name="dotnamebundle" price="" />
</services>
<servicescount>2</servicescount>
<Command>SETRESELLERSERVICESPRICING</Command>
3/13/09 472
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetSubAccounts
PE_SetPricing
3/13/09 473
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetResellerTLDPricing
Description
Definition
Set the prices you charge your resellers for domain names. You can use this command to set any number of
prices.
Usage
Use this command to set prices you charge your resellers for domain names.
We recommend that you use SetResellerTLDPricing for setting prices charged to subaccounts. The
GetSubAccountDetails command also offers this functionality, but with much stricter requirements on the query
string.
Availability
Constraints
• The subaccount must belong to this domain name account.
Input parameters

size
SubUID Either SubUID Login ID of the subaccount to set pricing for. 20
or Account is
Required
Account Either SubUID Account ID number of the subaccount to set pricing for, in 11
or Account is NNN-aa-NNNN format. To retrieve the subaccount ID
Required number, use the GetSubAccounts command.
TLDPrice Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for registering this 5
TLD, in DD.cc format
TLDRenew Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for renewing this 5
TLD, in DD.cc format
TLDTransfer Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for transferring 5
this TLD, in DD.cc format
DotNameBundle Optional Price you are charging this subaccount for a name-and- 5
email .name bundle, in DD.cc format
3/13/09 474

size
POP3 Required Price you are charging this subaccount for a POP3 10- 5
pak, in DD.cc format
WPPS Required Price you are charging this subaccount for WhoIs Privacy 5
Protection Service, in DD.cc format
or XML.

price tld="TLD" id="ID" prod="Prod" When ResponseType=XML, this multi-part parameter
name is used as the XML tag. The return value is the price
of the product described by the param name.
tldX TLD. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
tldIDX TLD ID number from our database. Indexed X when
ResponseType=Text or HTML.
productIDX Product ID number from our database. Indexed X when
priceX Product price. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
DotNameBundle The price of a one-year subscription to a .name name-and-
email bundle
NameX Name of product. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text
or HTML.
PriceX The price for a one-year subscription to product. Indexed X
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0
check the Err(1 to ErrCount) values.
Err(x) Error messages explaining the failure. These can be
presented as is back to the client.
successfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets prices for some TLDs and services in account rcompartnerid, and sends the response
in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SETRESELLERTLDPRICING&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&account=443-up-6579&
comprice=12.95&comrenew=12.95&comtransfer=12.95&
3/13/09 475
netprice=12.95&netrenew=12.95&nettransfer=12.95&
orgprice=8.95&orgrenew=8.95&orgtransfer=8.95&
pop3=19.95&responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of TLDs and services and their prices, and the ErrCount value 0, confirm that the query
was successful:
<tlds>
<price tld="biz" id="6" prod="10" />
<price tld="com" id="0" prod="10">12.95</price>
<price tld="info" id="5" prod="10" />
<price tld="net" id="1" prod="10">12.95</price>
<price tld="org" id="2" prod="10">12.95</price>
</tlds>
<services>
<service name="dotnamebundle" price="" />
</services>
<servicescount>3</servicescount>
<Command>SETRESELLERTLDPRICING</Command>
<Site />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AuthorizeTLD
GetSubAccounts
GetTLDList
PE_GetTLDID
PE_SetPricing
RemoveTLD
3/13/09 476
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetSPFHosts
SetSPFHosts
Description
Definition
Create or update Sender Policy Framework (SPF) host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to create or update SPF host records for a domain name.
The SetSPFHosts command creates or updates one record per query. To set more than one SPF host record per
query, use the SetHosts command.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
HostID Required when Host ID number from our database. You can retrieve this 10
updating an value using the GetSPFHosts command.
SPF host
record
HostName Required Host name, assigned by you 63
RecordType Required For SPF records, the required value is txt 5
3/13/09 477

size
Address Required The SPF record. For help writing this record, you can go to 255
MXPref Optional Host record preference for setting the SPF record. The 5
lower the number, the higher the priority. If not specified,
default value is 10.
XML.

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query sets SPF host records for domain partnerdomain.com and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SETSPFHOSTS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&HostName=test&
Address=v%3dspf1%20mx%20ptr%20a:regular%20a:hostnames%20a:po%20mx:MX%
20mx:servers%20mx:to%20ip4:63.251.174.113%20include:myISP.net%
20include:mydomain.com%20-all&RecordType=txt&mxPref=&responsetype=xml
<Command>SETSPFHOSTS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
3/13/09 478
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetHosts
GetSPFHosts
SetHosts
3/13/09 479
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SetUpPOP3User
SetUpPOP3User
Description
Definition
Set up a POP3 mailbox for your domain.
Usage
Use this command when you have purchased a POP3 email pak (see PurchasePOPBundle) and want to set up
mailboxes for your domain.
Availability
Constraints
• A POP mail pak must have been purchased for the domain and the correct BundleID supplied.
• There must be at least one mailbox available in the email pak (BundleID) referenced.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
BundleID Required POP pak ID number to add the user to (must have already integer
been purchased). The order confirmation for purchasing the
bundle contains the Bundle ID, or you can retrieve it using
the GetPOP3 command.
POPUserName Required The user name to set up (email address will be 30
[email protected]).
3/13/09 480

size
IsAdmin Optional Should POPUserName have administrative privileges over 1
all mailboxes associated with this domain name?
Administrative privileges allow this user to reset the
password for mailboxes, and delete mailboxes. Permitted
values are:
0 Regular user (can change the password for their own
mailbox but no one else’s)
1 Administrator (when this user logs on to Webmail and
goes to the admin page, he or she can see all
mailboxes for this domain name, can reset passwords
for any or all mailboxes, and can delete any or all
mailboxes)
POPPassword Required POP3 password. 50
POPFullName Optional User's full name, appears in Web mail. 60
XML.

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query creates mailbox [email protected] and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SetupPop3user&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&BundleID=5134&POPUser-
Name=james&
POPPassword=rcompartnerpw&POPFullName=James+Doe&responsetype=xml
In the response, the value 0 for parameter ErrCount indicates that the query was successful:
<Command>SETUPPOP3USER</Command>
3/13/09 481
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteAllPOPPaks
DeletePOP3
DeletePOPPak
Forwarding
GetCatchAll
GetForwarding
GetMailHosts
GetPOP3
GetPOPForwarding
ModifyPOP3
PurchasePOPBundle
SetUpPOP3User
3/13/09 482
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: StatusDomain
StatusDomain
Description
Definition
Get information about the status of a single domain name: registrar, expiration date, and whether it is in your
account.
Usage
Use this command when you have received an RRPCode value of 724 when attempting to register a domain.
The response for the Purchase command gives additional information explaining the 724 code.
For other aspects of domain status, use the GetDomainStatus command for the fastest response.
Availability
Constraints
• The query returns an error if the domain does not belong to this account.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
OrderType Optional Options are Purchase(default), Transfer or Extend. 10
XML.

DomainName Name being statused
Registrar Returns Known, Unknown, or None.
3/13/09 483

InAccount Returns 0 if not in an Register.com account, 1 if in your Register.com account or 2 if
in another Register.com account.
OrderID ID number of the most recent order that included this domain.
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests information about domain partnerdomain.com, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=statusdomain&
<DomainStatus>
<Registrar>Known</Registrar>
<InAccount>1</InAccount>
<ExpDate>6/25/2012 4:20:24 PM</ExpDate>
</DomainStatus>
<Command>STATUSDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 484
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetDomainStatus
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
ValidatePassword
3/13/09 485
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SubAccountDomains
SubAccountDomains
Description
Definition
List the domains in a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to list the domains in a subaccount.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
Account Required Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-NNNN format. Use the 11
GetSubAccounts command to retrieve this code.
Tab Required Which category of names to return. Permitted values are: 9
iown names registered here
ihost names that use our DNS hosting
progress names that are expiring or expired
watchlist names you are interested in
XML.

Tab Category of names returned
MultiRRP Do names in this account include credentials of more than one registrar?
Domain-List Type Description of the category of names returned
3/13/09 486

DomainNameID Domain name ID number, from our records
NS-Status YES indicates that this domain uses our default name servers
Expiration-Date Expiration date of this domain registration
Auto-Renew Is this domain set to renew automatically?
EndPosition Position in the overall list of the last domain returned with this query
PreviousRecords Number of domains in the overall list before the first domain in this list
NextRecords Number of domains in the overall list after the last domain in this list
OrderBy Sorting parameter for names
Result Did this query yield any names?
StartPosition Position in the overall list of the first domain returned with this query
DomainCount Total number of domains in this subaccount
TotalDomainCount Total number of domains in this parent account
StartLetter First letter of the domains returned with this query
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query returns the registered (iown) domain names in the subaccount, and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SUBACCOUNTDOMAINS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=493-yp-5836&tab=iown&responsetype=xml
<GetDomains>
<tab>iown</tab>
<multirrp>False</multirrp>
<domain-list type="Registered">
<domain>
<sld>subpartnerdomain</sld>
<tld>com</tld>
<ns-status>NA</ns-status>
<auto-renew>Yes</auto-renew>
</domain>
3/13/09 487
<domain>
<sld>subpartnerdomain2</sld>
<tld>net</tld>
</domain>
<domain>
<sld>subpartnerdomain3</sld>
<tld>info</tld>
</domain>
</domain-list>
<EndPosition>3</EndPosition>
<PreviousRecords>0</PreviousRecords>
<NextRecords>0</NextRecords>
<OrderBy />
<TotalDomainCount>225</TotalDomainCount>
<StartLetter />
</GetDomains>
<Command>SUBACCOUNTDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>e</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetSubAccounts
3/13/09 488
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SynchAuthInfo
SynchAuthInfo
Description
Definition
Synchronize a domain’s EPP key with the Registry, and optionally email it to the registrant.
Usage
Use this command to create a new EPP key, synchronize the key with the Registry, and optionally email it to the
registrant.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
EmailEPP Required Should we mail the EPP key to the registrant of this 5
domain name? Permitted values are True and False
RunSynchAutoInfo Required Should we synchronize the EPP key for this domain 5
and make sure our records are identical to the
Registry’s? Permitted values are True and False.
HTML, or XML.
3/13/09 489
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: SynchAuthInfo

InfoSynched Returns True if EPP key has been synchronized at Registry. This parameter
displays when EmailEPP=False
EPPEmailMessage Returns confirmation that EPP key is emailed to registrant. This parameter
displays when EmailEPP=True
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query synchronizes the EPP key between the Registry and our database, emails the EPP key to the
registrant of record in our database, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=SynchAuthInfo&
UID=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain&tld=com&EmailEPP=True&
RunSynchAutoInfo=True&ResponseType=xml
<EPPEmailMessage>Email has been sent.</EPPEmailMessage>
<Command>SYNCHAUTHINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug><![CDATA[ ]]></debug>
Related commands
TP_CreateOrder
3/13/09 490
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_CancelOrder
TP_CancelOrder
Description
Definition
Cancel a transfer order that has been submitted by Register.com, but not yet processed by the Registry.
Usage
Use this command to cancel the parts of a transfer order that has been submitted by us, but not yet processed by
the Registry (there is an interval of approximately 5 days between the two events).
Availability
Constraints
• The transfer order must be valid and must belong to this account.
• A transfer order can be conceled only for domains that have a TransferOrderDetail StatusID of 0, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 28, or 29. Use TP_GetOrderDetail to retrieve the statuses of each domain in the order.
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderID Required Transfer order ID number. To retrieve this value, use the 10
TP_GetOrderStatuses command.
XML.

Success Returns True if transfer request was successfully cancelled
values.
3/13/09 491

client.
Notes
• To be eligible for cancellation, each domain must be in one of the following statuses. Retrieve an order’s
status by calling TP_GetOrder. Eligible TransferOrderDetail StatusIDs:
0 Transfer request created - awaiting fax
9 Awaiting auto verification of transfer request
10 Unable to retrieve current domain contacts from UWhois
11 Auto verification of transfer request initiated
12 Awaiting for auto transfer string validation
13 Domain awaiting transfer initiation
28 Fax received - awaiting registrant verification
29 Awaiting manual fax verification.
Example
The following query requests that transfer order ID 445413 be cancelled, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_CancelOrder&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&transferOrderID=445413&responsetype=xml
In the response, the return value True for the Success parameter confirms the successful cancellation of the
order:
<Command>TP_CANCELORDER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 492
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 493
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_CreateOrder
TP_CreateOrder
Description
Definition
Transfer domains into an account. Accepts Fax and AutoVerification order types.
Usage
Use this command to create an order to transfer domains from another registrar to Register.com or one of its
resellers.
You can also use this command to create but not submit a transfer order, using the PreConfig parameter.
Availability
Constraints
• All domain names in the order must be in top-level domains supported by this registrar.
• To transfer EPP names, the query must include the authorization key from the Registrar.
• When using the Fax order type, the registrant contact information must match the current Whois
registrant.
Input parameters

size
DomainCount Required The number of domain names to be 4
submitted on the order. This number must
match the actual number of names
submitted.
OrderType Required Permitted values are Fax or 20
Autoverification
SLDX Required Second-level domain name (for example, 63
X=1 to DomainCount register in register.com)
TLDX Required Top-level domain name (extension) 15
AuthInfoX Required for Current (“losing”) registrar’s authorization 20
EPP TLDs key
3/13/09 494

size
UseContacts Optional Set =1 to transfer existing WhoIs contacts 1
when the transfer is complete
ExtendedAttributes Required for Extended attributes, required for some n/a
TLDs that use country code TLDs. You can retrieve a list
extended of required extended attributes for any
attributes, TLD using the GetExtAttributes command.
when
UseContacts
=0
UseCreditCard Optional for Permitted values are yes and no. The 3
resellers who credit card supplied in this query string is
use our credit charged only if UseCreditCard=yes. If
card this param is omitted or if
processing UseCreditCard=no, the account balance
AND want to rather than the credit card is debited for
charge this this transaction. This is true even if the
transaction to query string includes all the Registrant
the credit contact and credit card information.
card included
in this query
string
EndUserIP Required for End user’s IP address. This is used in 15
our CC fraud checking, as part of our order
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
RegistrantAddress1 Optional; Registrant address 60
Required for
Fax orders
and for our
CC
processing
RegistrantCity Optional; Registrant city 60
Required for
Fax orders
and for our
CC
processing
RegistrantCountry Optional; Registrant country 60
Required for
Fax orders
and for our
CC
processing
RegistrantEmailAddress Optional; Registrant email address 128
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantFax Optional Registrant fax number. Required format is 20
numeric characters.
3/13/09 495

size
RegistrantFirstName Optional; Registrant first name 60
Required for
Fax orders
and for our
CC
processing
RegistrantLastName Optional; Registrant last name 60
Required for
Fax orders
and for our
CC
processing
RegistrantOrganizationName Optional; Registrant organization 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantPhone Optional; Registrant phone. Required format is 20
Required for +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
Fax orders CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
and for our numeric characters.
CC
processing
our CC
processing
and for .org
names when
you supply
new
Registrant
information
RegistrantStateProvince Required for Registrant state or province 60
our CC
processing
S state
P province
CardType Required for Credit card type. Permitted values are 20
our CC Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
CreditCardExpMonth Required for Expiration month of the credit card, in 2
our CC format MM
processing
CreditCardExpYear Required for Expiration year of the credit card, in 4
our CC format YYYY
processing
3/13/09 496

size
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
ChargeAmount Required for Amount to charge this credit card. 6
our CC Required format is DD.cc
processing
PreConfig Optional Set =1 to create, but not send, the order 1
at this time.
Using PreConfig=1 allows you to use
TP_UpdateOrderDetail to modify
DomainPassword, Lock, Renew, and
contacts before submitting the order.
When you are ready to submit the order,
call TP_SubmitOrder.
DomainPassword Optional Set a domain access password on the 16
domain name
Lock Optional Set =1 to turn on RegistrarLock option 1
Renew Optional Set =1 to turn on Auto-Renew option 1
AuthString Optional Authorization string for automated 100
transfer order entries (approved accounts
only)
ResponseType Optional in all Format of response. Options are Text 4
cases (default), HTML, or XML.

TransferOrderID Transfer order number.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
• Example of SLD and TLD params: SLD1=firstSLD TLD1=firstTLD, SLD2=secondSLD
TLD2=secondTLD.
• Additional params for contact information can be passed by replacing Registrant in the param names above
with Tech, Admin or AuxBilling.
3/13/09 497
• If UseContacts is set =1 and contact information is passed in the URL, current Whois contacts are
transferred and preconfigured contacts (passed in the URL) are ignored.
• Automatic transfer of Whois information is available only for the largest registrars.
• An OrderType of Fax requires a signed fax to process the order, an OrderType of Autoverification
uses an electronic verification process to authorize and initiate the transfer.
Example
The following query requests the creation of an autoverification transfer order, to transfer domains
partnerdomain2.net and partnerdomain3.info, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_CreateOrder&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&orderType=AutoVerification&
sld1=partnerdomain2&tld1=net&AuthInfo1=ros8enQi&
sld2=partnerdomain3&tld2=info&AuthInfo2=pkv7ihRb&
domaincount=2&responsetype=xml
The response confirms the successful creation of transfer order 445413, and gives details of the transfer:
<transferorder>
<transferorderid>445413</transferorderid>
<orderdate>7/29/2002 5:19:29 PM</orderdate>
<ordertypeid>1</ordertypeid>
<ordertypedesc>Auto Verification</ordertypedesc>
<statusid>4</statusid>
<statusdesc>Processing</statusdesc>
<authamount>20.00</authamount>
<transferorderdetail>
<transferorderdetailid>301770</transferorderdetailid>
<tld>net</tld>
<statusdesc>Awaiting auto verification of transfer request</statusdesc>
<usecontacts>0</usecontacts>
</transferorderdetail>
<tld>info</tld>
<transferorderdetailcount>2</transferorderdetailcount>
</transferorder>
<Command>TP_CREATEORDER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 498
Related commands
PushDomain
SynchAuthInfo
TP_CancelOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_GetTLDInfo
TP_ResendEmail
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 499
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetDetailsByDomain
Description
Definition
Get transfer order information for a domain using sld.tld.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve status information on one domain name that is in the process of transferring.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must be in a transfer order that belongs to this account.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

OrderCount Number of transfer orders that have been submitted for this domain.
OrderIDX Transfer order detail number. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
X=1 to
OrderCount
OrderDateX The date the order was submitted. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
3/13/09 500

StatusIDX TransferOrderDetail status ID -- a number that indicates the status of this domain
in the transfer process. See Notes. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
StatusDescX TransferOrderDetail status description—a text description of the status of this
domain in the transfer process. See Notes. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text
or HTML.
values.
client.
Notes
• TransferOrderDetail StatusID is the status of this domain in the transfer process:
0=Transfer request created - awaiting fax
5=Transferred successfully
9=Awaiting auto verification of transfer request
10=Unable to retrieve current domain contacts from UWhois
11=Auto verification of transfer request initiated
12=Awaiting for auto transfer string validation
13=Domain awaiting transfer initiation
14=Domain transfer initiated and awaiting approval
15=Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from UWhois
16=Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to verification e-mail
17=Canceled - domain contacts did not approve transfer of domain
18=Canceled - domain validation string is invalid
19=Canceled - Whois information provided does not match current registrant
20=Canceled - Domain is currently not registered and cannot be transferrred
21=Canceled - Domain is already registered in account and cannot be transferred
22=Canceled - Domain is locked at current registrar
23=Canceled - Transfer already initiated for this domain
24=Canceled - Unable to transfer due to unknown error
25=Canceled - Transfer rejected by losing registrar
26=Canceled - Transfer authorization fax not received
27=Canceled by customer
28=Fax received - awaiting registrant verification
29=Awaiting manual fax verification
30=Canceled - Domain name is invalid or is Invalid for Transfers
35=Transfer request not yet submitted.
Example
The following query requests transfer information for partnerdomain2.net, and requests the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GetDetailsByDomain&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain2&tld=net&responsetype=xml
3/13/09 501
The response confirms that partnerdomain2.net is part of transfer order ID 445413, and gives current status
of that order:
<TransferOrder>
</TransferOrder>
<ordercount>1</ordercount>
<Command>TP_GETDETAILSBYDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResendEmail
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 502
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrder
Description
Definition
Get a list of domains in a single transfer order.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve status information on each item in a transfer order.
Availability
Constraints
• The transfer order ID must be valid.
• The transfer order must have originated from this account.
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderID Required Transfer order ID number. You can retrieve this number by 10
calling the TP_GetOrderStatuses command.
XML.

TransferOrderID Transfer order number
OrderDate Date the order was entered
OrderTypeID Type ID of order
OrderTypeDesc Type of order
StatusID Status ID of order. See Notes.
StatusDesc Status description of order. See Notes.
3/13/09 503

AuthAmount Charge amount for this order
TransferOrderDetailID Transfer order detail number
Price Cost of the name transfer
UseContacts Use original contacts or not
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
• TransferOrder StatusID:
0 Transfer request has been made
1 Fax has been received
2 Order canceled
3 Order complete
4 Processing
5 Order not submitted
• TransferOrderDetail StatusID:
1 WhoIs information matches
2 Canceled due to WhoIs error
3 Pending due to domain status
4 Canceled due to domain status
5 Transferred and paid successfully
6 Transfer incomplete - charge problem
7 Frozen due to charge problem
8 NSI rejected transfer
14 Domain transfer initiated and awaiting approval
15 Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from UWhois
16 Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to verification e-mail
17 Canceled - domain contacts did not approve transfer of domain
18 Canceled - domain validation string is invalid
19 Canceled - Whois information provided does not match current registrant
20 Canceled - Domain is currently not registered and cannot be transferred
21 Canceled - Domain is already registered in account and cannot be transferred
22 Canceled - Domain is locked at current registrar, or is not yet 60 days old
23 Canceled - Transfer already initiated for this domain
24 Canceled - Unable to transfer due to unknown error
3/13/09 504
25 Canceled - The current registrar has rejected transfer (please contact them for details)
26 Canceled - Transfer authorization fax not received
27 Canceled by customer
29 Awaiting manual fax verification
30 Canceled - Domain name is invalid or is Invalid for Transfers
31 Canceled - Domain is currently undergoing transfer by another Registrar
32 Canceled - Invalid EPP/authorization key - Please contact current registrar to obtain correct key
33 Canceled - Cannot transfer domain from name-only account
34 Unable to complete transfer. Transfers must include a change in registrar.
35 Transfer request not yet submitted
36 Canceled - Account is not authorized to perform domain transfers
37 Canceled - Domain was not retagged or not retagged in time by losing registrar
45 Order cancelled
Example
The following query requests transfer information for transfer order ID 445413, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GetOrder&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&TransferOrderID=445413&responsetype=xml
The response provides information on transfer order ID 445413:
<transferorder>
<authamount>20.00</authamount>
<tld>net</tld>
<tld>info</tld>
</transferorder>
<Command>TP_GETORDER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
3/13/09 505
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 506
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderDetail
Description
Definition
Get information for a single domain on a transfer order.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a long list of information on a single domain that is in the process of transferring.
Availability
Constraints
• The transfer order detail ID must belong to a transfer order created under this account.
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderDetailID Required Transfer order detail number returned by calling 10
TP_GetOrder.
HTML, or XML.

SLD Second level name
TLD Top level name
Lock Lock status of the name
Renew Renew status of the name
DomainPassword Password to be set for the name
StatusID Status ID of this order. See Notes.
3/13/09 507

StatusDesc Status description of this order. See Notes.
Price Charge amount for this order
UseContacts Use original contacts or not
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
• TransferOrderDetail StatusID and StatusDesc:
1 WhoIs information matches
2 Canceled due to WhoIs error
3 Pending due to domain status
4 Canceled due to domain status
5 Transferred and paid successfully
6 Transfer incomplete - charge problem
7 Frozen due to charge problem
8 NSI rejected transfer
14 Domain transfer initiated and awaiting approval
15 Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from UWhois
16 Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to verification e-mail
17 Canceled - domain contacts did not approve transfer of domain
18 Canceled - domain validation string is invalid
19 Canceled - Whois information provided does not match current registrant
20 Canceled - Domain is currently not registered and cannot be transferred
21 Canceled - Domain is already registered in account and cannot be transferred
22 Canceled - Domain is locked at current registrar, or is not yet 60 days old
23 Canceled - Transfer already initiated for this domain
24 Canceled - Unable to transfer due to unknown error
25 Canceled - The current registrar has rejected transfer (please contact them for details)
26 Canceled - Transfer authorization fax not received
27 Canceled by customer
29 Awaiting manual fax verification
30 Canceled - Domain name is invalid or is Invalid for Transfers
31 Canceled - Domain is currently undergoing transfer by another Registrar
32 Canceled - Invalid EPP/authorization key - Please contact current registrar to obtain correct key
33 Canceled - Cannot transfer domain from name-only account
34 Unable to complete transfer. Transfers must include a change in registrar.
35 Transfer request not yet submitted
3/13/09 508
36 Canceled - Account is not authorized to perform domain transfers

37 Canceled - Domain was not retagged or not retagged in time by losing registrar
45 Order cancelled
Example
The following query requests information on transfer order detail (one item in a transfer order) ID 301770, and
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GetOrderDetail&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&TransferOrderDetailID=301770&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that tranfer order detail ID 301770 is for the transfer of domain partnerdomain2.net,
and provides details of the order:
<tld>net</tld>
<lock>True</lock>
<renew>False</renew>
<domainpassword />
<ordertype />
<contacts>
<Registrant>None</Registrant>
<Tech>None</Tech>
<Admin>None</Admin>
<Billing>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingFax>+1.5555555556</BillingFax>
<BillingPhone>+1.5555555555</BillingPhone>
<UseRegInfoAbove>True</UseRegInfoAbove>
<auxID />
<regID />
</Billing>
</contacts>
<Command>TP_GETORDERDETAIL</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
3/13/09 509
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResendEmail
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 510
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderReview
Description
Definition
Retrieve information on a transfer order.
Usage
Use this comand to retrieve information on a transfer order— a request originated by you to transfer a name into
your account.
This command differs from the TP_GetOrderDetail command in that TP_GetOrderDetail retrieves a larger set of
information, including the status of the order and detailed contact information.
Availability
Constraints
• The transfer order must have originated from this account.
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderID Required Order ID number that was returned when you originated 7
your transfer. You can also retrieve this number using the
TP_GetOrderStatuses comand.
OrderType Required Permitted value is Transfer 8
or XML.

TransferOrderID ID number of the transfer order
OrderType Type of the order
TransferOrderDetailID Transfer order detail ID number, from our records
3/13/09 511

Price Price that will be charged to this account if the transfer is successful
Lock Registrar lock setting that was specified in the transfer order
Renew Auto-renew setting that was specified in the transfer order
DomainPassword Domain password, if one was specified in the transfer order
UseContacts Use this account’s default contacts
AuthInfo EPP Key associated with this domain. Some TLDs require this code to
authorize a transfer
RRProcessor RRProcessor we use
TransferOrderDetailCount Number of domain names in this order
TransferTotalPrice Total charges if all domains in this order transfer successfully
AuthInfoStillRequired Yes indicates we have not yet received the EPP key (authorization
code) for at least one domain in this order. If you use the
TP_CreateOrder command to begin an order, then allow customers to
supply authorization codes on a separate page before using
TP_SubmitOrder, you would use this value to determine whether to
display the auth code page.
back to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests details on transfer order 465681 and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GetOrderReview&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&TransferOrderID=465681&OrderType=Transfer&
responsetype=xml
<ordertype>Transfer</ordertype>
<transferorderreview>
<sld>transferdomain</sld>
<tld>com</tld>
<price>8.95</price>
<lock>True</lock>
3/13/09 512
<renew>True</renew>
<domainpassword />
<authinfo />
<RRProcessor>Partner Domains Inc.</RRProcessor>
<transfertotalprice>8.95</transfertotalprice>
<authinfostillrequired>No</authinfostillrequired>
</transferorderreview>
<Command>TP_GETORDERREVIEW</Command>
<Site>e</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 513
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetOrdersByDomain
Description
Definition
Retrieve transfer information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to list a history and status of transfer orders for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
XML.

OrderCount Number of transfer orders that have been submitted for this domain.
TransferOrderIDX Transfer order detail number. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
X=1 to OrderCount
LoginIDX The account this transfer order is in. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
OrderDateX The date the order was submitted. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
3/13/09 514

OrderStatusX Current status of the order. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
StatusIDX TransferOrder StatusID number. Options are:
0 New
1 Authorization Succeeded
2 Authorization Failed
3 Processing
4 Order queued
5 Ready for Billing
6 Order complete
7 Order canceled.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests transfer order information for domain name partnerdomain2.net, and requests
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GetOrdersByDomain&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&sld=partnerdomain2&tld=net&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that partnerdomain2.net is in transfer order ID 445413, initiated by account
rcompartnerid:
<TransferOrder>
<loginid>rcompartnerid</loginid>
<orderstatus>Processing</orderstatus>
</TransferOrder>
<ordercount>1</ordercount>
<Command>TP_GETORDERSBYDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 515
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 516
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_GetOrderStatuses
Description
Definition
Get a list of orders including Closed for the last 6 months.
Usage
Use this command to list all transfer orders for an account ID.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
IncludeClosedOrders Optional Set =1 to return closed orders in the list. 1
HTML, or XML.

TransferOrderID Transfer order number
OrderDate Date the order was entered
OrderTypeID Type ID of order
OrderTypeDesc Type of order
StatusID Status ID of transfer order. Options:
0 Transfer request has been made
1 Fax has been received
2 Order canceled
3 Order complete
4 Processing
5 Order not submitted
3/13/09 517

StatusDesc Status description of transfer order. See text descriptions of statuses in StatusID
parameter, above.
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
• The OrderIDs returned can be used to call functions to view or update transfer orders.
Example
The following query requests the status of all transfer orders by account rcompartnerid, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GetOrderStatuses&
The response lists the status of every transfer order placed by rcompartnerid. The complete output for transfer
order ID 445413 is included here; details of other orders are abridged:
<transferorder>
<orderdate>2002-07-29T17:19:29.437</orderdate>
<tos>
<tot>
</tot>
</tos>
</transferorder>
<transferorder>
.
.
.
</transferorder>
<FoundAtLeastOnePendingOrder>False</FoundAtLeastOnePendingOrder>
<Command>TP_GETORDERSTATUSES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
3/13/09 518
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 519
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_GetTLDInfo
TP_GetTLDInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of information required for transferring domains, for each TLD.
Usage
Use this command to list the information that each Registry requires when domains are transferred.
A typical use for this command is administrative. When your customers submit transfer requests, you can use this
command to guide you in what is required for processing the orders.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
QueryFlag Required Which subset of TLDs to return. Permitted values are: 1
0 All TLDs
1 Transferable TLDs
2 Transferable via auto-verification
3 Transferable via fax
4 Authorization key required for transfer
5 Lockable TLDs
6 Both lockable and transferable
XML.
3/13/09 520

TLDIDX ID number for this TLD, used by our database. Indexed X when
TLDX Top-level domain name (extension). Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
HTML.
ProtocolX Registry protocol. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
AbleToLockX Registry permits locking (user ability to prevent domain from being transfered
without authorization)? Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
RealTimeX Registry processes domain registrations in real time? Indexed X when
TransferableX Is this TLD transferable? Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
HasAuthInfoX Does this TLD require an authorization code for transfers? Indexed X when
TransByAutoVeriX Does this Registry permit transfers by auto-verification? Indexed X when
TransByFaxX Does this Registry permit transfers by fax? Indexed X when
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of TLDs that satisfy QueryFlag=6—TLDs that are both lockable and
transferable—and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_GETTLDINFO&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&QueryFlag=6&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a list of TLDs and their characteristics, and an ErrCount value 0, confirm that the query was
successful:
<tldtable>
<tld>
<TLDID>0</TLDID>
<TLD>com</TLD>
<Protocol>RRP</Protocol>
<AbleToLock>True</AbleToLock>
<RealTime>True</RealTime>
<Transferable>True</Transferable>
3/13/09 521
<HasAuthInfo>False</HasAuthInfo>
<TransByAutoVeri>True</TransByAutoVeri>
<TransByFax>True</TransByFax>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>1</TLDID>
<TLD>net</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>2</TLDID>
<TLD>org</TLD>
<Protocol>EPP</Protocol>
<HasAuthInfo>True</HasAuthInfo>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>3</TLDID>
<TLD>cc</TLD>
</tld>
</tldtable>
<Command>TP_GETTLDINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 522
Related commands
AddToCart
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_SubmitOrder
3/13/09 523
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_ResendEmail
TP_ResendEmail
Description
Definition
Resend the Domain Transfer Request authorization email. This is the email we send to the WhoIs contact on
record at the Registry, requesting their authorization to transfer the domain name into the account specified in this
query string.
Usage
Use this command to resend the Domain Transfer Request email for a transfer. You would typically use this
command when the owner who is losing the domain updates their email address after we have sent an initial
authorization email.
This command can only be used between the time we send an initial Domain Transfer Request email, and the
time we receive a response.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must be one that is transferring into this account.
Input parameters

size
UID Required Login ID of the account that requested the transfer (the 20
gaining account)
PW Required Password of the account that requested the transfer (the 20
gaining account)
register.com) of the domain to be transferred
TLD Required Top-level domain name (extension) of the domain to be 15
transferred
XML.
3/13/09 524

Success True indicates the query was successful
values.
client.
Notes
• If you are transferring a domain name between two of your own accounts at different registrars, you can
reduce delays by updating your email address in the losing account before you submit a transfer order.
Example
The following query resends confirmation emails for the transfer of partnerdomain3.info, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_RESENDEMAIL&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&SLD=partnerdomain3&tld=info&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success value of True indicates that the query was successful:
<Command>TP_RESENDEMAIL</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 525
Related commands
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
3/13/09 526
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_ResubmitLocked
Description
Definition
Resubmit a request for a previously locked domain name.
Usage
Use this command after you have previously submitted a transfer request, received an error message saying the
domain was locked, and have had the registrant of the domain unlock it. This command may also be used to
resubmit a transfer that was rejected because the domain was registered less than 60 days ago.
Availability
Constraints
• The transfer order detail ID must be valid.
• The transfer order detail ID must belong to a domain that previously failed to transfer because it was
locked.
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderDetailID Required Transfer Order Detail ID. To retrieve this value, use 10
the TP_GetOrder command.
HTML, or XML.

TransferOrderID New Transfer Order ID
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 527
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_ResubmitLocked

client.
Notes
Example
Previously, account rcompartnerid had requested that a domain be transferred into this account, and received
an e-mail stating that the transfer could not complete because the domain was locked. The owner of account
rcompartnerid contacted the owner of the domain and had the lock removed. The following query resubmits the
transfer request, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_ResubmitLocked&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&TransferOrderDetailID=607291&responsetype=xml
The Success=True parameter value in the response, and the new TransferOrderID, confirm a successful
request:
<transferorder>
</transferorder>
<Command>TP_RESUBMITLOCKED</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![ CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResendEmail
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 528
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_SubmitOrder
TP_SubmitOrder
Description
Definition
Submit a preconfigured transfer order.
Usage
Use this command to submit a transfer order that has been created and configured using the TP_CreateOrder
command, but not submitted. Domain names in this status appear on the Pending orders page.
Availability
Constraints
• The TransferOrderID must identify an order that has been successfully created but not submitted.
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderID Required Transfer order ID number. To retrieve this value, 10
use the TP_GetOrderStatuses command.
EndUserIP Required for End user’s IP address. This is used in fraud 15
our CC checking, as part of our order processing service.
processing Use format NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
UseCreditCard Optional for Permitted values are yes and no. The credit card 3
resellers who supplied in this query string is charged only if
use our credit UseCreditCard=yes. If this param is omitted or if
card UseCreditCard=no, the account balance rather
processing than the credit card is debited for this transaction.
AND want to This is true even if the query string includes all the
charge this Registrant contact and credit card information.
transaction to
the credit
card included
in this query
string
3/13/09 529

size
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
RegistrantCountry Required for Registrant country. Two-letter country code is a 60
our CC permitted format.
processing
our CC
processing
and for .org
names when
you supply
new
Registrant
information
our CC +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where CountryCode
processing and PhoneNumber use only numeric characters.
our CC
processing
CardType Required for Credit card type. Permitted values are Visa, 20
our CC Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
processing
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
CreditCardExpMonth Required for Expiration month of the credit card, in format MM 2
our CC
processing
CreditCardExpYear Required for Expiration year of the credit card, in format YYYY 4
our CC
processing
our CC
processing
3/13/09 530

size
our CC
processing
ChargeAmount Required for Amount to charge this credit card. Required format 6
our CC is DD.cc
processing
HTML, or XML.

values.
client.
Notes
Example
Transfer order 445440 was created with command TP_CreateOrder, with parameter PreConfig=1. With that
parameter value, the order was created and a transfer order ID was assigned, but the order was not submitted
instantly. The following query uses the transfer order ID to submit the preconfigured order, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_SubmitOrder&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&TransferOrderID=445440&responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count of 0 indicates that the order was submitted successfully:
<Command>TP_SUBMITORDER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 531
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_GetTLDInfo
TP_ResendEmail
TP_ResubmitLocked
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 532
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: TP_UpdateOrderDetail
Description
Definition
Update a preconfigured transfer order before submitting the order.
Usage
Use this command to configure registrar lock, auto-renew, domain password, or contact information for a domain
name that is in the process of being transferred to Register.com.
This command is typically used after an order has been created using the TP_CreateOrder command with the
parameter PreConfig=1. Once the transfer order has been configured using this command, the next step is
typically to use the TP_SubmitOrder command, which causes the transfer order to be processed.
Availability
Constraints
• The transfer order detail ID must be valid and must be part of an order created under this account.
• The transfer order must be in a StatusID of 5 (Order not submitted).
Input parameters

size
TransferOrderDetailID Required Transfer order detail ID. Use the 10
TP_GetOrder command to retrieve this
value.
Lock Optional; Set registrar lock on the name. Permitted 5
default is values are True or False.
True
Renew Optional; Set auto-renew. Permitted values are 5
default is True or False.
True
DomainPassword Optional Set a domain password on the name 60
3/13/09 533

size
DeleteOrderDetail Optional Remove all names from this order,. 3
To remove all names, supply
DeleteOrderDetail=Yes
RegistrantAddress1 Optional; Registrant address 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantCity Optional; Registrant city 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantCountry Optional; Registrant country 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantEmailAddress Optional; Registrant email address 128
Required for
Fax orders
and for .org
names for
which you are
supplying
new
Registrant
information
RegistrantFax Optional Registrant fax number. Required format is 20
numeric characters.
RegistrantFirstName Optional; Registrant first name 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantLastName Optional; Registrant last name 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantOrganizationName Optional; Registrant organization 60
Required for
Fax orders
RegistrantPhone Optional; Registrant phone. Required format is 20
Required for +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
Fax orders CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
numeric characters.
S state
P province
UseContacts Optional Set =1 to transfer existing WhoIs contacts 1
when the transfer is complete
3/13/09 534

size
ExtendedAttributes Required for Extended attributes, required for some n/a
TLDs that use country code TLDs. You can retrieve a list
extended of required extended attributes for any
attributes, TLD using the GetExtAttributes command.
when
UseContacts
=0
RegistrantUseContact Optional If set =none then Billing contact will be 3
used, otherwise Registrant contact data
must be submitted
Tech* Optional Technical contact data. See Note. *
TechUseContact Optional If set =none then no contact will be used, 3
otherwise Tech contact data must be
submitted.
AuxBilling* Optional Auxiliary Billing contact data. See Note. *
AuxBillingUseContact Optional If set =none then no contact will be used, 3
otherwise Auxbilling contact data must be
submitted.

SLD Second-level domain name
TLD Top-level domain name
lock Registrar lock status
renew Auto-renew status
domainpassword Password to set for the domain name
statusid Status ID of the order
statusdesc Description of the status
price Transfer price
usecontacts Use the current contacts flag
Registrant* Registrant contact data
AuxBilling* Auxilliary Billing contact data
Tech* Technical contact data
Admin* Administrative contact data
Billing* Billing contact data
ErrCount) values.
to the client.
3/13/09 535
Notes
• To update Technical or Auxilliary Billing contacts submit the contact data by replacing Registrant* param
names with Tech* or AuxBilling* param names.
Example
The following query requests that for transfer order detail ID 301770, the registrar lock and automatic renew
options both be set to On. It also instructs that contact information should remain unchanged, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=TP_UpdateOrderDetail&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&TransferOrderDetailID=301770&Lock=On&Renew=On&
RegistrantUseContact=none&TechUseContact=none&AuxBillingUseContact=none&responsetype=xml
The response indicates the successful setting of the registrar lock and automatic renew options:
<tld>net</tld>
<lock>True</lock>
<renew>True</renew>
<domainpassword />
<statusdesc>Unable to retrieve current domain contacts from UW</statusdesc>
<ordertype />
<contacts>
<Registrant>
<RegistrantPartyID>
{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}
</RegistrantPartyID>
<RegistrantAddress1>111 Main Street</RegistrantAddress1>
<RegistrantAddress2 />
<RegistrantCity>Hometown</RegistrantCity>
<RegistrantCountry>US</RegistrantCountry>
<RegistrantEmailAddress>[email protected]</RegistrantEmailAddress>
<RegistrantFax>555-555-5556</RegistrantFax>
<RegistrantFirstName>John</RegistrantFirstName>
<RegistrantJobTitle>President</RegistrantJobTitle>
<RegistrantLastName>Doe</RegistrantLastName>
<RegistrantOrganizationName>Partner Domains Inc.</RegistrantOrganizationName>
<RegistrantPhone>555-555-5555</RegistrantPhone>
<RegistrantPostalCode>99999</RegistrantPostalCode>
<RegistrantStateProvince>NY</RegistrantStateProvince>
<RegistrantStateProvinceChoice>S</RegistrantStateProvinceChoice>
</Registrant>
<Tech>None</Tech>
<Admin>None</Admin>
<Billing>
3/13/09 536
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingFax>555-555-5556</BillingFax>
<BillingPhone>555-555-5555</BillingPhone>
<UseBelowAuxInfo>True</UseBelowAuxInfo>
<auxID />
<regID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</regID>
</Billing>
</contacts>
<Command>TP_UPDATEORDERDETAIL</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderReview
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_GetTLDInfo
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
UpdatePushList
3/13/09 537
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateAccountInfo
UpdateAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Update a variety of account information, for this account or a retail subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to update Billing contact information for this account.
Use this command to change the password or authorization question for a retail subaccount.
Use this command to update credit card information for this account or a retail subaccount.
To add funds to a reseller account, use the RefillAccount command.
Availability
Constraints
• The account identified in the UID parameter must be a reseller account.
Input parameters

size
NewUID Required for Retail subaccount login ID. 20
changing the Permitted format is alphanumeric
password of a characters. Must be unique in our
retail subaccount system
NewPW Required for Desired password for the retail 20
changing the subaccount for the future.
password of a Permitted values are 6 to 20
retail subaccount alphanumeric characters and
symbols. Not permitted: space, #,
%, &
ConfirmNewPW Required for Confirm desired password for the 20
changing the retail subaccount for the future
password of a
retail subaccount
3/13/09 538

size
AuthQuestionType Required Type of question. Permitted values: 10
smaiden mother’s maiden name
sbirth city of birth
ssocial last 4 digits of SSN
shigh high school
AuthQuestionAnswer Required The answer to the question type 50
(mother's maiden name, city of
birth, last 4 digits of social security
or high school)
Account Optional Account ID of the account to be 11
updated
RegistrantOrganizationName Required for us to Registrant organization 60
apply the Web site
URL
WebSiteURL Optional overall, URL of the domain registration Web 150
but Required if we site, for billing purposes
bill your
customers for
domain renewals
and other services
RegistrantOrgan
izationName is
supplied
RegistrantAddress1 Required Registrant Address 60
S state
P province
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for WhoIs 128
RegistrantEmailAddress_Contact Optional Email address for us to contact to 128
you about your domain name
account
RegistrantPhone Required Registrant phone. Required format 17
is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
characters.
RegistrantFax Required if Registrant fax number. Required 17
RegistrantOrgan format is
izationName is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
supplied where CountryCode and
characters.
3/13/09 539

size
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account
updating credit
card information
of a retail account

values.
client.
3/13/09 540
Notes
• This command updates credit card information only if this is a retail account.
Example
The following query updates account information: password, authorization question, or contact information. The
query requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UpdateAccountInfo&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&NewUID=rcompartnerid2&
NewPW=rcompartnerpw2&ConfirmNewPW=rcompartnerpw2&
AuthQuestionType=smaiden&AuthQuestionAnswer=Jones&RegistrantAddress1=111+Main+St.&
RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantCountry=United+States&
[email protected]&RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&
RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Doe&RegistrantJobTitle=President&
RegistrantOrganizationName=Partner+Domains+Inc.&RegistrantPhone=+1.5555555555&
RegistrantPostalCode=99999&RegistrantStateProvince=NY&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=S&
RegistrantNexus=United+States&RegistrantPurpose=&responsetype=xml
The response confirms the Successful update of account information:
<StatusEditContact>Successful</StatusEditContact>
<Fname>John</Fname>
<Lname>Doe</Lname>
<Address2 />
<Fax>5555555556</Fax>
<EmailAddress_Contact>[email protected]</EmailAddress_Contact>
<URL />
<GetAccountInfo>
</GetAccountInfo>
<CCName />
<CCNumber />
<CCType />
<CCMonth />
<CCYear />
3/13/09 541
<GetCustomerPreferences>
<DefPeriod />
</GetCustomerPreferences>
<Command>UPDATEACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
3/13/09 542
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateAccountPricing
Description
Definition
Set wholesale prices for a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to set the wholesale prices that one subaccount pays you for each product.
To set retail prices for consumers who buy directly from this account, use PE_SetPricing.
Availability
Constraints
• The subaccount named with LoginID or Account parameters must be a subaccount of the account
named in the uid and pw parameters.
Input parameters

size
LoginID Optional Subaccount login ID (use 20
GetAccountInfo to retrieve the
subaccount login ID)
Account Required Subaccount ID number (use 11
GetAccountInfo to retrieve the
subaccount ID number;
format is NNN-aa-NNNN)
AcctType Required Type of subaccount that you 8
want this subaccount to be
recorded as, after this query
executes. Permitted values are
reseller and retail. Note that
once an account is converted
to reseller status, it cannot be
changed back to retail status.
3/13/09 543

size
TLDprice Optional Price for registering a domain 5000.00
name, in DD.cc format. For
example, comprice=24.95
sets the price of registering a
.com name to $US24.95.
TLDrenew Optional Price for renewing a domain 5000.00
name, in DD.cc format
TLDtransfer Optional Price for transferring a domain 5000.00
name and extending its
expiration date by one year, in
DD.cc format
DNSHosting Optional Price for one year of DNS 5000.00
hosting, in DD.cc format
POP3 Optional Price for a 10-pak of POP3 5000.00
mailboxes, in DD.cc format
DotNameBundle Optional Price of a .name domain plus 5000.00
email service from the .name
Registry, in DD.cc format
45_valueadd Optional Price of email forwarding, in 5000.00
DD.cc format
47_valueadd Optional Price of URL forwarding, in 5000.00
DD.cc format
WPPS Optional Price for one year of Whois 5000.00
Privacy Protection Service, in
DD.cc format
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL Optional Price for a one-year GeoTrust 5000.00
QuickSSL certificate, in DD.cc
format
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL-Premium Optional Price for a one-year GeoTrust 5000.00
QuickSSL Premium certificate,
in DD.cc format
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID Optional Price for a one-year GeoTrust 5000.00
True BusinessID certificate, in
DD.cc format
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-Wildcard Optional Price for a one-year GeoTrust 5000.00
True BusinessID Wildcard
certificate, in DD.cc format
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-EV Optional Price for a one-year GeoTrust 5000.00
True BusinessID with EV
Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL Optional Price for a one-year RapidSSL 5000.00
WSCBasic Optional Price for WebSite Creator 5000.00
Basic package, in DD.cc
format
WSCFull Optional Price for WebSite Creator Full 5000.00
package, in DD.cc format
WSCEcommerce Optional Price for WebSite Creator 5000.00
eCommerce package, in DD.cc
format
Hosted-Exchange-Mailbox Optional Price for one Hosted Microsoft 5000.00
Exchange mailbox, per month,
in DD.cc format
3/13/09 544

size
Hosted-Exchange-Extra-Storage Optional Price for 100MB of extra 5000.00
storage on the Hosted
Microsoft Exchange server, per
month, in DD.cc format
Hosted-Exchange-BlackBerry Optional Price for delivery to one 5000.00
BlackBerry device, per month,
in DD.cc format
Hosted-Exchange-BlackBerry-Setup-Fee Optional Setup fee for BlackBerry 5000.00
support, a one-time fee per
device, in DD.cc format
Hosted-Exchange-GoodLink Optional Price for delivery to one Good 5000.00
Mobile Messaging device, per
month, in DD.cc format
Hosted-Exchange-GoodLink-Setup-Fee Optional Setup fee for Good Mobile 5000.00
Messaging support, a one-
time fee per device, in DD.cc
format
Hosted-Exchange-ActiveSync Optional Price for delivery to one 5000.00
ActiveSync device, per month,
in DD.cc format
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options 4
are Text (default), HTML, or
XML.

Account Subaccount ID
AccountType Subaccount type
Count Number of prices modified
Status Success status for this query
values.
client.
Notes
3/13/09 545
Example
The following query sets prices for several products. It requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?uid=rcompartnerid&
pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=154-dz-5567&
AcctType=reseller&command=UPDATEACCOUNTPRICING&comprice=14&
comrenew=15&comtransfer=16&pop3=29.95&dotnamebundle=20.95&responsetype=xml
<Set>
<AcctType>reseller</AcctType>
<Count>5</Count>
</Set>
<Command>UPDATEACCOUNTPRICING</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
HE_GetPricing
PE_GetDomainPricing
PE_GetResellerPrice
PE_GetRetailPrice
PE_GetRetailPricing
PE_SetPricing
WSC_GetPricing
3/13/09 546
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateCart
UpdateCart
Description
Definition
Update items in the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command to activate or deactivate a shopping cart item or to change its quantity.
Availability
Constraints
• The item must be in the customer’s shopping cart.
Input parameters

size
ItemIDX(X=1 Required Input value is the six-digit cart item ID. Retrieve this number 10
to using the GetCartContent command.
NumberOfItems)
ItemStatusX Optional New status of the item. Permitted values are on to make the 3
status active, off to make it inactive. Items set to status on
are subject to the next operation you perform on the cart.
ItemQtyX Required New quantity for the item 4
RenewX Optional Renewal setting for the item. Permitted values are on to 4
auto-renew, none for an item that is not renewable. If
RenewX is not supplied, item is set to not auto-renew.
ClearItems Optional Toggle all items in cart to status I (Inactive). Permitted value 3
is Yes.
ActivateItems Optional Toggle all items in cart to status A (Active). Permitted value 3
is Yes.
XML.
3/13/09 547
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateCart

values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that item 365690 be moved from active (A) to inactive (I) status, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=updatecart&
ItemID1=365690&ItemStatus1=on&ItemQty1=1&Renew1=1&ResponseType=xml
In the response, an ErrCount value 0 indicates that the query was successful:
<Command>UPDATECART</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddBulkDomains
AddToCart
DeleteFromCart
GetCartContent
InsertNewOrder
PurchasePreview
3/13/09 548
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateCusPreferences
Description
Definition
Update the customer preference settings for an account.
Usage
Use this command to update customer preference settings.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
DefPeriod Required Default period for auto-renew and registrar lock 2
settings, in years. A domain’s registration period
cannot extend more than 10 years beyond today.
RegLock Optional; RegLock=on prevents a domain from being 3
default is on transferred to a new registrar.
RegLock=off allows unrestricted transfer of a
domain from one registrar to another.
AutoRenew Optional; AutoRenew=on renews domain names 3
default is off automatically.
AutoRenew=off does not renew domain names
automatically.
AutoPakRenew Optional; AutoPakRenew=on renews POP email paks 3
AutoPakRenew=off does not renew POP paks
automatically.
Note: This parameter displays in the UI only if auto-
renewal of POP paks is enabled as a for-pay feature
for this account.
3/13/09 549

size
EMailForwardRenew Optional; EMailForwardRenew=on renews email forwarding 3
EMailForwardRenew=off does not renew email
forwarding automatically.
Note: This parameter displays in the UI only if email
forwarding is enabled as a for-pay feature for this
account.
URLForwardingRenew Optional; URLForwardingRenew=on renews URL forwarding 3
URLForwardingRenew=off does not renew URL
forwarding automatically.
AllowDNS Optional; Allow domain name servers. Options are 0 and 1. 1
default is 1
UseDNS Optional; Which name servers a domain is using. 1
default is 0 If UseDNS=1, use our name servers.
If UseDNS=0, use the name servers specified in this
query string.
Note: If UseDNS or DNSY are present in the
UpdateCusPreferences query string, none of the
other settings (DefPeriod through AllowDNS) will be
updated.
DNSY Optional Use name of domain name server. For example, 16
Y=1, 2, 3, . . . DNS1=dns01.gpn.register.com.
Note: If UseDNS or DNSY are present in the
UpdateCusPreferences query string, none of the
other DNS settings (DefPeriod through AllowDNS)
will be updated.
UseParentDefault Optional Use the same host records as this account’s parent 1
account? Permitted values are:
0 Do not use parent account’s defaults
1 Use parent account’s defaults
RecordTypeX Optional Record type of host record X. Permitted values are: 5
X=1, 2, 3, . . . A Address
CNAME Alias record type, to
with another host
URL URL redirect
server
forwarding)
3/13/09 550

size
AddressX Optional Address to redirect to. 260
If RecordTypeX=A, AddressX must be an IP
address
If RecordTypeX=CNAME, AddressX must be a fully
qualified domain name (see Note) or a host name
If RecordTypeX=URL, AddressX must be the exact
URL of the page you redirect to, or an IP address, or a
fully qualified domain name (see Note)
If RecordTypeX=FRAME, AddressX is the actual
URL, or the IP address, or the fully qualified domain
name (see Note) of the page you want to display
when someone types Your_Domain.com
If RecordTypeX=MX, AddressX must be a fully
qualified domain name (see Note) or a host name
If RecordTypeX=MXE, AddressX must be an IP
address
If RecordTypeX=TXT, AddressX is a text (SPF)
record. For help writing an SPF record, go to
HostNameX Optional Name of host record X, for example, 60
HostName1=www
ShowPopUps Optional; Show menus. 1
default is 1 ShowPopUps=0 hides menus.
ShowPopUps=1 shows menus.
HTML, or XML.

Update A return value of Successful indicates that customer preferences were successfully
updated.
values.
ent.
Notes
3/13/09 551
Example
The following query requests the updating of several customer preference settings, and requests the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UPDATECUSPREFERENCES&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&DefPeriod=4&AutoRenew=on&
AutoPakRenew=on&RegLock=on&URLForwardingRenew=on&
EmailForwardRenew=on&AllowDNS=0&ShowPopups=0&responsetype=xml
In the response, the ErrCount value 0 indicates that the update was successful:
<Command>UPDATECUSPREFERENCES</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsRealTimeTLD>0</IsRealTimeTLD
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckLogin
CreateAccount
CreateSubAccount
GetAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
GetAllAccountInfo
GetCusPreferences
GetOrderDetail
GetOrderList
GetReport
GetSubAccounts
GetTransHistory
SetPakRenew
UpdateAccountInfo
3/13/09 552
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateExpiredDomains
Description
Definition
Reactivate an expired domain in real time.
Usage
Use this command to reactivate a domain after it has expired, while it is in Expired status. This command
reactivates a domain in real time.
Before a domain expires, use the Extend command to renew it. We recommend renewing at least a week before
a domain expires.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain must be in Expired status. The registrar sets the duration of the grace period between
expiration and deletion from the registrar’s database. To retrieve a list of expired domains, use the
GetDomains command with parameter Tab=ExpiredDomains.
• Customer must have sufficient funds. The charge for reactivation is the same as a one-year renewal.
Input parameters

size
DomainName Required Domain Name (for example, example.com) 65
XML.

Status Reactivation status.
values.
3/13/09 553
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateExpiredDomains

ent.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the reactivation of expired domain partnerdomain.com, and requests the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UpdateExpiredDomains&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&DomainName=partnerdomain.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Status value indicates a successful reactivation:
<ReactivateDomainName>
<Status>REACTIVATION PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY! The orderid is 156514444.</Status>
</ReactivateDomainName>
<Command>UPDATEEXPIREDDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
Extend
Extend_RGP
GetDomainExp
GetExtendInfo
GetRenew
InsertNewOrder
SetRenew
3/13/09 554
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateMetaTag
UpdateMetaTag
Description
Definition
Add or update the HTML metatags for one of a domain’s host records.
Usage
Use this command to raise the probability that a search engine will find this domain.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
register.com)
MetaTagHostID Required Metatag host ID, our internal tracking number. You can 8
retrieve host IDs using the GetRegHosts command.
TitleBar Recommended Content to display in the browser title bar. Replace spaces 100
to optimize with +.
search ranking
SiteDescription Recommended Content to display in search engine results. Replace 250
to optimize spaces with +.
search ranking
Keywords Recommended List of keywords for search engines. Separate keywords 250
to optimize with +.
search ranking
or XML.
3/13/09 555

TitleBar New title to display in browser title bar
SiteDescription New description to display in search engine results
Keywords New search-engine keywords for this host ID
DomainNameID 9-digit domain name ID, our internal tracking number
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query sets values for the metatags, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UpdateMetaTag&
MetaTagHostID=11415002&TitleBar=MY+COOL+TITLE&
SiteDescription=MY+SITE+DESCRIPTION&Keywords=MY+SITE+KEYWORDS&ResponseType=XML
In the response, metatag values that match your desired content, and an ErrCount value 0, confirm that the
query was successful:
<metatags>
<titlebar>MY COOL TITLE</titlebar>
<sitedescription>MY SITE DESCRIPTION</sitedescription>
<keywords>MY SITE KEYWORDS</keywords>
</metatags>
<Command>UPDATEMETATAG</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 556
Related commands
GetHosts
GetMetaTag
GetRegHosts
SetHosts
3/13/09 557
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateNameServer
UpdateNameServer
Description
Definition
Change the IP address of a name server in the Registry’s records.
Usage
Use this command when the IP address of a name server changes.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name of the name server must belong to this account.
• Register.com must be the authoritative registrar (in the Registry’s records) for the root domain.
• The registrar lock for the name server domain must be set to off while you update name servers. Once
the name server IP has been updated, you can (and we recommend that you do) switch the registrar lock
back on.
Input parameters

size
OldIP Required Old IP address of the name server in the Registry’s records 15
NewIP Required New IP address of the name server in the Registry’s records 15
NS Required Use name of the name server, in the Registry’s records 84
XML.

NSSuccess 1 indicates that the name server IP update is successful
RRPCode Registry processing status code
3/13/09 558
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateNameServer

RRPText Text explanation of registry code
values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query changes the IP of name server dns1.partnerdomain.com and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=updatenameserver&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&OldIP=127.0.0.1&NewIP=127.0.0.2&
NS=dns1.partnerdomain.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the NsSuccess value 1 and RRPText value Command completed successfully confirm
that the query was successful:
<Command>UPDATENAMESERVER</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
CheckNSStatus
DeleteNameServer
GetDNS
GetDNSStatus
ModifyNS
ModifyNSHosting
RegisterNameServer
3/13/09 559
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateNotificationAmount
Description
Definition
Update the account balance amount at which you want to be notified.
Usage
Use this command to specify the account balance at which you want a reminder to refill your account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
NotifyAmount Required Points/$US amount at which you want us to send you a 9999.99
reminder email that this account needs refilling. Use
DD.cc format
or XML.

values.
client.
3/13/09 560
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateNotificationAmount
Notes
Example
The following query changes the notification amount to 505 points/$US and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UpdateNotificationAmount&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&NotifyAmount=505&responsetype=xml
<Update>Successful</Update>
<Command>UPDATENOTIFICATIONAMOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
[CDATA]
</debug>
Related commands
GetBalance
RefillAccount
3/13/09 561
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdatePushList
UpdatePushList
Description
Definition
Update a list of domains to push into another account.
Usage
Use this command to push names from one Register.com account to another.
Availability
Constraints
• Both the origin and destination accounts must be in our system.
Input parameters

size
PushToLoginID Required LoginID of the account to push the names into 16
DomainList Required CRLF-delimited list of domain names (URLEncode value for 4000
CRLF is %0D%0A).
XML.

SuccessfulPush True if successful or False otherwise
ErrCount) values.
3/13/09 562

client.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that partnerdomain2.net and partnerdomain3.info be pushed to account
giambi, and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UpdatePushList&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&PushToLoginID=giambi&
domainlist=partnerdomain2.net%0D%0Apartnerdomain3.info&responsetype=xml
In the response, the SuccessfulPush values of Yes indicate that each domain was pushed successfully:
<UPDATEPUSHLIST>
<PUSH-DOMAIN>
<DomainName>partnerdomain2.net</DomainName>
<DomainListWrongFormat>Valid</DomainListWrongFormat>
<DomainNameNotInYourAccount>Yes</DomainNameNotInYourAccount>
<SuccessfulPush>Yes</SuccessfulPush>
</PUSH-DOMAIN>
<PUSH-DOMAIN>
<DomainName>partnerdomain3.info</DomainName>
<DomainListWrongFormat>Valid</DomainListWrongFormat>
<DomainNameNotInYourAccount>Yes</DomainNameNotInYourAccount>
<SuccessfulPush>Yes</SuccessfulPush>
</PUSH-DOMAIN>
</UPDATEPUSHLIST>
<Command>UPDATEPUSHLIST</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
3/13/09 563
Related commands
PushDomain
TP_CancelOrder
TP_CreateOrder
TP_GetOrder
TP_GetOrderDetail
TP_GetOrderStatuses
TP_ResubmitLocked
TP_SubmitOrder
3/13/09 564
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: UpdateRenewalSettings
Description
Definition
Update the settings regarding our notifying your customers about domain renewals.
Usage
Use this command to set or change the way in which we notify your customers about upcoming domain renewals.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
RenewalSetting Optional Renewal setting. Permitted values are: 1
0 Do not contact my customers for renewal
1 Email my customers 25 and 10 days before
expiration; send them to my Web site to renew
2 Contact and charge my customers for renewals
RenewalBCC Optional BCC me on all email correspondence sent to my 1
customers. Permitted values are:
0 Do not BCC me
1 BCC me
3/13/09 565

size
AcceptTerms Optional; must be Do I accept Register.com’s credit card processing 1
accepted before agreement? Permitted values are:
you can use our 0 I do not accept Register.com’s credit card
credit card processing agreement
processing 1 I accept Register.com’s credit card processing
services agreement
URL Recommended URL where customers can renew their domains; use 63
when format www.DomainName.com
RenewalSetting
=1
HTML, or XML.

AcceptTermsStatus Success status of updating credit card terms setting
RenewalSetting Success status of updating renewal settings
ErrCount) values.
client.
Notes
Example
The following query sets preferences for notifying customers about domain renewals, and sends the response in
XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=UPDATERENEWALSETTINGS&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&RenewalSetting=2&RenewalBCC=1&AcceptTerms=1&
URL=www.partnerdomain.com&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the return values Successful and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<UpdateRenewalSettings>
<AcceptTermsStatus>Successful</AcceptTermsStatus>
<RenewalSetting>Successful</RenewalSetting>
</UpdateRenewalSettings>
<Command>UPDATERENEWALSETTINGS</Command>
3/13/09 566
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetCusPreferences
3/13/09 567
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ValidatePassword
ValidatePassword
Description
Definition
Validate a password for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether the password for a domain name is valid.
Availability
Constraints
• The domain name must exist.
Input parameters

size
register.com)
DomainPassword Required Password to access and manage the domain name. 60
or XML.

values.
ent.
3/13/09 568
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: ValidatePassword
Notes
Example
The following query asks whether partnerdomain2pw is the domain password for partnerdomain2.net,
and requests the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=validatepassword&
sld=partnerdomain2&tld=net&domainpassword=partnerdomain2pw&responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count of 0 confirms that partnerdomain2pw is the domain password for
partnerdomain2.net:
<Command>VALIDATEPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>rcom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
GetAllDomains
GetDomainCount
GetDomainExp
GetDomainInfo
GetDomains
GetExtendInfo
GetPasswordBit
GetRegLock
GetRenew
SetPassword
SetRegLock
SetRenew
StatusDomain
3/13/09 569
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: WSC_GetAccountInfo
WSC_GetAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve the information for a Web Site Creator (WSC) account, including the URL for this account to link to the
WSC wizard.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information about a WSC account.
This command retrieves the URL to the Web site creation wizard for this WSC account.
Availability
Constraints
• The Web hosting or WSC stand-alone account must belong to this domain name account.
Input parameters

size
Account Required Name of WSC account. Use the WSC_GetAllPackages 14
command to retrieve a list of WSC accounts.
Language Optional; Language in which to launch the WSC wizard. Permitted 1
default is Eng values are:
Eng English
Spa Spanish
Ger German
Por Portuguese
Fre French
Ita Italian
XML.
3/13/09 570

WebHostID Individual identification number for this WSC account
HostAccount The individual account name of this WSC account
WebStorage Storage space available to this account
BandWidth Monthly bandwidth available to this account
SQLSize Database space available to this account
DatabaseType Type of database configured for this account
POPMailboxes POP mailboxes for this account
Overage Overage option for this account
BillingDate Billing date of this account
Status Active status of this account
OSType Operating system of our server on which your WSC account resides
Terminate Is this account flagged for termination?
TerminateDate If flagged for termination, on what date?
HasWSC Does this account have WSC?
WSCEnabled Is WSC enabled for this account?
WSCLaunchURL The URL for the WSC wizard for this account
WSCCountry The country for the WSC wizard for this account
WSCLanguage The language for the WSC wizard for this account
CurrentPlanPrice Monthly price for WSC
CanUpgrade Is this account eligible for upgrade?
WSCFullPrice Price for WSC Full
WSCECommercePrice Price for WSC eCommerce
WSCVersion WSC version
HostHeaderDomains Host header domains
HasHostHeaders Do these domains have host headers?
WSCPath Return value WSC indicates that this is a Web hosting account that sub-
scribes to WSC
SiteURL URL of the WSC-built Web Site for this account
IsLWSC Is this a WSC Lite free account?
WSCSiteID Our identification number for this WSC site
PointedTo Is the WSC-built Web site pointing to SiteURL?
EmailAddress Email address of WSC account subscriber
HTTPURL Domain name tied to WSC
NextBillPeriod Next billing period
Month For multi-month discounts, the number of months customer pays for to
receive this discount
PromoID For multi-month discounts, the promo code for this discount
DiscountPercent For multi-month discounts, the discount percentage
DiscountPlanCnt Number of discount plans listed here
CanUpdate Can this billing period be changed?
DeleteDate Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
AvailableHeaderDomains Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
AvailableDomainList Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
AvailableDomainCount Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
3/13/09 571

Language Language of the WebSite Creator wizard
to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves information about one WSC stand-alone account, and sends the response in XML
format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/Interface.asp?command=WSC_GETACCOUNTINFO&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&account=LWSC123x4567&responsetype=xml
<WSCHostAccounts>
<HostPackage>
<WebHostID>1398</WebHostID>
<HostAccount>LWSC123x4567</HostAccount>
<WebStorage />
<BandWidth />
<SQLSize />
<DatabaseType />
<POPMailBoxes />
<Overage />
<BillingDate>1/14/2007</BillingDate>
<Status>Active</Status>
<OSType />
<TerminateDate />
<HasWSC>True</HasWSC>
<WSCEnabled>True</WSCEnabled>
<WSCLaunchURL>http://wsc.ehost-services.com/servlet/
CMWizardLN?flush=F7480EBA6798052499D1BA835B436021</WSCLaunchURL>
<currentplanprice>15.05</currentplanprice>
<canupgrade>False</canupgrade>
<wscfullprice />
<wscecommerceprice />
<wscversion>Ecommerce</wscversion>
<HostHeaderDomains>
<Domains>
<Domain>partnerdomain.com</Domain>
<WSCOnlyHeaders>True</WSCOnlyHeaders>
3/13/09 572
<HasPOP>True</HasPOP>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>partnerdomain2.net</Domain>
<HasPOP>False</HasPOP>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>partnerdomain3.info</Domain>
</Domains>
</HostHeaderDomains>
<hashostheaders>True</hashostheaders>
<wscpath>WSC</wscpath>
<siteurl>http://www.partnerdomain.com</siteurl>
<IsLWSC>False</IsLWSC>
<wscsiteid>100</wscsiteid>
<PointedTo>True</PointedTo>
<lwscperiodicbilling>
<currentbillperiod />
<nextbillperiod />
<DiscountPlans>
<Plan>
<Month>3</Month>
<PromoID>53</PromoID>
<DiscountPercent>10</DiscountPercent>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>6</Month>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>12</Month>
</Plan>
</DiscountPlans>
<DiscountPlanCnt>3</DiscountPlanCnt>
<CanUpdate>True</CanUpdate>
<deletedate />
</lwscperiodicbilling>
</HostPackage>
<AvailableHeaderDomains />
<availabledomainlist>False</availabledomainlist>
<availabledomaincount>836</availabledomaincount>
</WSCHostAccounts>
<Command>WSC_GETACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
3/13/09 573
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddToCart
GetAllDomains
PurchaseServices
WSC_GetAllPackages
WSC_GetPricing
WSC_Update_Ops
3/13/09 574
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: WSC_GetAllPackages
WSC_GetAllPackages
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of all WSC accounts.
Usage
Use this command to list all WSC accounts in a domain name account. The response includes a variety of
information about each WSC account, including the URL to launch the WSC site-building wizard for this account.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
GetLaunchURL Optional; Include URL to launch WSC wizard in response? Permitted 1
default is 1 values are 1 to include URL, 0 to omit.
XML.

WebHostID Individual identification number for this WSC account
HostAccount The individual account name of this WSC account
WebStorage Storage space available to this account
BandWidth Monthly bandwidth available to this account
SQLSize Database space available to this account
DatabaseType Type of database configured for this account
POPMailboxes POP mailboxes for this account
3/13/09 575

Overage Overage option for this account
BillingDate Billing date of this account
Status Active status of this account
OSType Operating system of our server on which your account resides
Terminate Is this account flagged for termination?
TerminateDate If flagged for termination, on what date?
HasWSC Does this account have WSC?
WSCEnabled Is WSC enabled for this account?
WSCLaunchURL The URL for the WSC wizard for this account
CurrentPlanPrice Monthly price for WSC
CanUpgrade Is this account eligible for upgrade?
WSCFullPrice Price for WSC Full
WSCECommercePrice Price for WSC eCommerce
WSCVersion WSC version
Domain Name of domain associated with this account
DomainNameID Our identification number for this domain name
WSCOnlyHeaders Is this domain associated with the WSC Web site?
HasPOP Does this domain have POP email associated with it?
HasHostHeaders Do these domains have host headers?
WSCPath Return value WSC indicates that this is a Web hosting account that subscribes
to WSC
SiteURL URL of the WSC-built Web site for this account
IsLWSC Is this a WSC Lite free account?
PointedTo Is the WSC-built Web site pointing to SiteURL?
EmailAddress Email address of WSC subscriber
HTTPURL Domain name associated with this WSC account
CurrentBillPeriod Current billing period
NextBillPeriod Next billing period
Month For multi-month discounts, the number of months customer pays for to
receive this discount
PromoID For multi-month discounts, the promo code for this discount
DiscountPercent For multi-month discounts, the discount percentage
DiscountPlanCnt Number of discount plans listed here
CanUpdate Can this billing period be changed?
DeleteDate Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
3/13/09 576
Example
The following query retrieves a list of WSC accounts, and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=WSC_GETALLPACKAGES&
The response includes a wide variety of information on each WSC account:
<WSCHostAccounts>
<HostPackage>
<WebHostID>1398</WebHostID>
<HostAccount>test121406</HostAccount>
<WebStorage />
<BandWidth />
<SQLSize />
<DatabaseType />
<POPMailBoxes />
<Overage />
<BillingDate>1/14/2007</BillingDate>
<Status>Active</Status>
<OSType />
<TerminateDate />
<HasWSC>True</HasWSC>
<WSCEnabled>True</WSCEnabled>
<WSCLaunchURL>http://wsc.ehost-services.com/servlet/
CMWizardLN?flush=7D2643832113A75809908A9F1913DC72</WSCLaunchURL>
<currentplanprice>15.05</currentplanprice>
<canupgrade>False</canupgrade>
<wscfullprice />
<wscecommerceprice />
<wscversion>Ecommerce</wscversion>
<HostHeaderDomains>
<Domains>
<Domain>partnerdomain.com</Domain>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>partnerdomain2.net</Domain>
<HasPOP>False</HasPOP>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>partnerdomain3.info</Domain>
</Domains>
</HostHeaderDomains>
<hashostheaders>True</hashostheaders>
<wscpath>WSC</wscpath>
<siteurl>http://www.partnerdomain.com</siteurl>
<IsLWSC>False</IsLWSC>
3/13/09 577
<wscsiteid>100</wscsiteid>
<PointedTo>True</PointedTo>
<lwscperiodicbilling>
<currentbillperiod />
<nextbillperiod />
<DiscountPlans>
<Plan>
<Month>3</Month>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>6</Month>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>12</Month>
</Plan>
</DiscountPlans>
<DiscountPlanCnt>3</DiscountPlanCnt>
<CanUpdate>True</CanUpdate>
<deletedate />
</lwscperiodicbilling>
</HostPackage>
.
.
.
Related commands
AddToCart
GetAllDomains
PurchaseServices
WSC_GetAccountInfo
WSC_GetPricing
WSC_Update_Ops
3/13/09 578
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: WSC_GetPricing
WSC_GetPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve this account’s wholesale costs or retail prices for Web Site Creator (WSC), and the URL for our WSC
demo.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the prices this account pays for WSC, or the prices this account charges retail
customers.
Use this command to retrieve the URL to our WSC demo.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

size
GetRetail Optional Get prices this account charges to retail customers? 4
Permitted value is true. Any other value, or not using this
parameter, returns prices this account pays for WSC.
Language Optional; In what language should the WSC wizard launch? 4
default is Eng Permitted values are:
Eng English
Fre French
Ger German
Ita Italian
Por Portuguese
Spa Spanish
XML.
3/13/09 579

LWSCBasicPrice This account’s wholesale cost or retail price for the WSC Basic package
(supports only the WSC Web site)
LWSCFullPrice This account’s wholesale cost or retail price for the WSC Full package
LWSCECommercePrice This account’s wholesale cost or retail price for the WSC eCommercepack-
age
WSCDemoURL URL of our Web Site Creator demo
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves this account’s wholesale costs for Web Site Creator packages, and sends the
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=WSC_GETPRICING&
In the response, WSC prices and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
<wscpricing>
<wscbasicprice>2.85</wscbasicprice>
<wscfullprice>5.75</wscfullprice>
<wscecommerceprice>9.25</wscecommerceprice>
<lwscbasicprice>2.85</lwscbasicprice>
<lwscfullprice>5.75</lwscfullprice>
<lwscecommerceprice>11.75</lwscecommerceprice>
</wscpricing>
<wscdemo>
<wscdemourl>http://wsc.ehost-services.com/create_demo_account.jsp?productId=
WSCENOSSSLYTC215&clientId=RRENOS999JZT4SYQ&language=en&country=US&
wl_name=wl_rcom&demoCallbackUrl=</wscdemourl>
</wscdemo>
<Command>WSC_GETPRICING</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
3/13/09 580
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
AddToCart
GetAllDomains
PurchaseServices
WSC_GetAccountInfo
WSC_GetAllPackages
WSC_Update_Ops
3/13/09 581
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. API commands: WSC_Update_Ops
WSC_Update_Ops
Description
Definition
Upgrade Web Site Creator.
Usage
Use this command to upgrade Web Site Creator accounts that are at least Lite Basic.
The following table lays out the upgrade path for WSC products (Lite, Lite Basic, Lite Full, and Lite eCommerce):
If you have: And want: And purchase in this Use this command:
way:
No WSC WSC Lite No purchase necessary for ServiceSelect
WSC Lite
No WSC Lite Basic Real time PurchaseServices
Lite Full
Lite eCommerce
No WSC Lite Basic Shopping cart ServiceSelect to create Lite,
Lite Full then AddToCart to upgrade to
Lite eCommerce higher plan
Lite Basic Upgrade to a Billing amount is deducted WSC_Update_Ops in the last
Lite Full higher plan from your account balance month of the current billing
cycle
Lite Basic Change to a Billing amount is deducted WSC_Update_Ops in the last
Lite Full different billing from your account balance month of the current billing
Lite eCommerce cycle cycle
You cannot downgrade Web Site Creator from a higher to a lower version.
Availability
Constraints
• The Web Site Creator account must belong to this domain name account.
• You can only use this command in the last 30 days of the current billing cycle.
• You can only upgrade Lite Basic and Lite Full plans with this command. See Usage section above.
• You can change the billing cycle with this command, with or without upgrading the plan.
3/13/09 582
Input parameters

size
Account Required Name of LWSC account. Must be an account 14
name with format LWSCNNNxNNNN
NewLWSCPlan Optional; default is Level of service you want. Your current plan 13
current plan must be at least Lite Basic (you must use
PurchaseServices or AddToCart to upgrade from
Lite to a higher plan). Permitted values are:
LWSCBasic
LWSCFull
LWSCECommerce
You can upgrade the plan when you are within
30 days of the next billing date.
LWSCBillCycle Optional; default is Billing period, in months. Permitted values are 2
current billing cycle 1, 3, 6, or 12. You can change the billing period
when you are within 30 days of the next billing
date.
HTML, or XML.

AccountStatusID 1 indicates a valid, active account.
Successful True indicates that the query executed successfully
PlanUpdated True indicates that the LWSC plan was successfully upgraded
BillingCycleUpdated True indicates that the LWSC billing cycle was successfully changed
ErrCount) values.
the client.
Notes
3/13/09 583
Example
The following query upgrades Web Site Creator to eCommerce and sends the response in XML format:
http://partnertest.rcomexpress.com/interface.asp?command=WSC_Update_Ops&
uid=rcompartnerid&pw=rcompartnerpw&Account=LWSC337x8128&
NewLWSCPlan=LWSCEcommerce&LWSCBillCycle=6&ResponseType=XML
<AccountStatusID>1</AccountStatusID>
<Successful>True</Successful>
<Successful>True</Successful>
<PlanUpdated>True</PlanUpdated>
<BillingCycleUpdated>True</BillingCycleUpdated>
<Command>WSC_UPDATE_OPS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>rcom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
AddToCart
Purchase
PurchaseServices
ServiceSelect
WSC_GetAccountInfo
WSC_GetAllPackages
WSC_GetPricing
3/13/09 584
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. Index
Index
A RefillAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
account ID RemoveTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
validating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 RPT_GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
accounting SendAccountEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
CommissionAccount . . . . . ......... 75 UpdateAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
GetBalance . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 147 UpdateCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
PE_GetCustomerPricing . . ......... 347 UpdateNotificationAmount . . . . . . . . . . . 560
PE_GetDomainPricing . . . ......... 350 UpdateRenewalSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . ......... 353 validating user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . ......... 355 AddBulkDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . ......... 358 AddContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . ......... 361 AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PE_GetRetailPricinge . . . . ......... 364 AdvancedDomainSearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . ......... 370 auctions
SetResellerServicesPricing ......... 471 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SetResellerTLDPricing . . . ......... 474 authorization key
UpdateAccountPricing . . . . ......... 543 GetContacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
accounts AuthorizeTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
AuthorizeTLD . . . . . . . . . ......... 37 automatic renewals
CheckLogin . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 69 GetCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . ......... 81 GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
CreateSubAccount . . . . . . ......... 86 SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
DeleteSubaccount . . . . . . ......... 109 SetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . ......... 130 UpdateCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
GetAccountPassword . . . . ......... 133 UpdateRenewalSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
GetAccountValidation . . . . ......... 135 availability
GetAllAccountInfo . . . . . . ......... 141 checking domain names . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GetConfirmationSettings . . ......... 157
GetCusPreferences . . . . . ......... 164 B
GetCustomerPaymentInfo . ......... 170 balances
GetDomainCount . . . . . . . ......... 177 GetBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
GetDomains . . . . . . . . . . ......... 189 RefillAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . ......... 241 UpdateNotificationAmount . . . . . . . . . . . 560
GetOrderList . . . . . . . . . . ......... 244 bulk
GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 270 PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
GetResellerInfo . . . . . . . . ......... 273 PurchasePOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
GetSubAccountDetails . . . ......... 282 purchasing domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
GetSubAccounts . . . . . . . ......... 290 pushing domains to another account . . . . 562
GetSubAccountsDetailList . ......... 293 BundleID
GetTLDList . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 296 retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
GetTransHistory . . . . . . . . ......... 299
3/13/09 585
©2003-2009 Register.com, Inc. Index:
C GetCartContent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
cancelling orders country code
DeleteRegistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
transfer orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 country codes
cart Preconfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
AddBulkDomains . . . . . . .......... 15 CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . .......... 21 CreateSubAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . .......... 95 customer notifications
GetCartContent . . . . . . . .......... 149 UpdateRenewalSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
InsertNewOrder . . . . . . . .......... 330 customer support
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 380 GetServiceContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
PurchasePreview . . . . . . .......... 396 customer-defined data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
UpdateCart . . . . . . . . . . .......... 547 DeleteCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . 93
CertConfigureCert . . . . . . . . .......... 40 GetCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CertGetApproverEmail . . . . . .......... 47 customers
CertGetCertDetail . . . . . . . . . .......... 50 CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CertGetCerts . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 54 CreateSubAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CertModifyCert . . . . . . . . . . .......... 57 GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
CertParseCSR . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 60 GetAllAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
CertPurchaseCert. . . . . . . . . .......... 63 GetCustomerPaymentInfo . . . . . . . . . . . 170
certs GetResellerInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
CertConfigureCert . . . . . .......... 40
CertGetApproverEmail . . .......... 47 D
CertGetCertDetail . . . . . . .......... 50 DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
CertGetCerts item list . . . .......... 54 DeleteContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
CertModifyCert . . . . . . . .......... 57 DeleteCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CertParseCSR . . . . . . . . .......... 60 DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
CertPurchaseCert . . . . . .......... 63 DeleteHostedDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
GetCerts product list . . . . .......... 154 DeleteNameserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PurchaseServices . . . . . .......... 399 DeletePOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 66 DeletePOPPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
checking out DeleteRegistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 DeleteSubaccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CheckLogin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 DisableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CheckNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 DNS
checkout CheckNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 380 GetDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
PurchasePreview . . . . . . .......... 396 GetDNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
UpdateCart . . . . . . . . . . .......... 547 ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
CommissionAccount . . . . . . . .......... 75 ModifyNSHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
configure redirect hosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 DNS hosting
configuring extended attributes DeleteHostedDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Preconfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 ExtendDomainDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
contact information PurchaseHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
AddContact . . . . . . . . . . .......... 18 PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 77 domain management
DeleteContact . . . . . . . . .......... 91 AdvancedDomainSearch . . . . . . . . . . . 31
GetAddressBook . . . . . . .......... 137 CheckNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
GetAllAccountInfo . . . . . .......... 141 GetAllDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
GetContacts . . . . . . . . . .......... 160 GetDomainCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
GetForwarding . . . . . . . . .......... 218 GetDomainExp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
GetServiceContact . . . . . .......... 279 GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
GetSubaccountsDetailList .......... 293 GetDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
GetWhoisContact . . . . . . .......... 303 GetDomainStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . .......... 436 GetExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 77 GetExtendInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
contents GetHomeDomainList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
GetPasswordBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
3/13/09 586
GetRegistrationStatus . . . . . . . . . . ... 262 GetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

GetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 264 ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 267 SetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
GetSubAccountPassword . . . . . . . ... 288 domain transfers
PushDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 408 PushDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
renewals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 215 SynchAuthInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 458 TP_CancelOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
SetPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 460 TP_CreateOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
SetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 465 TP_GetDetailsByDomain . . . . . . . . . . . 500
SetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 468 TP_GetOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
SubAccountDomains . . . . . . . . . . ... 486 TP_GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
ValidatePassword . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 568 TP_GetOrderReview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
domain name IDs TP_GetOrdersByDomain . . . . . . . . . . . 514
GetAllDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 TP_GetOrderStatuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
GetHomeDomainList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 TP_GetTLDInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
SubAccountDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 TP_ResendEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
domain name servers TP_ResubmitLocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
CheckNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 72 TP_SubmitOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
DeleteHostedDomain . . . . . . . . . . ... 97 TP_UpdateOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
ExtendDomainDNS . . . . . . . . . . . ... 123 UpdatePushList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
GetDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 173 DomainNameID
GetDNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 175 retrieving for a single domain . . . . . . . . . 182
ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 333 domains
ModifyNSHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 336 adding bulk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PurchaseHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 389 AdvancedDomainSearch . . . . . . . . . . . 31
redirect hosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 336 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
domain names Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 21 get domain password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
checking availability . . . . . . . . . . . ... 66 GetDomainNameID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
DeleteRegistration . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 106 GetDomainSLDTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
GetDomainNameID . . . . . . . . . . . ... 187 ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
GetDomainSLDTLD . . . . . . . . . . . ... 196 ParseDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
monitoring non-real-time purchases . ... 241 PE_GetCustomerPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
NameSpinner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 341 PE_GetDomainPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
ParseDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 345 PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
retrieveing order ID . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 201 PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
ValidatePassword . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 568 PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
domain pricing PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . ... 282 PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
domain registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 330 PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
AddBulkDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 15 SetResellerTLDPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 66 UpdateAccountPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . ... 282 UpdateExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
InsertNewOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 330 dynamic IP
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 380 SetDNSHost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
StatusDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 483
validating user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 69 E
domain renewals editing
Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 116 GetGlobalChangeStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 120 GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail . . . . . . . . 227
GetDomainExp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 180 email forwarding
GetExtendInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 215 Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 267 GetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 468 GetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
UpdateExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . ... 553 GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
domain services GetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
DisableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
EnableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 SetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
GetDomainServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 SetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
3/13/09 587
email services GetCerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . ........... 89 GetConfirmationSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
DeletePOP3 user . . . . . ........... 102 GetContacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
DeletePOPPak . . . . . . ........... 104 GetCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Forwarding . . . . . . . . . ........... 127 GetCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
GetCatchAll . . . . . . . . ........... 152 GetCustomerPaymentInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GetDotNameForwarding ........... 206 GetDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
GetForwarding . . . . . . . ........... 218 GetDNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
GetMailHosts . . . . . . . ........... 236 GetDomainCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
GetPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . ........... 249 GetDomainExp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
GetPOPExpirations . . . ........... 253 GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
GetPOPForwarding . . . ........... 256 GetDomainNameID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
HE_CancelAccount . . . ........... 309 GetDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
HE_ChangePassword . . ........... 312 GetDomainServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
HE_CreateAccount . . . . ........... 315 GetDomainSLDTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
HE_GetAccountDetails . ........... 318 GetDomainSRVHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
HE_GetAccounts . . . . . ........... 321 GetDomainStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
HE_GetPricing . . . . . . . ........... 324 GetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
HE_UpgradeAccount . . ........... 327 GetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
ModifyPOP3 passwords. ........... 338 GetExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . ........... 353 GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
PurchasePOPBundle . . ........... 393 GetExtendInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
RenewPOPBundle . . . . ........... 421 GetForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
ServiceSelect . . . . . . . ........... 436 GetFraudScore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . ........... 439 GetGlobalChangeStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
SetDotNameForwarding ........... 453 GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail . . . . . . . . . . . 227
SetPakRenew . . . . . . . ........... 458 GetHomeDomainList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
SetPOPForwarding . . . . ........... 462 GetHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
SetUpPOP3User . . . . . ........... 480 GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
TP_ResendEmail . . . . . ........... 524 GetMetaTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
EnableServices . . . . . . . . . ........... 113 GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
EPP authorization key GetOrderList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
SynchAuthInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 GetPasswordBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
expiration dates GetPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
GetAllDomains . . . . . . ........... 144 GetPOPExpirations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
GetHomeDomainList . . . ........... 230 GetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
SubAccountDomains . . ........... 486 GetRegHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 116 GetRegistrationStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 120 GetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
ExtendDomainDNS. . . . . . . ........... 123 GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
extended attributes GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 GetResellerInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Preconfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 GetServiceContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
GetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
F GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 GetSubAccountPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
fraud GetSubAccounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
GetFraudScore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 GetSubAccountsDetailList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
getting
G commission balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
GetAccountInfo . . . . ................ 130 GetTLDList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
GetAccountPassword ................ 133 GetTransHistory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
GetAccountValidation ................ 135 GetWhoisContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
GetAddressBook . . . ................ 137 GetWPPSInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
GetAllAccountInfo . . ................ 141 global edit
GetAllDomains . . . . ................ 144 GetGlobalChangeStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
GetBalance . . . . . . . ................ 147 GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail . . . . . . . . 227
GetCartContent . . . . ................ 149
GetCatchAll . . . . . . ................ 152
3/13/09 588
H SetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
HE_CancelAccount . . . . . ............ 309 login
HE_ChangePassword . . . . ............ 312 validating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
HE_CreateAccount . . . . . . ............ 315
HE_GetAccountDetails . . . ............ 318 M
HE_GetAccounts . . . . . . . ............ 321 mail
HE_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . ............ 324 GetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
HE_UpgradeAccount . . . . ............ 327 SetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
history mail records
get transaction history . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
RPT_GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 mail services
host records DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
GetDomainSRVHosts . ............ 198 DeletePOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
GetHosts . . . . . . . . . ............ 233 DeletePOPPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
GetMetaTag . . . . . . . ............ 239 Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
GetRegHosts . . . . . . ............ 259 GetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SetDNSHost . . . . . . . ............ 445 GetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
SetDomainSRVHosts . ............ 447 GetForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
SetHosts . . . . . . . . . ............ 455 GetPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
UpdateMetaTag . . . . . ............ 555 GetPOPExpirations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Hosted Microsoft Exchange GetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
HE_CancelAccount . . ............ 309 HE_CancelAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
HE_ChangePassword . ............ 312 HE_ChangePassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
HE_CreateAccount . . . ............ 315 HE_CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
HE_GetAccountDetails ............ 318 HE_GetAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
HE_GetAccounts . . . . ............ 321 HE_GetAccounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
HE_GetPricing . . . . . . ............ 324 HE_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
HE_UpgradeAccount . ............ 327 HE_UpgradeAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
hosting ModifyPOP3 passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
DeleteHostedDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
ExtendDomainDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 PurchasePOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
PurchaseHosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 RenewPOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
I SetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
identity SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
AddContact . . . . . . .............. 18 SetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Contacts . . . . . . . . .............. 77 SetUpPOP3User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
DeleteContact . . . . .............. 91 mailboxes
GetAddressBook . . .............. 137 retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
GetContacts . . . . . .............. 160 managing domains
GetServiceContact . .............. 279 CheckNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
validating . . . . . . . .............. 69 GetAllDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
identity protection GetDomainCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
DisableServices . . . .............. 111 GetDomainExp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
EnableServices . . . .............. 113 GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
GetWPPSInfo . . . . .............. 306 GetDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
PurchaseServices . .............. 399 GetDomainStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
RenewServices . . . .............. 425 GetExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
ServiceSelect . . . . .............. 436 GetExtendInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
InsertNewOrder . . . . . . .............. 330 GetHomeDomainList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IP address update GetPasswordBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
SetDNSHost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 GetRegistrationStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
items GetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 GetSubAccountPassword . . . . . . . . . . . 288
PushDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
L renewals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
locking domains SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
GetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 SetPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
3/13/09 589
SetRegLock . . . . . . ............. 465 passwords

SetRenew . . . . . . . . ............. 468 get domain password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
SubAccountDomains ............. 486 GetAccountPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ValidatePassword . . ............. 568 GetAccountValidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
metatags GetPasswordBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
GetMetaTag . . . . . . ............. 239 ModifyPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
UpdateMetaTag . . . . ............. 555 SendAccountEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . ............. 333 SetPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
ModifyNSHosting . . . . . . ............. 336 ValidatePassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
ModifyPOP3 . . . . . . . . . ............. 338 PE_GetCustomerPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
multiple domains PE_GetDomainPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
N PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
name servers PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
CheckNSStatus . . . . . . ........... 72 PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
DeleteHostedDomain . . ........... 97 PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
DeleteNameserver . . . . ........... 99 POP mail
ExtendDomainDNS . . . ........... 123 DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
GetCusPreferences . . . ........... 164 DeletePOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
GetDNS . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 173 DeletePOPPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
GetDNSStatus . . . . . . . ........... 175 GetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . ........... 333 GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
ModifyNSHosting . . . . . ........... 336 GetPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
PurchaseHosting . . . . . ........... 389 GetPOPExpirations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
redirect hosting . . . . . . ........... 336 GetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
RegisterNameServer. . . ........... 415 ModifyPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
UpdateCusPreferences . ........... 549 PurchasePOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
UpdateNameServer . . . ........... 558 PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
names RenewPOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
checking availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
ParseDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
NameSpinner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 SetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
SetUpPOP3User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
O Preconfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
orders preconfigure
cancelling transfer orders . . . . . . ..... 491 GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
creating transfer orders . . . . . . . ..... 494 pricing
GetConfirmationSettings . . . . . . ..... 157 AuthorizeTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 241 GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
GetOrderList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 244 GetTLDList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
InsertNewOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 330 HE_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
listing domains in transfer orders . ..... 503 PE_GetCustomerPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
resubmit for locked domain. . . . . ..... 527 PE_GetDomainPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
retrieving Order ID . . . . . . . . . . ..... 201 PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
retrieving transfer order ID . . . . . ..... 500 PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
reviewing orders by domain . . . . ..... 500 PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
reviewing transfer order status . . ..... 517 PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
submitting transfer orders. . . . . . ..... 529 PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
transfer orders for one domain . . ..... 514 PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
updating transfer orders . . . . . . . ..... 533 RemoveTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
SetResellerServicesPricing . . . . . . . . . . 471
P SetResellerTLDPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
packages UpdateAccountPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
WSC_GetAccountInfo . ............ 570 WSC_GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
WSC_GetAllPackages ............ 575 WSC_GetAllPackages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
WSC_GetPricing . . . . ............ 579 WSC_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
WSC_Update_Ops . . . ............ 582 WSC_Update_Ops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
ParseDomain . . . . . . . . . ............ 345 privacy protection
3/13/09 590
DisableServices . . . . . . . . ......... 111 GetContacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

EnableServices . . . . . . . . ......... 113 GetWhoisContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
GetWPPSInfo . . . . . . . . . ......... 306 SyncAuthInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
PurchaseServices . . . . . . ......... 399 registrar lock
RenewServices . . . . . . . . ......... 425 GetCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . . ......... 436 GetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
products SetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
PE_GetCustomerPricing . . ......... 347 UpdateCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . ......... 353 registration
PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . ......... 355 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . ......... 358 Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . ......... 361 GetRegistrationStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . . ......... 364 GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . ......... 370 InsertNewOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
SetResellerServicesPricing ......... 471 UpdateExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
SetResellerTLDPricing . . . ......... 474 validating user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
UpdateAccountPricing . . . . ......... 543 Registry
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 380 GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
purchase ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
AddBulkDomains . . . . . . . ......... 15 RemoveTLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
PurchaseHosting . . . . . . . . . . ......... 389 renewals
PurchasePOPBundle . . . . . . . ......... 393 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
PurchasePreview . . . . . . . . . . ......... 396 Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . ......... 399 GetDomainExp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
purchasing GetExtendInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . . ......... 95 GetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
InsertNewOrder . . . . . . . . ......... 330 SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . . ......... 353 SetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
UpdateCart . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 547 UpdateExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
PushDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 408 RenewPOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
pushing domains RenewServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
UpdatePushList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 reporting
GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
R GetOrderList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
real-time commands GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 116 GetTransHistory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . ........... 120 RPT_GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
ExtendDomainDNS . . . ........... 123 resellers
HE_CreateAccount . . . . ........... 315 GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
HE_UpgradeAccount . . ........... 327 GetConfirmationSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . ........... 380 GetCustomerPaymentInfo . . . . . . . . . . . 170
PurchaseHosting . . . . . ........... 389 GetResellerInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
PurchasePOPBundle . . ........... 393 GetSubAccountDetails . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
PurchaseServices . . . . ........... 399 PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
RenewPOPBundle . . . . ........... 421 reviewing orders
RenewServices . . . . . . ........... 425 listing domains in transfer orders . . . . . . 503
TP_CreateOrder . . . . . ........... 494 TP_GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
TP_ResubmitLocked . . . ........... 527 TP_GetOrderReview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
TP_SubmitOrder . . . . . ........... 529 transfer instructions for a single domain . . 500
UpdateExpiredDomains . ........... 553 transfer order status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
RefillAccount . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 411 transfer orders for one domain . . . . . . . . 514
registering domains RPT_GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
StatusDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 RRPCode 724
RegisterNameServer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 StatusDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
registrant
AddContact . . . . . . . . . ........... 18 S
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 77 search engines
DeleteContact . . . . . . . ........... 91 GetMetaTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
GetAddressBook . . . . . ........... 137 UpdateMetaTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
3/13/09 591
searching RenewServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

AdvancedDomainSearch . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
security SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
CertConfigureCert . . . . . .......... 40 SetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
CertGetApproverEmail . . .......... 47 SetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
CertGetCertDetail . . . . . . .......... 50 SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
CertGetCerts item list . . . .......... 54 SetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
CertModifyCert . . . . . . . .......... 57 SetResellerServicesPricing . . . . . . . . . . 471
CertParseCSR . . . . . . . . .......... 60 SetUpPOP3User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
CertPurchaseCert . . . . . .......... 63 UpdateAccountPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
GetCerts product list . . . . .......... 154 ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
PurchaseServices . . . . . .......... 399 SetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
SendAccountEmail . . . . . . . . .......... 434 SetCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Sender Policy Framework SetDNSHost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
GetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 SetDomainSRVHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
SetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 SetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
servers SetDotNameForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
DeleteHostedDomain . . . .......... 97 SetHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
DeleteNameserver . . . . . .......... 99 SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
ExtendDomainDNS . . . . .......... 123 SetPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
GetDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 173 SetPOPForwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
GetDNSStatus . . . . . . . . .......... 175 SetRegLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
ModifyNS . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 333 SetRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
ModifyNSHosting . . . . . . .......... 336 SetResellerServicesPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
PurchaseHosting . . . . . . .......... 389 SetResellerTLDPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
redirect hosting . . . . . . . .......... 336 SetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
RegisterNameServer. . . . .......... 415 SetUpPOP3User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
UpdateNameServer . . . . .......... 558 shopping cart
services AddBulkDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . .......... 21 AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
delete email user . . . . . . .......... 102 DeleteFromCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . . .......... 89 GetCartContent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DeletePOPPak . . . . . . . .......... 104 InsertNewOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
DisableServices . . . . . . . .......... 111 Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
email forwarding . . . . . . .......... 127 PurchasePreview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
EnableServices . . . . . . . .......... 113 UpdateCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
GetCatchAll . . . . . . . . . .......... 152 SPF
GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . .......... 182 GetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
GetDomainServices . . . . .......... 193 SetSPFHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
GetDomainSubServices. . .......... 204 SRV records
GetDotNameForwarding . .......... 206 GetDomainSRVHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
GetExpiredDomains . . . . .......... 208 SetDomainSRVHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
GetForwarding . . . . . . . . .......... 218 SSL
GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . .......... 236 CertConfigureCert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
GetPOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 249 CertGetApproverEmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
GetPOPExpirations . . . . .......... 253 CertGetCertDetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
GetPOPForwarding . . . . .......... 256 CertGetCerts item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
GetWPPSInfo . . . . . . . . .......... 306 CertModifyCert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ModifyPOP3 passwords. . .......... 338 CertParseCSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
PE_GetCustomerPricing . .......... 347 CertPurchaseCert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PE_GetPOPPrice . . . . . . .......... 353 GetCerts product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
PE_GetProductPrice . . . . .......... 355 PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
PE_GetResellerPrice . . . .......... 358 status
PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . .......... 361 CheckNSStatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . .......... 364 GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . .......... 370 GetExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PurchasePOPBundle . . . .......... 393 StatusDomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
PurchaseServices . . . . . .......... 399 SubAccountDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
RenewPOPBundle . . . . . .......... 421 subaccounts
3/13/09 592
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 86 UpdateAccountPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

DeleteSubaccount . . . . . .......... 109 UpdateCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
get domain list . . . . . . . . .......... 189 UpdateCusPreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
GetAccountPassword . . . .......... 133 UpdateExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
GetAccountValidation . . . .......... 135 UpdateMetaTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
GetConfirmationSettings . .......... 157 UpdateNameServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
GetSubAccountDetails . . .......... 282 UpdateNotificationAmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
GetSubAccounts . . . . . . .......... 290 UpdatePushList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
GetSubAccountsDetailList .......... 293 UpdateRenewalSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
SendAccountEmail . . . . . .......... 434 user ID
support validating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
GetServiceContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 user-defined data
SynchAuthInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 DeleteCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . 93
GetCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . 167
T SetCustomerDefinedData . . . . . . . . . . . 442
technical support users
GetServiceContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 CreateAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
TLD CreateSubAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
AuthorizeTLD . . . . . . . . .......... 37 GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
GetExtAttributes . . . . . . . .......... 211 GetAllAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
GetTLDList . . . . . . . . . . .......... 296 GetCustomerPaymentInfo . . . . . . . . . . . 170
RemoveTLD . . . . . . . . . .......... 418 GetResellerInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
TP_CancelOrder . . . . . . . . . .......... 491
TP_CreateOrder . . . . . . . . . .......... 494 V
TP_GetDetailsByDomain . . . . .......... 500 ValidatePassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
TP_GetOrder . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 503 validating
TP_GetOrderDetail . . . . . . . . .......... 507 user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TP_GetOrderReview . . . . . . . .......... 511 value-added services
TP_GetOrdersByDomain . . . . .......... 514 AddToCart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TP_GetOrderStatuses . . . . . . .......... 517 DeleteAllPOPPaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
TP_GetTLDInfo . . . . . . . . . . .......... 520 DeletePOP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
TP_ResendEmail . . . . . . . . . .......... 524 DeletePOPPak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
TP_ResubmitLocked . . . . . . . .......... 527 DisableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
TP_SubmitOrder . . . . . . . . . .......... 529 email forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
TP_UpdateOrderDetail . . . . . .......... 533 EnableServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
transactions Extend_RGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
get transaction history . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 GetDomainInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
RPT_GetReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 GetDomainServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
transferring domains GetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
GetContacts . . . . . . . . . .......... 160 GetExpiredDomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PushDomain . . . . . . . . . .......... 408 GetMailHosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
SynchAuthInfo . . . . . . . . .......... 489 PE_GetCustomerPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
TP_CancelOrder . . . . . . .......... 491 PE_GetProductPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
TP_CreateOrder . . . . . . .......... 494 PE_GetResellerPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
TP_GetDetailsByDomain . .......... 500 PE_GetRetailPrice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
TP_GetOrder . . . . . . . . .......... 503 PE_GetRetailPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
TP_GetOrderDetail . . . . . .......... 507 PE_SetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
TP_GetOrderReview . . . . .......... 511 PurchasePOPBundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
TP_GetOrdersByDomain . .......... 514 PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
TP_GetOrderStatuses . . . .......... 517 RenewServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
TP_GetTLDInfo . . . . . . . .......... 520 ServiceSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
TP_ResendEmail . . . . . . .......... 524 SetDomainSubServices . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
TP_ResubmitLocked . . . . .......... 527 SetPakRenew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
TP_SubmitOrder . . . . . . .......... 529 SetResellerServicesPricing . . . . . . . . . . 471
TP_UpdateOrderDetail . . .......... 533 UpdateAccountPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
UpdatePushList . . . . . . . .......... 562
W
U Web hosting packages
UpdateAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 WSC_GetAccountInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
3/13/09 593
WSC_GetAllPackages . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
WSC_GetPricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
WSC_Update_Ops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Web Site Creator
create, enable, disable . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
WebSite Creator
WSC_GetAccountInfo . ............ 570
WSC_GetAllPackages ............ 575
WSC_GetPricing . . . . ............ 579
WSC_Update_Ops . . . ............ 582
WhoIs
GetContacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
GetWhoisContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
whois
AddContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DeleteContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
GetAddressBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
WhoIs protection
DisableServices . . . . . ............ 111
EnableServices . . . . . ............ 113
GetWPPSInfo . . . . . . ............ 306
RenewServices . . . . . ............ 425
ServiceSelect . . . . . . ............ 436
Whois protection
PurchaseServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
WSC stand-alone
WSC_GetAccountInfo . ............ 570
WSC_GetAllPackages ............ 575
WSC_GetPricing . . . . ............ 579
WSC_Update_Ops . . . ............ 582
WSC_GetAccountInfo . . . . ............ 570
WSC_GetAllPackages. . . . ............ 575
WSC_GetPricing . . . . . . . ............ 579
WSC_Update_Ops . . . . . . ............ 582
3/13/09 594

API Commands: For Resellers of Domain Names and Related Services

Uploaded by

API Commands: For Resellers of Domain Names and Related Services

Uploaded by

API Commands

March 13, 2009

API command categories

Domain registration commands

Domain management commands—name servers

Domain management commands—contact information

Domain management commands—general

Domain renewal commands

Domain transfer commands

DNS hosting commands

Service management—e-mail services

Service management—identity protection

Service management—SSL certificates

Service management—Web Site Creator

Shopping cart commands

Real-time purchase commands

Customer support commands

Service Available for Available for Available for Our other

Service Available for Available for Available for Our other

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Input parameters for domains

Build the query string using this syntax:

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters for dot-name

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters for RCOM Shield

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters for POP Email

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters Hosted Microsoft Exchange

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters for Email Forwarding and URL

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters for Web Site Creator

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Input parameters for SSL certificates

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Definition

Param name Obligatio Definition Max

Param name Obligatio Definition Max

Param name Obligatio Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Definition

<?xml version="1.0" ?>

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Obligation Definition Max

Returned parameters and values

Param name Definition

Param name Definition

Param name Obligation Definition Max